Home

MELSEC-L CPU Module User`s Manual (Function Explanation

1. nf2lslo 0 2 Ju lt 8 2 00 E A The total number of device points is up to 29 K words Pavica TELA Kari Latch 1 Tis posable to dear wth latch dlear atch 2 It is disabled to clear with latch clear Please do the clear by the program when the remote operation peor Devon KWords stants extended by the latch range setting dun z Ifthe laich E necessary please set the required minimum atch Bit Device JEO KBks en le Eal e pls de tha ac stoy at Pc He sat parra File Register Extended Setting Capacity 128 KPoints Following setting are available Latch i Latch 2 I Device No when select Use the Following file Sym Dig Start End Start End Start EER fi rector eis file setting ange of latch 2 of file register Fie Register ZR R 10 eeni to expanded Cs Extended Data D 10 register expanded link register of a part Extended tink W 16 of file register area p Indexing Setting for ZR Device 32Bi Indexing G Usez z After 0 18 C Use zz Print Window Print Window Preview Acknowledge XY Assignment Default When changing device points note the following The points for the input X output Y cannot be changed The points for the step relay S can be changed to 0 Set each device in increments of 16
2. aq ES Ed an a Processing of the intelligent function module dedicated instruction When using multiple intelligent function module dedicated instructions to one intelligent function module execute the dedicated instructions one by one after the completion device turns on This completion device turns on for one scan when an instruction is completed If the CPU module status is changed from RUN to STOP before the completion device turns on the completion device does not turn on until one scan after the next RUN of CPU module For details on the intelligent function module dedicated instructions and the completion device refer to the following Manual for the intelligent function module used PART 2 Functions In this part the functions of the CPU module and display unit are described CHAPETR 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 0 00 00 00022 e eee 80 CHAPETR 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 0 0 0 0 000 0000 000000004 188 79 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the functions for a CPU module 3 1 Function List The following table lists the functions of the LCPU Item Description Reference Boot operation Transfers data stored on an SD memory card to the program memory or the Page 73 Section 2 9 standard ROM at power on or reset Constant scan Executes a program at a set interval regardless of its scan t
3. Factor number setting area NS Factor Priority A number Error message to be displayed Remarks order Hexadecimal 1 1 AC DC DOWN Power off 2 2 SP UNIT ERROR Intellient function module verification error SP UNIT DOWN Intelligent function module error OPERATION ERROR Operation error 3 3 REMOTE PASS FAIL Remote password error SNTP OPE ERROR SNTP error ICM OPE ERROR Memory card operation error 4 4 FILE OPE ERROR File access error FLASH ROM ERROR Number of flash ROM access exceeded 5 5 PRG TIME OVER Constant scan setting time exceeded w w 6 6 Ro 7 7 Annunciator Ni rm 8 8 mo Do 9 9 BATTERY ERROR S 10 A 3 11 B 55 Z 12 C DISPLAY ERROR Display unit error 3 9 lt 1 When errors having the same priority simultaneously occur the LED corresponding to the first detected error is displayed To disable off the LED indication for the error set 0 to the relevant factor number in SD207 to SD209 Note that even after disabling off the LED indication SMO and SM1 are turned on and the error codes are stored to SDO Ex Disabling off the ERR LED indication upon detection of a remote password error LL Change 3 factor number value to 0 157 3 26 Module Error Collection Function notes This function collects errors occurred in the connected intelligent function module
4. gt 1 1 Scan time constant scan setting gt A When Execute the process as the scan time proceeds is selected 50 is set 0 50 100 T T T T T T T T T 1 END processing Program execution Service processing Waiting time 1 T Service processing time gt oh Sorters 1 1 1 4 Scan time constant scan setting O Even when there is no waiting time the service processing 0 2ms is performed Therefore when the waiting time is less than 0 2ms the constant scan time may be exceeded 95 Sumes 6ulsseoojd solAJeS 9 amp 3 7 Output Mode at Operating Status Change STOP to RUN When the operating status is changed from RUN to STOP the CPU module internally stores the outputs Y in the RUN status and then turns off all the outputs Y Therefore status of the outputs Y can be selected for setting when the CPU module is set back to the RUN status Output the output Y status prior to STOP Previous state e Clear the output Y status Recalculate output is 1 scan later 1 Operation when the operating status is changed from STOP to RUN Operations are explained using the holding circuit below x20 X21 HE yo YO a When outputting the output Y status prior to STOP The CPU module outputs the output Y status immediately before the CPU module is changed to the STOP status and then performs pr
5. Processing 1 PES Device memory Module model name read instruction gt 5 z Reads the model name of the specified module Execution result of the instruction DO TYPERD H4 Checks the execution J D1 result of the instructiony Module model name Bo LJ71C24 R2 Ko SET MO lt in e o re e o i Di LJ71C24 R2 Processing 2 wee 2 Reads the character string 4 eads the character string a se ajl Di LJ71 024 AProcessing 3 1 Identifies the connected module and performs processing according to the module 1 Execution method Use the TYPERD instruction For details refer to the following MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction 168 3 30 CPU Module Change Function with SD Memory Card CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS This function enables to pass data from a module to be changed disconnected to the newly connected CPU module By using this function control can be continued after replacing a CPU module To pass data backup the data to an SD memory card before replacing a CPU module and restore them in the newly connected CPU module before replacing a CPU module Device data SD memory card for storing backup data In gt 3 Restore the backup System data data LCPU 1 Back up data to an SD memory card SII Standard RAM Standard RAM Program memory
6. 2 Change the CPU e module C9 Programming tool Y a ul al 1 Backup data file Only one backup data file can be stored to an SD memory card If any backup data file exists in the SD memory card the file data are overwritten To delete the backup data file select Delete PLC Data of a programming tool 2 Backup data a Backup data selection Select a drive to back up from the following table Backup data drive Description Backup by user Program memory drive 0 All data in the program memory drive 0 Standard RAM drive 3 All data in the program memory drive 3 Allowed Standard ROM drive 4 All data in the program memory drive 4 Device data Internal user device L B F V T ST C D W System data Data managed by the system such as module error history Not allowed backed up by the system 4 Data in the program cache memory are backed up 2 Latch devices or devices set in the latch range are backed up 169 pleg MoweW GS ym uonounJd aBueyo slInpoN Ndo 088 170 b Maximum backup data size The following shows the maximum backup data size Unit K byte Backup target data drive LO2CPU LO2CPU P L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT Program memory drive 0 82 1048 Standard RAM drive 3 130 770 Standard ROM drive 4 516 2056 Device data 128
7. Program B standby type program P500 A HA 110 c RET P508 y1 m RET P501 m A 12 RET END J T Use a common pointer After execution of the standby type program the CPU module re executes the program that called a program in the standby type program CALL P100 instruction execution Interrupt factor occurred END processing END processing END processing Main routine program i 4 f Subroutine program in P100 RET a standby type program 7 y Interrupt program in 10 IRET a standby type program m Point Use common pointers gt Page 278 Section 5 10 If local pointers are used subroutine programs in a standby type program cannot be executed from any other program 66 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING b Changing the program execution type using instructions Use the PSCAN PSTOP or POFF instruction to change a program execution type Page 71 Section 2 8 5 Ex e The PSCAN instruction changes the program DEF to a scan execution type program e The PSTOP instruction changes the program ABC to a standby type program PSCAN DEF PSTOP ABC The program execution type is changed in END processing Therefore the execution type will not be changed in the middle of program execution If different types are set to the same program in the same scan the program will be changed to the type sp
8. 2 22220000 256 Function register FD auauua uaaa aaa 257 PUNCtIONS 4 4 iii Pe be eee 79 G Global device i 285 GX Developer ade dove cl eA BON es pts 18 GX WOKS2 baste io bb dee eee baled eed 18 H HEX hexadecimal 000000005 325 Hexadecimal constant H 283 343 IO assignment setting 306 1 O No specification device U 282 O number sy a a 39 IO number assignment 4 41 IO points of modules i 42 VO refresh time i 316 Index register Z i 264 Index register standard device register Z 264 Initial device value i 87 Initial execution monitoring time 63 Initial execution type program 62 Initial processing i 43 Initial scan time i 63 Initial setting Change o o o oo oo o 222 Inputs X td 235 Input response time setting 97 Instruction execution time 316 Intelligent function module device 262 Internal relay M i 236 Internal system devices nananana ooo 256 Internal user devices i 232 Interrupt pointer l oooooooo o o oo 281 Interrupt program i 54 Interrupt program list monitor et 118 L Ladder ii o ci Way 75 Language Setting o ooooooooo o 225 Latch data backup oooooooooc 163 Latch data backup to standard ROM 162 EatCh function es a 85 Latch range setting 00000005 85
9. Page 283 Section 6 2 3 HEX hexadecimal HEX represents binary data of the CPU module in hexadecimal notation gt Page 284 Section 6 3 In hexadecimal notation four bits are handled as one digit Because the place value in a digit is from 0 to 15 in decimal notation a value larger than nine is represented by A B C D E or F When the value is larger than F the digit is shifted to the higher digit This notation is useful when using 16 bit devices such as the data register and link register 4 BCD binary coded decimal BCD is a data notation that represents a value in the ones place of a decimal number in a binary number As with hexadecimal notation data are represented in four bits but the alphabets A to F are not used This notation is useful when handling data from external devices such as digital switches 3INPOW ndo eu ul pas eyeq y xipuaddy 5 Floating point data In floating point data real number data are handled as a numeric value with the decimal point The single precision floating point data and double precision floating point data are available 5 Page 284 Section 6 4 325 6 Numeric representation list The following table shows the numeric representation of BIN binary DEC decimal HEX hexadecimal and BCD binary coded decimal BIN binary DEC decimal HEX hexadecim
10. 180 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 LEDs indicating restoration status Restoring status can be checked by LED indication as shown below SD693 value Restoration status LED indication Ou Before restoration start MODE On green The color changes at intervals of 800ms as follows 1 MODE Flash orange BAT On green y 2 MODE Flash orange BAT On green USER On red y 3 MODE Flash orange USER On red 1H Restoration in execution By remote operation MODE Flash orange BAT Flash green 2H Restoration completed a e By automatic restoration MODE On green By remote operation MODE Flash orange BAT Flash green USER Flash red FF Restorati N Sen TS e By automatic restorationes MODE On green ERR Flash red 4 Causes of a restoration error If restoration was not completed a diagnostic error is not detected In that case the error cause is stored in SD692 and the error response is returned to the programming tool 4 Only when data are restored by remote operation Error response SD692 value p Error cause number 8004 The CPU module where data are restored is different model from the one where the backup source data are stored 801 Backup data files do not match H e Reading of backup data from an SD memory card was not completed 810H Writing of backup data to the restoration dest
11. B WB HE 8 92D0 a 4 t amp S 8 qC oe E ff MU BB a 92E0 gt E 4 412532 E F GB EF A sE a 92FO E tf J R A E i E T ff Ed Q 9340 R 3 T amp E ft E HK EKAA BH EA 3 9350 HH E A FF E RJ q tm 9 9360 T kR E SB REE MW BE E H 9370 A MM E E E Hh 3 E I R BR 2 e 9380 R TD E B amp 5 I E FR KE 8 9390 LE 8 AS KT E 4 E F amp F F 5 E KR FB gt 93A0 2 E H FP KR X BB SF a amp FA a 93B0 2 E E A E fh 3 fH k 5 EF z 93C0 x E XX 3 Bn Xx E B 5 93D0 HB E E X 4 K E F 2B Kk F 3 3 93E0 A E Be E 4 dl kk A th K 93F0 xz E E A HH H A 5 9440 kk E EE HZ mz a BM B 2 9450 E E Rw E DD eRZRR B MU A mM HE RS S 9460 RE XX E 5 E REEE B amp B BRE A 9470 E Ff kk E fF BF b E FF FEF E te 9480 o H Aa ER E E F BH xx Ff H 9490 tA 3 H 5 A 2 amp B B SF KR ZE E 94A0 ZE E E E M a A A XX HR E 94B0 E FH tk amp E i Y 5 E H E kh mM 94C0 ik E mk iC A y HF KR B SB K 94D0 E EE E E E E E E CO A CG o E 94E0 E hk E EE E BH E H 94FO ERE kh sE th t E E B To the next page 331 0 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 A B C D E F 9540 gt K H E E E RF 2 KF FH A E E 9550 E B i BOS
12. 2009 12 11 TA Major Error 2009 12 11 si moderate Error 2009 12 11 use species 2009 12 11 Minor ror acpcpown 2009 12 11 Stop Monitor _ create CSV File Close 2 Remove the error cause of the continuation errors PLC Diagnosis a 3 Select the Continuation Error Information radio Connection Channel button and checkboxes of the errors to clear and Mocel Name Qoaration status p tch es click the dear Continuationeror button lear Continuation Error erra information cortinuston Error Information PLE status information seectal Selec none Selection Status ror Neszage Abb Ta Char Continuation Eror ml BATTERY ERROR SS DISPLAY ERROR A CPERATION ERROR Status Icon Legend da Use speciied A Minor Bror Stop Monitor Create CSV File 4 Click Yes to clear the error MELSOFT Series GX Works2 5 Open the PLC Diagnostics dialog box and check that the errors have been cleared 1 4 Descriptions of the cleared errors are not deleted from error history data 154 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS b SM and SD Perform the following procedure 1 In SD81 and SD82 check the continuation errors that have been detected b15 T b12 sD81 b11 b8 E b7 b4 b3 b0 I rig dairy iy seuwr DOWN AC DC DOWN BATTERY ERROR FLASH ROM ERROR SP UNIT ERROR ICM OPE ER
13. Current page number of pages ERR IDV INF 3 3 Error individual Error individual i Description 2 Description information information Drive Parameter No Parameter No File name drive name File name Annunciator No F No Time measured value Time Drive No File name File name Program error location SFC block specification File diagnostic information SFC step specification SFC transition specification Step No transition condition Not error Sequence step No Failure information 1 Failure information 2 Failure information 3 3 Error log display Errors that have occurred in the CPU module are displayed in a list The following table shows displayed items Displayed item Description Display number Display order of error information error code error message 1 Error code Error code of the corresponding error Error message Error message of the corresponding error zq Time when errors have occurred is listed in reverse chronological order a Operating procedure Perform the following operation Error log screen 1 Press the button gt CPU gt 15 gt EEE gt CPU gt ERR gt LOG Error list screen 2 To display error information select the target error log using the A and W buttons and press the button 214 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 4 Error clear Continuation errors can be cleared with
14. EB WH R 8DC0 E Y E E kK BCE ET HE KR MR X 8DDO E F amp F HE RF MU E KR KR E FA Mm EB 8DEO F tk hk FA K astas fF FI E R 8DFO E wh ME E R kk E mMm 8E40 Z E E A KR E RES fF Tl tf amp OM WM 8E50 KE 5 WwW th mk Em xXx E B KE 8E60 FF Y t F A au 2 MA t W w 8E70 Zz ME gL 8E80 E E hh ff Mm BR E A FW BAD 8E90 a E amp It Ss UW RF FB E E 8EAO z 6 LB F KB E E HH Y E XH R 8EBO E MH RR F ke RR RR E E HE KR KR E 8ECO E 3 E 8 RX 2 E E E E KH E FH A 8EDO t ER B 3 R O E R 8EEO i A RR Y E E E TF F KR FH ES 8EFO E E 2 hh 4 E H E F FF 8F40 xr MW XK EE BR FH BS A wo R 8F50 z E n amp WH BE ERR 8F60 t RK Mi E E A uo Mm ER 2 A 8F70 it E ll A E R 3 E E E 8 Ms 8F80 E Xx E E 2 wD B amp B B 4 E 8F90 ZE E 2 2 Hb AN XZ FE R E BH KF SA FB 8FAO E AA A BM 5 E E amp B E E fw EF 8FBO EM E Kk B SS E A B E E E 8FCO Ba FH b FA E Rd HH HH E MH 8FDO m E E E 6 EX M FF Z BS E f 8FEO E E XI KR E RN El b amp R FF tft E 8FFO HK K E ZE E E E te ff To the next page 330 APPENDICES 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 A B C D E F 9040 H EJE Et E A 88 msRGR RS
15. Processing at OUT CO instruction X0 OFF to ON END OUT CO END E Processing Coil ON OFF Current value update Contact ON b Current value update count value 1 The current value is updated count value 1 at the leading edge off on of the OUT CO instruction The current value is not updated while the coil is off or when it remains on or turns off from on by the OUT CO instruction Program example xO Ki0 co Current value update timing END OUT CO END OUT CO END OUT CO Program __ Wt ft ON x0 OFF f f ON Coil of CO OFF Current value update Current value update 250 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 3 Resetting the counter To clear the current value and to turn off the contact of the counter use the RST instruction At the time of execution of the RST instruction the counter value is cleared and the contact is also turned off a Precautions for resetting the counter Execution of the RST instruction also turns off the coil of counter If the execution condition for the OUT instruction is still on after execution of the RST instruction turn on the coil of counter at execution of the OUT instruction and update the current value count value 1 Program example MO K10 co RST co In the above program example when MO turns on from off the coil of CO turns on updating the current value When CO reaches the preset value finally the co
16. 2 Ensure that there is no overlap of interrupt pointer numbers Point Interrupt programs can be managed as one separate program standby type program 2 gt Page 65 Section 2 8 3 2 Restrictions on creating an interrupt program a PLS and PLF instructions The PLS and PLF instructions perform off processing in the next scan of which the instruction is executed Therefore the device which is turned on by the instruction remains on until the same instruction is reexecuted X0 XO i PLS MoH 1 PLS MOH END 0 10 yIRETEND O END 0 10 IRET END O ON xo QFE 3 ON OFF Turns off by executing the PLS MO instruction Turns on by executing the PLS MO instruction at the rise of X0 off on b El and DI instructions Do not execute the El or DI instruction during interrupt program execution c Timer T and counter C Do not use the timer T and counter C in interrupt programs 99 weJ6oldg 1dnJelul z 3 Operation when an interrupt factor occurs The following restrictions are applied to the interrupt program depending on the interrupt factor occurrence timing a When an interrupt factor occurs before the interrupt program execution status is enabled The CPU module stores the interrupt factor occurred As soon as the interrupt program execution status is enabled the CPU module executes the interrupt program corresponding to the stored interrupt facto
17. Batch Register Batch Disable 2 Select the checkboxes for registered data to disable and click the cancel registration button The data can also be disabled by any of the following operation e Powering off and then on the CPU module e Resetting the CPU module e Writing program files stored in the program memory to the CPU module while it is in the STOP status e Clearing the program file stored in the program memory while the CPU module is in the STOP status Formatting the program memory while the CPU module is in the STOP status b Number of settings that can be simultaneously disabled in one scan Eight executional conditioned device test settings can be simultaneously disabled in one scan When nine or more executional conditioned device test settings are to be simultaneously disabled they are disabled over multiple scans 128 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 7 Batch disabling executional conditioned device test settings 1 Open the following message box Debug gt Executional Conditioned Device Test lt gt Batch Disable Executional Conditioned Device Test MELSOFT Series GX Works2 A Every executional condition will be disabled Do you want to continue This operation is also available from the Check Disable Executional Conditioned Device Test Registration dialog box 8 Conditions that registration or disabling is not available In the following cases executional conditioned device test set
18. CPU module a main block an extension block KM1 KM2 KM3 KM1 KM2 KM3 LO2CPU LO2CPU P 28 80 60 28 105 60 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 21 70 50 21 100 50 8 Data logging function For the increase in scan time when using the data logging function refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Data Logging Function APPENDICES Appendix 4 Data Used in the CPU Module In the CPU module data such as numeric values and alphabets are represented as a series of bits 0 and 1 This notation is called BIN binary In addition DEC decimal HEX hexadecimal BCD binary coded decimal and floating point data are available 1 BIN binary code BIN is a data notation where a value is represented as a series of bits 0 and 1 Each place digit is shifted to the higher digit when the value exceeds 1 The value ranged from 32768 to 32767 can be stored in the CPU module Most significant bit for determination of positive negative value Bit name gt b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Bit weight gt 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Il Il Il Il Il ll Il Il Il Il Il Il Il Il Il Il Decimal value 32768 163848192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 A value is negative when the most significant bit is 1 2 DEC decimal DEC represents binary data of the CPU module in decimal notation
19. 218 Built in Ethernet port setting 309 Built in I O function monitor 208 Built in I O Function Setting 311 C CCA Ds o id e dd dada edad 18 Changing the program execution type 71 Character codes available in the display unit 327 Character string i 284 Checking operation i 28 Clock function o 183 Clock Setting ss ee se a A 216 COMMON pointer anaa aaaea 280 Common processing time 321 Communications with intelligent function modules 76 Constant scan i 82 Constant scan time setting 82 GonstantS pacien Reda e es 283 Contrast adjustment i 226 Convenient usage of devices 285 Converting a program 0 c eee eee 24 Counter C a ica es ae ee Eee ee as 250 CPU modules en es ee ee a ee he 18 CPU module change function with SD memory card A ee a 169 CPU module functi0nS oooooooo 80 CPU module processing time 315 CPU monitor test i 193 GPU SEHINOS ciaci n aa idas 216 Creating a programM i 23 Creating a project iii 22 D Data logging function i 324 Data register D i 253 Data used in the CPU module 325 Debug from multiple programming tools 145 DEC decimal 0 eee eee 325 Decimal constant K i 283 Device lear iure RAN as 201 Device memory 00000 00 eee eee 186 Device monitor teSt o oooooooooooo 193 Device
20. Check the interface type and correctly connect the cable Incorrect wiring connecting the cable to an incorrect interface may cause failure of the module and external device Tighten the terminal block screw within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause short circuit fire or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit fire or malfunction When disconnecting the cable from the module do nat pull the cable by the cable part For the cable with connector hold the connector part of the cable For the cable connected to the terminal block loosen the terminal screw Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation To use the high speed counter function ground the shield cable on the encoder side relay box Always ground the FG and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor Failure to do so may cause malfunction Mitsubishi programmable controllers must be installed in control panels Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the co
21. DEV MON TEST CPU MON TEST DEVICE CLEAR m DEVICE MEMORY FILE REGISTER FORCED ON OFF SET ON OFF CLR FORCE H CLR ALL FORCES LIST FORCES t SCAN TIME MON BLT IN I O MON BLT IN POSITION m BLT IN COUNTER BLT IN ERR CLR ERROR MONITOR MONITOR m LOG ERR LOG DSP CLEAR CPU SETTINGS CLOCK SETTING m MOD MON TEST SPECIFY I O No MODULE LIST MOD SETTINGS SPECIFY I O No INIT CHANGE MODULE LIST o USER MESSAGE USER MSG DSP OPTIONS LANGUAGE L CONTRAST BACKLIGHT POPUP POP BLK DISABLE 1 Menus lower than the initial setting change screen depend on the selected module 189 3 Standby screen The standby screen is the initial screen of the display unit The screen displays year month day day of the week hour minute and second The internal time of the CPU module is automatically read to the display unit Pressing any button moves you to the function selection screen 1 1 The button is invalid 4 Backlight a Normal status The backlight lights up green When any button is not pressed within set lighting period the backlight will turn off The backlight will turn on again in the following cases Any button is pressed A user message is popped up An error is detected fr
22. Error does not occur but incorrect operation may be caused Or Oth binati ren ee es PARAMETER ERROR error code 3000 is detected For intelligent function modules the number of I O points must be the same b I O points of modules The number of I O points for each module selected in the I O Assignment tab is set in priority to those of connected modules If the preset number of I O points is less than those of connected I O modules the available points for the connected I O module are decreased Ex If the number of I O points is set to 16 points in the I O Assignment tab to the module where a 32 point input module is connected the second half 16 points of the 32 point input module are invalid If the preset number of I O points exceeds those of connected I O modules the exceeded number of points will not be used Set the last I O number within the I O point range Failure to do so causes SP UNIT LAY ERR c Start XY setting Note that in the following two cases the start XY setting may be duplicated SP UNIT LAY ERR occurs if the start X Y is duplicated e Start XY values are not in the correct order e Modules with and without the start XY setting automatically assigned module are mixed 42 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 2 3 Scan Time Structure A CPU module sequentially performs the following processing in the RUN status Scan time is the time required for all processing and executi
23. Execution Result Device Label Data Type Setting Value Reregister For details on current value changing refer to the following GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common If a program is edited during debugging the program can be written to the CPU module even while the CPU module is in the RUN status 3 Page 145 Section 3 22 28 CHAPTER 1 BASIC PROCEDURE FOR PROGRAMMING 1 7 Saving a Project To save a project open the Save As dialog box O Project gt Save As Save Location C Program Files Browse Workspace Project List Workspace Name Workspacel Project Name poet sue CAI co Switch the window by clicking this button Save as a Single File Format Project when you want to use single File Format project MELSOFT Navigator does not support this Format ty CD ae Item Description 5 Enter the storage destination folder drive or path of the workspace Folders can be browsed for selection by Save Folder Path y clicking the Browse button o D Q Workspace Project List Select a workspace Double click Workspace to display a project list Workspace Name Enter a name for the workspace Project Name Enter a name for the project Title Enter a title for the project 4 Projects can also be saved without titles Point When perform communication between a programming tool and a CPU module through GOT or a network module check
24. Parameter No Parameter item Setting location Reference 3000 WDT Watchdog Timer Setting Page 84 Section 3 3 30014 Error Check Page 153 Section 3 24 30024 Operating Mode When there is an Error PLC RAS 30034 Constant Scanning Page 82 Section 3 2 300A Module Error History Collection Page 158 Section 3 26 0400 Slot setting Page 39 Section 2 2 04034 Error Time Output Mode Page 98 Section 3 9 40044 Error Time Operation Mode IO Assignment 04054 IO Response Time Page 97 Section 3 8 04094 Switch Setting 5001H 1 Valid Module During Other Station Access CC Link IE Field Network Page 312 Appendix 1 3 5003 1 Routing Parameter setting 70004 Program Setting Program Page 60 Section 2 8 80024 SFC Program Start Mode 80034 Start Conditions SFC 80064 Output Mode When the Block is Stopped A080H 1 Number of Modules Setting ANMO0H 1 Network Setting ANM1H 1 Refresh Parameter SES lol Nao Page 312 Appendix 1 3 setting ANM2H 1 Common Parameter ANM3H 1 Intrinsic parameter B000H Positioning and High speed counter functions settings B001H Input Signal Function Selection B002H Output Signal Function Selection B003H Input Response Time B004H Interrupt Processing Condition B005H Error Time Output Mode B006H B007 Axis1 Positioning Parameter B0084 B0094 Axis1 OPR Parameter Axis1 Positioning Data BOOAH BOOB
25. Target Data Target Memory a Data T Read Prote Write Protection Sa Registered A Registered Aa Registered Ha Registered Setting Ex Cancel 2 Enter password s and click the OK button Input Disable Password Disable password for the selected file Disable Condition Read Protectior Write Protection v Disable Password Read Protection ERE ERRORS E DE Disable Password Write Protection PR r Explanation of Registration Conditions Registration Conditions Read protection Write protection Read protection Write protection Valid Characters Use 4 to 32 single byte characters numeric characters alphabets A Z and a z single byte blanks and 8 lt gt 7 _ lio Passwords are case sensitive 3 The registration status appears as Disable Disable Password CE PIOMSSEJ Blld LLE Click the oK button The passwords are Target Data disabled Target Memory Program Memory Device Memory y Disable passwords for data in the programmable controller spiomssed ell Bunas LLE Write Protection MAIN SA Disable a Disable JP parameter PARAM n Registered A Registered 103 6 Precautions a Boot from an SD memory card Once a password is set the password is related to the file so that performing a boot operation transfers the password of the boot source to the destination While a password is related cha
26. defined messages for display unit When the module receives a message during function execution the message is displayed on the display unit UMSG D1000 Executing user message instruction UMSG will issue a user message aa For details on User message instruction refer to the following MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction Point O Under the USER MESSAGE menu selected from the function selection screen the user message displayed last can be displayed again MENU SELECT However the user message will not be displayed if it is not held in the following cases A user message is attempted to be displayed after User message instruction where empty character strings have been specified as an argument is executed A user message is attempted to be displayed while User message instruction has not been executed after the CPU module is powered off and then on or is reset User message instruction where a null code 00H has been specified as an argument is executed while a user message is displayed 4 When a displayed language is switched by language setting the language of a user message is not changed O A user message is displayed whenever the User message instruction is on the rising edge or there is a change in the message If the intervals between the rising edges or changes in user mes
27. e Character string 6 1 Decimal Constant K The decimal constant K is a device used to specify decimal data in programs Specify it as KO example K1234 in programs In the CPU module data are stored in binary BIN gt Page 325 Appendix 4 The specification ranges for decimal constants are as follows The most significant bit represents a sign bit e When using word data 16 bit data K 32768 to K32767 When using 2 word data 32 bit data K 2147483648 to K2147483647 6 2 Hexadecimal Constant H The hexadecimal constant H is a device used to specify hexadecimal or BCD data in programs For BCD data each digit of a hexadecimal number is specified with O to 9 In programs specify it as HO example H1234 Page 325 Appendix 4 The specification ranges for hexadecimal constants are as follows When using word data 16 bit data 00004 to FFFFy For BCD data 0000 to 99994 e When using 2 word data 32 bit data 00000000y to FFFFFFFFy For BCD data 000000004 to 999999994 283 y juezsuoy Ieuloed 1 9 6 3 Real Number E he real number E is a device used to specify real numbers in programs In programs specify it as ED example E1 234 2 gt Page 312 Appendix 1 3 X1 EMOVP E1 234567 Do i 1 Specification range a Real number setting range e For single precision floating point data 2128 lt Device lt 2 126 0 27126 lt Device lt 2128 e For double prec
28. executed like initial processing to an intelligent function module Control by one program l Processing i performed once 1 Processing Creating an initial execution type program Program A Initial execution type program Program B One program is divided into an initial execution type program and scan execution type program Scan execution type program After completion of all the initial execution type program execution END processing is performed In the next scan and later scan execution type programs are executed Power on or STOP gt RUN sg Ca Initial execution type program A Initial execution type program B Y Initial execution type program n 1 scan Scan execution type program If there are multiple initial execution type programs the CPU module executes them starting from the one that was set first CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 2 Initial scan time Initial scan time is the execution time of initial execution type program When multiple programs are executed the initial scan time will be the time required for completing all the initial execution type program execution Since the CPU module stores the initial scan time into the special register SD522 and SD523 the initial scan time can be checked by monitoring SD522 and SD523 Accuracy 0 1ms SD522 SD523 Stores the initial scan
29. gt 50 50 50 gt 50 4 turned off a new annunciator number stored in SD63 0 1 2 y 3 2 SD64 will be stored in SD62 SD64 0 gt 50 50 50 50 Na SD63 value is decremented by 1 If the SD63 SD65 0 0 25 25 F 1023 value is changed to 0 SM62 is turned off SD66 0 0 0 1023 fi 0 SD67 0 0 0 0 0 1 The specified annunciator number is deleted 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 and the other annunciator numbers in the register addressed after the deleted one are shifted SD79 0 0 0 ol accordingly e Data stored in the special register SD62 to SD79 after execution of the LEDR instruction SETF50 SETF25 SETF1023 LEDR TS E 2 The annunciator number in SD64 is stored SD62 0 50 50 so 15062 pe 3 SD63 value is decremented by 1 SD63 0 gt l gt 2 gt 3 gt 2 If the SD63 value is changed to 0 SM62 is sD64 0 gt 50 50 50 25 tymed ef SD65 0 0 25 25 ES 1023 SD66 0 0 1023 0 SD67 0 0 0 0 Sd 0 1 The annunciator number in SD64 is deleted and the other annunciator numbers in i 1 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i the register addressed SD65 and after are SD79 0 0 0 0 0 shifted accordingly an Nw a gt Point FP zg pe If the LEDR instruction is executed while the annunciator is on and at the same time the operation continuation error that has 3 v higher priority than the annunciator has occurred the LEDR instruct
30. lil taa of TO 1 1 1 1 1 Pit gt lt al i 110ms 110ms 110ms f When the set value is changed after time out Even if the set value is changed to a larger value the timer remains timed out and does not start the operation 248 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES g When using multiple timers When using multiple timers provide the timers from the last one to be measured because current value of the timers are updated upon execution of OUT TO or OUT STO instruction Ex Creating an on off ladder using two timers Correct program example Coil of T1 is turned on for one scan after TO is turned on TO Ki0 al Measures for one second after TO is turned on K10 TO A Measures for one second when 11 is off To MO Alternates on and off once every second OUT T1 OUT T1 OUT T1 OUT T1 OUT T1 OUTT1 OUT T1 OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO END processing END processing processing END processing END processing processing END processing Ts te gt ON i i i Coil of TO OFF 4 E fy OFF 3 ON i I Contact H i i i i H i Conu OFF t ko Current f value of TO 0X0 oxi 9X10 i 10X0 la 1s gt ON Coil of T1 OFF A OFF ON Contact of T1 OFF i OFF Current value of T1 l Oxo oxi 9X10 10X0 e is 4 Incorrect program exa
31. takes priority when a contact of output Y is used in the program Operation Input X operation Output Y operation Forced on registered The CPU module performs program operations using inputs forcibly turned on The CPU module outputs on externally regardless of the results of program operations Forced off registered The CPU module performs program operations using inputs forcibly turned off The CPU module outputs off externally regardless of the results of program operations Forced on off cancellation The CPU module performs program operations using external inputs The CPU module outputs the results of program operations externally The following shows the input output operation when a forced on off operation is performed Forced off of Y10 Output forced on off operation Output refresh PP RES External output OFF A 110 is off Input refresh Input of XO ON 77 gt gt External input Input forced on off operation Forced off of XO X0 is on fo Program execution MO E frio D xo E External input is forcibly turned off grn Y10 E Qu N Remains on in a program even if forced off is executed TEND external output is off 5 2 Specifications HO UO psoloJlndinoHndul leueyx3 81 a CPU module status Forced on off can be registered regardless of t
32. 0 1ms Current value SD520 SD521 Minimum value SD524 SD525 Maximum value sD526 SD527 ae the scan time of 1ms or less unit us gt Stores the scan time in increments of 1ms Ex when the stored values in SD520 and SD521 are 3 and 400 respectively the scan time is 3 4ms 1 2 3 316 IO refresh time Use the following expression to calculate the I O refresh time Note that the I O refresh time for the built in special functions is excluded VO refresh time Number of input refresh points x KM1 number of output refresh points 2 x KM2 ys 1 The number of input refresh points is the value obtained by dividing the number of input points by 16 h 72 The number of output refresh points is the value obtained by dividing the number of output points by 16 h When a CPU module is connected to a When a CPU module is connected to an CPU module main block extension block KM1 KM2 KM1 KM2 LO2CPU LO2CPU P 1 5 1 0 2 3 1 8 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 1 5 1 0 2 3 1 8 Processing time for the instruction DUTY instruction in END processing Using the DUTY instruction increases the END processing time because the user timing clock SM420 to SM424 and SM430 to SM434 specified with the instruction is turned on or off in END processing Processing time in END processing CPU module When set to 1 When set to 5 LO2CPU L02CPU P 6 9 us 7 4 us L26CPU BT L26CP
33. 2 The annunciator number in SD65 0 0 gt 25 25 SD64 is stored in SD62 SD66 0 1023 Up to 16 annunciator numbers SD67 0 0 can be stored SD79 0 0 0 0 The USER LED on the front of the CPU module turns on red Point Whether to turn on the USER LED can be set using the LED control function gt Page 156 Section 3 25 3 Turning off the annunciator Use any of the following instructions a RST FO instruction This is used to turn off the annunciator number that was turned on with the SET FO instruction b LEDR instruction This is used to turn off the annunciator number stored in SD62 and SD64 c BKRST instruction This is used to turn off all of the annunciator numbers within the specified range d OUT FO instruction One annunciator number can be turned on or off with the same instruction However even if an annunciator number is turned off with the OUT FO instruction the off processing described in 4 in this section is not performed If the annunciator is turned off with the OUT FO instruction execution of the RST FO LEDR or BKRST instruction is required 238 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 4 Processing after annunciator off e Data stored in the special register SD62 to SD79 when the annunciator is turned off with the RST FO or BKRST instruction SET F50 SET F25 SET F1023 RST F25 2 If the existing annunciator number in SD64 is SD62 0
34. 9050 R E 3 pb E R EE KR BR RF E B B q 9060 FR A E E HF YH yz 5 HF E A EJ E 9070 E A B A A E 3 F HK A F E 9080 E K E BM Rx E FF BB FEF K HB AAD 9090 in E 23 RE E E e BA FB A f E 90A0 H E MH mh 2B tH BS E E E E E 90B0 E fF E YE A E FB A BR Hh 90C0 E A tf FA kh amp E F 5 A A 90D0 E FF AZ FH DE E B 6 90E0 E Y th A F 56 B KZ Il HE 90FO Eb RE KH FB al F am KR 9140 i E mR fe B E BR E E E amp A amp 9150 MN A E E E ml Y E B M 9160 no R 8 E MB A E E as Al XA 9170 x E RR t B RX XA B E BRB E E f E RX 9180 E E E E E E Y E 4 KR E 8 KE B 9190 a E Y E R E E E E BE amp E fF fa 91A0 E E q Hf A E E AA E BR A BB RB 91B0 k E FF A E a F KF E B amp B A K 9100 E m 2 B tt E B E K E A Sm 91D0 t E E 8 4 RF iF E F 91E0 k E 4 Rt E E FH a B E JE 91FO R HH RE B E E A HF F Mm B 9240 nm E R E qu M6 E amp 8 F 9250 B amp E E E A YX X R um te He HB 9260 E Gh E YM tf R E KR ff A Fh 9270 ib E it fF E KK ww E b E HTH KR F 9280 Z Kk KF fF t E E tH BR HE E E R 9290 E EEE ARA gt 4 HN T X A CUO 92A0 R T BH OR E Mm EL BH B FR re FT Bk RB BR 92B0 fs GH E E TE 5 y 6 E KR HX y gt 92C0 E kk E tH E
35. AA sgh 3 Specifying a buffer memory address 23 Specify the buffer memory address of the module selected in 2 in this section Perform the following operation S z a8 Module monitor test screen 1 Press the button S 2 a 32 gt 3 d Buffer memory address input format selection screen 2 Select the input format of a buffer memory address using the A and W buttons and press the button Buffer memory address ee screen 3 Move the cursor using the 4 and gt buttons increase or decrease an address digit using the A and y buttons and press the button 219 4 Specifying display format Perform the following operation Buffer memory monitor screen 1 Press the gt button y Display format selection screen 2 Select display format using the A and y buttons and press the button 5 Specifying a device comment To display a device with device comment perform the following operation 2 Buffer memory monitor screen 1 Press the lt button l Device comment display selection screen 2 Select DSP DEV COMMENT using the A and y buttons and press the button 4 Device comments are displayed only in the following screens e Buffer memory monitor screen Buffer memory test value check screen Buffer memory test screen 2 To display a device comment preset Comment File Used in a Command in the PLC File tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box 220 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY
36. IO gt Page 281 Section 5 11 Other interrupt programs have to wait until processing of the interrupt program being executed is completed Concurrence of multiple Interrupt interrupt factors enabled El Y p Main routine ee ee 0 1100 program 1150 High Interrupt program 150 Interrupt program 1100 Priority Execution Interrupt program 1150 Low Wait status IRET d When the same interrupt factor as that of the interrupt program being executed occurs When the same interrupt factor as that of the interrupt program being executed occurs more than one time before completion of interrupt program processing the interrupt factors of 10 to 115 145 and 150 to 1255 are stored only once and then the interrupt program corresponding to each stored interrupt factor is executed after completion of current interrupt program execution The interrupt factors of 128 to 131 and fixed scan execution type programs are all stored and then all the interrupt programs corresponding to interrupt factors are executed after completion of current interrupt program execution welBolg 1dnJelul z 57 e When an interrupt factor occurs during link refresh The link refresh is suspended and an interrupt program is executed Even if the Block data assurance per station setting is enabled in the CC Link IE or MELSECNET H network this setting does not work when a device set as a refresh tar
37. Manual Data Logging Function CC Link IE Field Network compatible Compatibility with the range extension of the index resisters for modification at specifying Jn and Un by the dedicated instruction Z0 to Z19 13012 or later Page 259 Section 5 4 MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module 1 53F or later User s Manual Manuals for the network module and the intelligent function module used Simple PLC communication function 13042 or later MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In Ethernet Function 1 62Q or later Memory check function storage of device memory error information and program error location Program cache memory auto recovery function 14012 or later MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design as Maintenance and Inspection Page 187 Section 3 34 314 Function that is not related to serial No or software version APPENDICES Appendix 3 CPU Module Processing Time This section describes the CPU module processing time Appendix 3 1 Time Required for Each Processing Included in Scan Time This section describes how to calculate the time required for processing and execution in the scan time Processing in the RUN status Y Program check gt Y gt 1 0 refresh I O refresh time dao L7 Page 316 Appendix 3 1 1 Y Execution of the DUTY instruction in END processing Instruction execution time in END
38. Seta memory for storing the local device file and a ore file name f Use the Following file OD Project window gt Parameter gt Corresponding Memory PLC Parameter gt PLC File File Name 3 Write the parameters to the CPU module Note that the local device range is common to all programs and cannot be changed for each program 239 8907 ZZ Ex If a local device range is specified as MO to M100 this range setting applies to all programs that use the local device iio Program A Program B Program C Local device range is Legal Lecl Enea common to all programs device device device brog i M100 Point O The 32 bit index modification range must not overlap with the local device setting range of the index register If overlapped 32 bit index modification values will be written over the local device values O Ifthe size of the local device in the standard RAM is set to be changed while a sampling trace file is stored in the standard RAM the sampling trace file will be cleared To save the trace results store them in a personal computer O All of the devices that have not been set as local devices are global devices 287 2 Setting a local device in units of program Use of the local device can be set for each program and this function can reduce the scan time Also since the area for saving and restoring data are not required for the programs not using a local device th
39. X1FF1 to X1FFE gt X1FFF 9 When X1 is specified as a monitor target F indicates the on off status of X10 b Monitoring a word device display format 16 bit integer The specified device and display format a value and bit status of the specified device can be monitored The device number can be changed by 1 word 16 bits with the and W buttons Display format Bit position counted y _ Device value from the first bit of the gt specified device On off status of bits ON E OFF __ 197 JSOVJOWUOW solAed L Z y 189 1 JOYUON NO lt p c Monitoring a bit device display format 32 bit integer The specified device and display format and a value of the specified device can be monitored The device number can be changed by 1 word 16 bits T the and W buttons Bit position counted from the specified device Display format Device value On off status of Y ON E WORE 2 4 Even if the display format is set to 32 bit integer decimal or 32 bit integer hexadecimal a bit device value is displayed in 16 bit integer decimal or 16 bit integer hexadecimal d Monitoring a word device display format 32 bit integer The specified device and display format and a value of the specified device can be monitored The device number can be changed by 1 word 16 bits with the and W buttons lt Display format D
40. Z E Kk E A BF F tk E mR E 88D0 R RH tt E FF RR E B f E R 2 K 88FO 6 ct E W 8 amp JE KM 8940 Ee E E wt A F 8 FH E e CB FB HF Kt 8950 A E 8 A E RE BE A E amp SF B 8960 E E a E E EX E R KF K kk E E HE A M 8970 E Xx A AM E tt R ft su H E KR A 8980 E E E E ZE B 8 00 K E Xx dz 8 8990 t w BA A E tf RR E 3 M RF E WH FF 89A0 E te Kk BE E GS E B amp B amp Mm wm E EF Tt 89B0 E MH a2 E ff E RR kk hh th 89C0 E 3 E SF FH E E E RK m X H 89D0 BR B ff DT th a E E E E E 89E0 E k R F 4 KR Mm sg E KR BF 89FO z ff tt E 2 tk E E hk E hk hh 8A40 fl mk 8 RR RE E F ZE HW RF HR 8A50 Z E E BR E Rss E HK HF B E 8 8A60 mm 5 a tt B DE xx REBRE B 8A70 A E B AX A Z gB 8A80 E E amp A Fl b t A A 5 8 BD OR 8A90 HE E E Kk FHF HH E 3 A mM HR 6B FF E W 8AA0 E amp Rh Ct E TH 8 H ZA A H 2 FE E 8ABO E FS 7 E R E am HH tH E B x E 8ACO HE R E amp BM amp 4 4 HF hm Fe 8AD0 RX BH E E FA mM 8 tf aA F amp F FF Rk 8AE0 E R a m E E TE E MM PP tk l E F 8AFO E F tk A BR E E HR H Ss To the next page 329 yun Aejdsig ay ul eldqelleAV sepoD JeloeJedD G xipueddy 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 A B C D E F 8B40 5 a A A Mm ft BB RF Ba
41. a Displayed items The following items are displayed Displayed item Description Setting range Current value m Current counter value 2147483648 to 2147483647 Frequency f A frequency of the high speed counter function 100000 to 100000Hz Measurement status of the high speed counter n Measurement Operating not operating function Rotation speed r Rotation speed of the high speed counter function 12000000 to 12000000r minute 2 Error code Error code of the high speed counter function ABSENT or an error code is displayed A This applies when 1 Phase Multiple of 1 1 Phase Multiple of 1 A Phase only or CW CCW is set for Pulse Input Mode 2 This applies when 200kpps is set for Counting Speed Setting 3 If pulses exceeding the number of pulses shown in the performance specifications are input this range may be exceeded 209 Joyuow uOROUTY O URNE SZY 189 1 JOYUON NO lt p b Operating procedure Perform the following operation High speed counter function monitor CH selection screen 1 Select CH1 or CH2 using the A and y buttons El a S High speed counter function monitor target selection screen 2 Select PRESENT VAL MON PULSE FREQUENCY or ROTATION SPD using the A and y buttons and press the button High speed counter function current value monitor screen The displayed items are shown High speed counter function frequency monitor
42. or s of the fixed scan interval Fixed Scan fixed scan execution type program How to use a local device file can be set for each program by proceeding to another dialog box gt Page 288 Section 7 2 2 60 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 1 Program sequence in the CPU module The following shows the program sequence after the CPU module is powered on or its operating status is changed from STOP to RUN Use an appropriate type of program as required Power on or STOP RUN _ e lea Executed once when the CPU module is powered on or switched from STOP to RUN Initial execution type program 1 i END processing 4777 e Executed at specified Fixed scan execution intervals type program gt L e Executed upon request Scan execution Standby type type program program gt Program execution sequence Program execution when a subroutine program or interrupt program is called suweJBo1g sldllInIN Buynoexy gZ 61 2 8 1 62 Initial execution type program Initial execution type program is executed only once when the CPU module is powered on or its operating status is changed from STOP to RUN This type of program can be used as a program that need not be executed from the next scan and later once it is
43. order of the numbers set in the Program tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box b When both fixed scan execution type program and interrupt program exist When a fixed scan execution type program and an interrupt program 128 to 131 reach the specified time at the same timing the interrupt program will be given priority c When the execution condition is established during END processing When the execution condition is established during the waiting time of the constant scan execution or the END instruction a fixed scan execution type program is executed Constant scan 1 2 gt Fixed scan interval Condition p established Scan execution FF E END processing type program Fixed scan execution 1 H type program 1 Waiting time 2 If processing is not completed within the waiting time the scan time increases 2 Processing at program execution type change For how to save and restore data in the index register when the program execution type is changed refer to 257 Page 58 Section 2 7 4 The method is the same as that for interrupt programs 69 weJBold ad uollnoexe ueos pexlj y 8g z suweJBo1g adn in Bunnoex3 gZ 3 Precautions a Execution interval of a fixed scan execution type program Execution interval of a fixed scan execution type program may increase from the preset interval depending on the time set for disabling interrupts by the DI instruction interrupt disabled t
44. the PLC type because the modules could be connected with wrong model names If the modules are connected with wrong model names data may not be written or read properly 29 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING This chapter describes applications of programming 2 1 Memories and Files 2 1 1 Memories The following memories are available e Program memory e Standard RAM e Standard ROM SD memory card 1 Program memory This memory stores programs and parameters required in processing of the CPU module a Processing a program When a program is executed data in the program memory are transferred to the program cache memory at the following timings e Initial processing at power on Initial processing at reset 1 The program cache memory is used for program operations b Writing to the program memory When a program is written to the program memory it is temporarily written to the program cache memory and then automatically transferred back to the program memory Inside CPU module 1 Data are written to the program cache memory first lt Drive 0 gt Program cache memory memory flash ROM SRAM Program 2 After writing to the program cache memory the data are automatically transferred to Programming tool lt Drive 3 gt lt Drive 4 gt the program memory Standard RAM Standard ROM SRAM flash ROM Point While the CPU module is in
45. 0 65 58 0 14 2 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 8 0 0 10 0 68 35 5 17 3 Use the following expression to calculate the increase in scan time when local devices are used in a subroutine program only when the subroutine program is called from another file Increase in the scan time N1 x KM1 N2 N3 16 x KM2 N4 x KM3 KM4 us N1 Number of device types that specified a local device N2 Number of word device points N3 Number of bit device points N4 Number of index register points that were specified as a local device n Number of programs where local devices are set to be used CPU module KM1 KM2 KM3 KM4 LO2CPU LO2CPU P 16 0 0 44 1 30 80 0 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 16 0 0 20 1 36 100 0 3 Execution of multiple programs Use the following formula to calculate the increase in scan time when executing multiple programs Increase in the scan time Number of program files to be executed x KM1 ms APPENDICES CPU module KM1 LO2CPU LO2CPU P 0 024 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 0 02 4 Removal and insertion of an SD memory card The following shows the increase in scan time when an SD memory card is inserted or removed Increase in scan time CPU module When an SD memory card is When an SD memory card is inserted ty removed LO2CPU LO2CPU P 0 52 ms 0 49 ms L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 0 31 ms 0 23 ms 5 Scan time measurement Use the foll
46. 128 System data 41 64 897 4066 Total maximum The backup data size can be checked by the following e Create Backup Data for PLC Module Change dialog box gt Page 176 Section 3 30 1 2 b SD698 and SD699 1 Available after starting backup CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 30 1 Backup to SD memory card This function can save data in the CPU module to an SD memory card If an SD memory card is used in a running system data can be backed up by replacing the SD memory card with the one for storing a backup data 1 Procedure Before backup start Backup start setup request The backup start setup from a programming tool contact is turned on awa Backup start prepared Backup is ready to start Backup start preparation completed Backup start request The backup start contact from a programming tool is turned on Back up data again ae w w Oo 0 Backup in execution 2 g zz 58 Backup to the SD memory card is completed Backup failed 3 92 Y y 3 y o a Backup completed Backup error HH 30 S gt e S y 82 End es sq After preparation for backup is completed the following functions are disabled They are not resumed after backup F Refresh of a network module Auto refresh of intelligent function module D P z gs 3 Simple PLC communication function 2 Do not perform the following during backup E Inserti
47. 3 10 PLC Operation Mode at H W Error Setting This function determines an operation mode of the CPU module when a hardware error CPU module detects SP UNIT DOWN occurred in an intelligent function module 1 Setting procedure 1 Select Intelligent under Type in the I O Assignment tab and click the Detailed setting button Project Window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt I O Assignment 2 Select either of the following items for PLC Operation Mode at H W error Stop or Continue Intelligent Function Module Detailed Setting PLC Operation Mode at Hiw VO Rasponse Cancel 6umes JOU MH Je spoW uoeledo O1d OLE 99 3 11 File Password 32 A read password and write password can be set to each file that is stored in the CPU module By using this function files can be protected against tampering and theft by unauthorized persons CPU module Acan 3 be the pa Fead sin pl J Cassword Matches e FIGA Programming tool Write password AbcDEF12 Read password XYZ98756 ve Awrite password and read password can be set individually x ten since be write File A on does not match Programming tool the pass Read password XYZ98756 is authenticated Write password 1234abCD is authenticated 3 11 1 Setting file passwords 1 Characters applicable to passwords A read password a
48. 5 j SD63 0 1 SD64 0 5 Outputs number of SD65 0 the annunciator that turned on i i SD79 0 Annunciator ON detection 1 Turning on the annunciator Use either of the following instructions a SET FO instruction Annunciator turns on only on the leading edge of an input condition Even if the input condition turns off the annunciator is held on Using many annunciator numbers can shorten scan time more than using the OUT FO instruction b OUT FO instruction Since the processing is performed for every scan the scan time is longer than the case of using the SET FO instruction Point If the annunciator is turned on with any instruction other than SET FO and OUT FO for example the MOV instruction the same operation as the internal relay M is performed The ON information is not stored in SM62 and annunciator numbers are not stored in SD62 and SD64 to SD79 237 4 soyelounuuy 9 Z9 SeolAed SN eulaju Z S 2 Processing after annunciator on Whenever an annunciator is turned on SM62 turns on and the following data are stored in SD62 to SD79 The annuciator number in SD62 is registered to the memory for error history storage 1 Turned on annunciator numbers are stored in SD64 to SD79 in order SET F50 SET F25 SET F1023 aC de aa SD62 0 gt 50 50 50 3 SD63 value is SD63 0 gt 1 gt 2 gt 3 AL incremented by 1 SD64 0 50 50 50
49. 5 2 7 Link special relay SBiivinaci ak op ec eek a dae dae 240 528 Edg telayi V bi sa abra adds cad Dd md hai Reese 240 52 9 Steprelay S 4 4 Ses tangs oe ielU a Gash etd ohh denen de ake Gadi ei dae 241 SOT Tamers ST atone ee A tet de Beeld te 242 5211 E PRA O A E hd lala ates ak 250 52 12 Dataregister D e r i akon itn Ghee AAA heed eee ee 253 5213 Linksregister W s caca Aaa ba Peet ar dle 254 5 2 14 Link special register SW 00 0 0 ccc cette eee eee eee 255 5 3 Internal System Devices et 256 5 3 1 F netionid vices FX FY RD cc dh hand a 256 5 32 Specialirelay SM oct ra da te a 258 5 33 Special register SD ts sinh a de eee iia da 258 5 4 Link Direct Devices 4 259 5 5 Module Access Devices se ete tnt t teen eee 262 5 5 1 Intelligent function module device 0000 c cette tee eee 262 5 6 Index Register Standard Device Register Z i 264 5 6 1 dex Register Z Gro sed od A A Ra ee A 264 5 6 2 Standard device register Z 0 cence ence tenn aes 265 5 6 3 Saving and restoration of the index register i 266 or Elle Register RA ZR tek Du tek cate tte te O ba e ed hl a a dat de on 268 5 8 Extended Data Register D and Extended Link Register W o o oo oooo 272 5 91 Nestingi N se 2 a dal a re a ae pend 277 UN o a A A A A het le 278 5404 Local pointeri4 54 44s ocd anne td a el Med ie asda dod dea de 279 10 2 COMMON pointeticciscg ii a ahd aida ariba 2
50. 9FBO Bn E E hk mw MH F amp F BE B WF MN DB FH HB FA 9FCO E E i it FF 2 mi a RK B FH Y iB BF A 9FDO a E E E BA mM FR RFR m 5 HF HH Dh DP TH M 9FEO HZ A 4 Bw TF B WH B R A B F B 5 9FFO E Fw BR E B F zm E B mh FW HR H E040 zk i EA E Ff FF kk HR B Ss E A E E050 E O R A E R F amp F FTF E B F RIM E E060 E E 8 E BE R E A R mw B HK E EH A M E070 HO E RX y mm E E A E080 E E E E E E FH E 6 E E R E090 E E kk fF E E A fF GS 2 KK KB HF FB EOAO E E E je 8 E RMR 4 FA wh E te B EOBO E Z E OR Oe es ek 71 FH 4 HF K EOCO E R KR hh F 8k FH RK E HF KE m E R F EODO E E a MENS EA mM HK FR FA EOEO HE il KE E Bk BF HF kK RES EH kK EOFO E E E E E E E E E E K E140 Jl t HE E mM EH E E 4 H E JE E 35 E150 LE E E A gt B amp B DN HF K amp E Hh sa mo E160 Rk E E E 32 F K LH HF K m E170 E Kk kk E E K A RR E E E k FH MN E180 E E KF E m Kk bt A kk E E A E KK E B E190 R E ff BB kK 8 amp 8 KF ER OR E KE E1A0 x XX E RF hk FF E ff SF tl fH pRB E1BO ah ZL 23 2 X KF E amp a BB K E1CO E E ikt Kk F amp F E E E EE hm E F Ss A E1DO E E ff E iy ih fe EE E B 2 amp 2 amp E1EO FEBGGCOOGO kt Bh KE E H E WH ES E1FO fa E E iS E EE KE amp E HR B E240 E E E M E tk E E E m tk re W E250 M E K E E E E ER 5 HF RHR tH R E260 mk Kk E qm SF B amp B 8 G amp G ER BE dE E270 A kh
51. Axis2 Positioning Parameter BOOCH Axis2 OPR Parameter B00Dy Axis2 Positioning Data BO0Ey CH1 Common setting BOOFH B010H CH1 Operation Mode B011H CH1 Frequency Measurement Mode B0124 CH1 Rotation Speed Measurement Mode B0134 CH1 Pulse Measurement Mode B0144 CH2 Common Setting B0154 B0164 CH2 Normal Mode Setting B0174 CH2 Frequency Measurement Mode B0184 CH2 Rotation Speed Measurement Mode B0194 CH2 Pulse Measurement Mode Built in MO Function Setting MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In 1 0 Function To the next page 293 SIOqUINN J9JaweJeg JO Ist xIpuaddy gt Sumes JelewueJed xipueddy Parameter No Parameter item Setting location Reference C000 y Number of Modules 1 0 Assignment Page 41 Section 2 2 2 CNM1H 1 Network Refresh Setting CC Link setting CNM2H 1 Common Parameters FE00H Parameter for Programming Tool TE Start MO number 10 Refresh Parameter Intelligent function module parameter Page 76 Section 2 11 Password Active Module Setting Remote password Page 107 Section 3 12 1 294 N indicates the position of the module counted from the first one and M indicates the network type of the module APPENDICES Appendix 1 2 PLC Parameter This section provides parameter setting screens and details of the setting items Point Note
52. CPU module 26 Writing reading device data to from standard ROM A ce De ade atthe ES dN 167 345 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date January 2010 SH NA 080889ENG A First edition April 2010 SH NA 080889ENG B June 2010 SH NA 080889ENG C January 2011 SH NA 080889ENG D April 2011 SH NA 080889ENG E July 2011 SH NA 080889ENG F September 2011 SH NA 080889ENG G October 2011 SH NA 080889ENG H Partial correction Section 2 3 1 3 11 1 3 21 2 3 30 1 3 30 2 Partial correction Section 2 10 3 1 3 6 3 17 3 30 3 30 2 5 2 11 Partial correction TERMS Section 2 1 2 2 1 3 2 9 3 1 3 5 3 6 4 7 1 Additions Appendix 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 2 5 1 2 6 1 2 7 1 2 8 1 2 9 1 2 10 1 2 11 1 2 12 Appendix 2 Partial correction RELEVANT MANUALS Section 2 1 3 2 3 1 2 3 4 2 4 2 6 1 2 6 2 2 7 3 6 3 13 1 3 18 3 20 3 26 5 1 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 5 5 2 7 5 2 13 5 2 14 5 8 Appendix 1 1 1 3 2 3 1 Additions Section 5 4 Partial correction INTRODUCTION RELEVANT MANUALS Section 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 2 6 1 2 11 3 1 3 21 3 3 23 3 27 3 30 3 30 1 3 30 2 5 1 5 7 5 8 Appendix 1 2 2 Appendix 1 2 9 Appendix 1 2 11 Appendix1 4 Appendix 2 Appendix 3 1 Appendix 3 2 Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS RELEVANT MANUALS TERMS Section 2
53. Data Type Data Name Paul Program Parameter Read Prote Write Protection E Sa Register a Register Select data of which password is to be created or changed and click the Setting button Select any of the following values for Registration Condition Read Protection e Write Protection e Read Protection Write Protection Enter password s and click the oK button The registration status appears as Registered Click the OK button The passwords are registered 101 spiomssed ell Bunas LLE CE PIOMSSEJ Blld LLE 102 b Deleting Open the Delete Password dialog box O Online gt Password Keyword gt Delete Delete Password Input Disable Password Delete Password Program Memory Device Memory Data Type DataWame Read Prote Write Protection Program MAIN a Delte SA Delete Registered Ga Registered 1 Select passwords to delete and click the _setting _ button Enter passwords and click the o button The registration status appears as Delete Click the aa button The passwords are deleted CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS c Disabling Open the Disable Password dialog box O Online gt Password Keyword gt Delete 1 Select data of which password is to disabled Disable Password and click the Setting button Disable passwords for data in the programmable controller
54. Dn specified in the program and the higher 16 bits correspond to the specified data register number 1 Ex When D12 is specified in the DMOV instruction D12 represents the lower 16 bits and D13 represents the higher 16 bits MO CooMov Ks00000 D12 Processing target D12 D13 D13 D12 a 13 s1691 eed ZL Z 9 SeolAed SN eulaju Z S Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Jo gt Data of 2147483648 to 2147483647 or 00000000 y to FFFFFFFFy can be stored in a two point area of the data register The most significant bit in a 32 bit structure is a sign bit 2 Retention of stored data The data stored in the data register are held until other different data are stored Note that the stored data are initialized when the CPU module is powered off or reset 253 5 2 13 Link register W The link register data register whose device number is represented in hexadecimal In the link register numeric data 32768 to 32767 or 0000H to FFFFH are stored 1 Bit structure of the file register a Bit structure and write read unit One point of the link register consists of 16 bits and data can be written or read in units of 16 bits b15 to bO The most significant bit is a sign bit Point Link register data are handled as signed data In the case of the hexadecimal notation 0000H to FFFF y can be stored However because the most significant bit represents a sign bit decimal values that can be speci
55. E EEEE FF 5 B HR 8 E E E280 E Z E E E BM wt HF Dd Tom BW KR E290 E E a A Mais F GF XX FE E E2A0 F FF LE E E E R E E KE KH RK F A EB E2B0 fj E EU E KE ME E E E hk Rk X F E2C0 E YE 2 KE ES Z amp amp B amp B ES E2DO SS E 2 SS E E kK E E FR BB KR KR E E2E0 Ho Hi AA E m II SB R R M m M E2FO ZO O E B A E R a m E B A HF E340 it m th fH A lo ff tf Eolo Ht th fh E350 ZE E E E 6 XK 8 amp F amp eE E360 E E E F it E E tt E tt A VE ae E370 E E MEE E RBRB _ EE AO E E380 E E E MM E E E E E E E Ss E390 E E 1 E E E E E E E E E E 8 BR E3A0 E E E FF E AA 5 E FS MH H A E3BO R 5 i E E KF HF 2 A HZ BF sE GAO R E3C0 2 WA 3 FH 5 3 mM 3 BP RR HX E3D0 E E 8 Hh HH WH eR G E XK ETE E B F E3E0 E E E BE E E E E WA B kK FF FS E3FO E E 8 E E k E kh FE ff FB A R 334 To the next page APPENDICES 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 A B C D E F E440 E E E E E HE Re ABR E AS AR fn fe E amp E450 BE if E E E b kh FH B fe ki ES B E460 E ia E E E ie 8 mt 2 W A A S E E470 E SE E WW hh mM A E B E E E E480 fa ie E ft FP YX h amp 3 FF HF B F F E490 E 5 5E y E A XX Ff xB KF F E4AO E amp RX 50 md RR E KR E 2 HH FEF E XK FE E4B0 K E HH Ht XX E FSF BR HN B BF E E E4CO E KR E KE a EF KR E RH FH RB FB E4DO xk E a 32 ES GO B E E
56. Execute the process as the Set the percentage of service processing for e Range 1 to 99 Default when selected 10 scan time proceeds one scan Unit 1 Specify service process Range 0 2ms to 1000ms p ify X F Set the time of service processing for one scan 9 Default when selected 0 2ms time 2 3 e Unit 0 1ms Specify service process Set th ber of i ing f Ri 1to 10 ti pecify pr et the number of service processing for one ange o imes Default when soleci ds4 time execution counts 4 5 scan e Unit 1 time R dee Even when the waiting time is 0 2ms Execute it while waiting for Set whether to perform service processing R 2 dened es han or less the service processing time of constant scan setting during waiting time for constant scan setting 0 2ms is added to the scan time 4 There is a margin of error between 20us to 30us against actual processing time 2 The response performance of service processing significantly reduces in the following cases Set service processing time considering the time out time of the peripheral e Service processing time is set much shorter than the scan time Setting Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting results in increase in the scan time and decrease in the service processing time 3 For the following functions scan time will be increased longer than the specified time during service processing even if the service processing time specification is set Online
57. FTP server and the simple PLC communication function through built in Ethernet ports MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In Ethernet Function Built in CC Link function Allows data communications over CC Link MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual 4 Whether to be able to use this function or not depends on the version of the CPU module lt _ gt Page 314 Appendix 2 Point For details on the special relay SM and special register SD used for each function refer to the following LL MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 81 ys uoqounjJ p e 3 2 Constant Scan Scan time of the CPU module is not constant because the processing time varies depending on the execution status of instructions used in a program By using this function scan time can be maintained constant 1 Application I O refresh is performed before program execution By using this function the constant I O refresh intervals can be maintained even the time required for program execution changes Scan time without constant scan setting Program execution END processing END 0 END 0 END 0 END Ey EF o 5ms 6ms a 5ms Scan time with constant scan setting 7ms Program execution END processing END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 EF p EF H Wait
58. MAIN QPG 525 steps 2100 bytes e Parameter file to be written PARAM QPA 2936 bytes e Reserved area for online change 500 steps 2000 bytes The memory capacity is calculated in units of file sizes of the CPU module to be written For a program memory the file size unit is 1 step 4 bytes e Calculation of program file size The program file size can be found by the program size reserved area for online change Since a program is stored in units of file sizes 1 step only the amount equal to the program size is occupied 525 500 1025 steps 4100 bytes e Calculation of parameter file size Since the parameter file capacity is 2936 bytes it occupies 734 steps 2936 bytes in the program memory Result Program size parameter file capacity 1025 734 1759 steps 7036 bytes Point Memory capacity can also be calculated from a programming tool Tool lt gt Confirm Memory Size For calculation of memory capacity using a programming tool refer to the following 11 Manual for the programming tool used 38 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 2 2 I O Number This section describes the I O number assignment required for data communication between the CPU module or its built in functions and I O modules or intelligent function modules 2 2 1 Concept of I O number assignment 1 Purpose of I O number assignment 1 0 numbers can be assigned with any given number for the following purpose
59. O Year data that can be set with GX Works2 is up to 2037 3 Clock data read To read clock data use either of the following Program SM and SD a Program Use either of the following instructions MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction Clock data read DATERD Expansion clock data read S P DATERD b SM and SD The data are read out into SD210 to SD213 in a BCD value when SM213 clock data read request is turned on 4 Precautions a Initial clock data setting Set the correct clock data because it has not been set when shipping b Correcting clock data Whenever any part of the clock data are changed the entire clock data must be written to the CPU module again c Clock data range When changing clock data write data within the range given 3 in this section If data outside the clock range is written to the CPU module the clock function does not operate correctly However errors do not occur if the value is within the following range Write operation to the CPU Example h CPU module operation module February 30 Performed No error is detected Upon DATEWR instruction OPERATION ERROR error code 4100 Day 32 of th 13 Not perf d AGO ai Upon turn on of SM210 SM211 Clock data error turns on 184 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 32 Battery Life Prolonging Function This function extends battery life of the CPU module by limiting data to retain by a ba
60. ORF Sink 2B fh SA E SE En e Ene nok PR ASG EE SO ae EE Fe He ES st UY eA US SB Ut Bt SHR SSeS Taek SEE BS H HE NE HHS SE Sat Sak a SS Sat SS SA SE SAF SE PA D Sn CH Sa oS TT AR ES O Hh Sat SE SES Sit Ht SES FA a SE LE AC ES a E vai tak SSE do A SE SI S il Si SEE ER aaa Bat Ss Sha SE D Safe Ot CO CS Se SS G Ml S SSE SP am Nt ae BEE E RAR S Rae SIPS SE REN Fra Sa Sis R OO BN is 338 APPENDICES Appendix 6 Differences Between LCPU and QnUCPU This section describes the specification comparison between the LCPU and QnCPU and the precautions for using the existing system Appendix 6 1 Specification Comparison The following table shows a comparison of the specifications between LCPU and QnCPU Difference Item Description LCPU QnUCPU e Power supply module Power supply module Basic configuration Fee modue Nos I O modules and intelligent function modules I O modules and intelligent function modules e End cover e Base unit Module installation Modules are connected in order Modules are mounted on the base unit Module whose serial number first five digit is 13071 or earlier Up to 10 modules except for an RS 232 adapter and END cover Module whose serial number first five digit is Up to 64 modules QO0UJCPU 16 modules Q00U Number of modules 13072 or later Up to 40 modules LO2CPU QO1UCPU 24 modules Q02UCPU 32 modules LO2CPU P 30 m
61. Project Automatic Save Change History Program Editor J Execute online change based on relative step No Device Comment Editor Ladder Only Parameter Monitor PLC Read Write Online Change Intelligent Function Module Transfer cache memory to program memory Explanation Select whether to execute fall instruction LDF LDFI ANDF ANDFI ORF ORFI MEF PLF FCALLP EFCALLP at online change Back to System Default a 5 Set as User Default Cancel The corresponding fall instructions are LDF ANDF ORF MEF PLF FCALLP and EFCALLP The following describes the operation with and without Execute fall instruction selected Operation when selecting Trailing edge instructions are not executed Operation when deselecting Trailing edge instructions are not executed Completion of X0 xo online change H PLF MO 1 Completion of F PLF Mo 4 online change ENDO AENDO A END 0 END 0 AENDO A END 0 1 scan 1 scan XO status of gt The fall instruction is executed X0 status Ee The fall instruction is not executed ON x even if the execution condition ON a es 7 even if the execution condition X0 1 k is off off X0 ligatt is off off OFF orrr A OFF OFF ON FA OFF OFF on E N OFF lt ooo ON dl Po X0 x0 ON a ON OFF OFF OFF Z777 The fall instruction is not executed ON ON OFF ON 1 A ber when online change is completed MO f MO ao and th
62. SM804 After trace trigger OS SM805 Trace completed 4 SM801 also turns off when the sampling trace is interrupted by a programming tool 133 4 Setting method 1 Open the Sampling Trace dialog box O Debug gt Sampling Trace gt Open Sampling Trace 2 Onthe Sampling Trace window open a dialog box to configure a setting XZ Debug lt gt Sampling Trace lt gt Trace Setting Trace Setting X E Trace Setting Setting of Executing and Saving Condition Setting Setting of Executing and Saving Condition Setting Trace Execution Method Trace Count Setting Additional Information Execute after current trace setting overwrite to PLC Total Count 8192 Count I Time Execute by setting trace that writing in PLC Count Before Trigger 4096 v Count T program Name Count After Trigger Count Trace Data setting result Storage Data Acquisition Timing Setting Trigger Condition Setting Target Memory EATE Each Scan At the Time of Trace Instruction Execution FileName MAIN Specified Interval At the Time of Manual Trigger Execution ms 1 to 5000 Trace Auto Startup Setting T Start sampling trace automatically when the power is turned ON in tracing C Detail Setting C Detail Setting leo Cancel Cancel Item Description Reference Trace Execution Method Set the execution method of the trace a Setti f e mgo Trace Da
63. Scan Time ms Scan 200 END Processing Time ms Initial Low Speed Program ms low Speed 0 000 Execution Status of Programs foni Stop Monitor Item Description w Monitoring Time ms The monitoring time of each program is displayed If the scan time exceeds this time the CPU a 9 module detects WDT ERROR Y Entire Scan Time 2 The total time of each item in Detail of Scan Time for Scan Execution is displayed When Total Scan Time ms eee secrete s g constant scan time is set the constant scan time is displayed 3 Program ms The total execution time of the scan execution type program is displayed Detail of Scan Time for END Processing Time ms The END processing time is displayed S Scan Execution Low Speed Program ms Since low speed execution type programs cannot be used 0 000 is displayed 3 Constant wait ms The constant scan waiting time is displayed when the constant scan time is set Broan The execution status of a program selected at the program tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box is 3 displayed Execution The program type set in the PLC Parameter dialog box is displayed Execution Status of The actual scan time current value is displayed When a program is in stop standby status the Scan Time ms Programs scan time is displayed as 0 000 ms The number of execution times of programs before monitoring is displayed setting the Execution Coun
64. TO PERSONS OR LOSS ORDAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT AREOPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OREXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNINGCONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND ORSAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special
65. Use the Following file Sym Points Start End Start End Start End in file register setting of PLC file setting AO A A Extended Data D 10 128K D12288 D143359 registerfexpanded link register of a part Extendedtink w 16 ox off file register area Indexing Setting for ZR Device 32Bit Indexing Use Z z After 0 18 Use ZZ Print Window Print Window Preview Acknowledge XY Assignment Default Check Cancel Parameter ane A Item No Description Setting range Default Reference X 8K Y 8K M 8K L 8K2 B 8K X Y S 3 are fixed to 8K points F 2K Setting is available within the range SB 2K of 29K words in total including the V 2K above fixed points S 8K One device Up to 32K points 4 7 2K ST OK C 1K D 12K W 8K SW 2K Set the number of device points that is appropriate to the system Page 85 ints 2000 Device Points H Section 3 4 To the next page 304 APPENDICES Parameter ee 2 Item No Description Setting range Default Reference Set a latch range start and Setting is available for only 19 2001 end device numbers to be one range for each of B F Latch 1 Start Latch 1 End H cleared by remote latch clear V T ST C D and W operation devices Set a latch range start and Setting is available for only Page 85 9 2002 end device numbers not to one range for each o
66. Y30 H x1 i Y Hen k4x10 po H X41 A ag H5 KO po K H TO Basic instruction Application instruction Point Data indicating the execution status of an operation in a sequence program step is referred to as signal flow 2 ST A text language such as C language and is preferred by computing engineers 3 SFC A graphical programming language where the execution order and conditions are clearly defined for the program spen6ue BulwweJ6oJd OL Z 4 Structured ladder Agraphical programming language that uses contacts and coils For the projects that support these programming languages refer to the following 11 Manual for the programming tool used 15 2 11 Communications with Intelligent Function Modules The intelligent function module allows the CPU module to process analog quantity and high speed pulses that cannot be processed by the I O modules The following is some of the intelligent modules e Serial communication module Analog module e Positioning module e High speed counter module Temperature control module The intelligent function module is equipped with a memory buffer memory to store the data taken in from or output to external devices The CPU module writes or reads data to or from the buffer memory of the intelligent function module 1 Setting method of intelligent function module parameters Open the New Module dialog box Project window g
67. and the data are saved after execution of the IRET instruction Because of this the scan time is increased if one interrupt fixed scan execution type program is executed with SM777 set to on The on off status of SM777 is set for each CPU module It cannot be set for each file If the on off status of SM777 is changed during program execution control is implemented according to the information after the change 290 5 Clearing local device data Local device data are cleared by the either of the following When the CPU module is powered off and then on or is reset When the CPU module status is changed from STOP to RUN Local device data cannot be cleared from a programming tool CHAPTER 7 CONVENIENT USAGE OF DEVICES 291 239 907 ZZ APPENDICES Appendix 1 Parameter Setting Appendix 1 1 List of Parameter Numbers Each parameter number is the value that is stored in the special register SD16 to SD26 when an error occurs in the parameter settings The following list indicates the parameter items and corresponding parameter numbers Parameter No Parameter item Set in Reference 0000 Label _ PLC Name 0001 y Comment 1000H Timer Limit Setting Page 242 Section 5 2 10 10014 RUN PAUSE Contacts Page 109 Section 3 13 1002 Remote Reset Page 109 Section 3 13 1003 Output Mode a
68. card as a storage location 1 2 3 KO Online gt Register Cancel Display Module Menu Register Cancel Display Module Menu A MITSUBISHI MELSEC LEDSPU Registers menu items for Functions specific to the intelligent Function module into a memory card SD or standard ROM y Tf registered into both memory card 5D and standard ROM OK the data in the memory card SD will be reflected y Target Memory EE Ele y Register Cancel Menu f Register C Cancel Target Module Register menu items only For the modules connected to the PLC Memory capacity necessary for menu registration can be reduced Register menu items For all modules that can be connected to the PLC p Menu Language IV Japanese V English Selecting 4 smaller number of items can reduce memory capacity necessary for menu registration Execute Close 1 GX Developer cannot write menu definition files 2 When a menu definition file has been stored in an SD memory card the file in the SD memory card will be written even if a menu definition file is created and stored in the standard ROM 3 For the versions of GX Works2 that supports intelligent function modules refer to the following GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common 223 ebueyo Bumes jepu S sBummes slnpolN Sy 4 6 User Message Executing User message instruction UMSG displays a user message on the display unit User messages are user
69. changing the CPU module Page 169 Section 3 30 Clock function Battery life prolonging function Controls the clock data of the CPU module Prolongs a battery life by limiting the data to be latched to clock data only Page 183 Section 3 31 Page 109 Section 3 13 Memory check function Program cache memory auto recovery Checks whether data in the memories of the CPU module are not changed due to excessive electric noise Restores the error location automatically by using data in the program memory which are stored in the flash ROM when the memory check function detects an Page 186 Section 3 33 Page 187 Section 3 34 function A error in the program cache memory Collects data from the specified device of a CPU module at a specified timing MELSEC L CPU Module Data logging function The data logging file can be transferred from a CPU module to the FTP server using User s Manual Data the data logging file transfer function Logging Function Built in 1 O function c Performs the following dedicated functions general purpose input function general purpose output function interrupt input function pulse catch function positioning function and high speed counter function MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In MO Function Built in Ethernet function Allows data communications using the MC protocol and performs the socket communication function the file transfer function
70. device uses the local device area for the program executed before the interrupt fixed scan execution type program regardless of the on off status of SM777 SM777 Operation Perform operations with the local device that corresponds to the program executed before the interrupt fixed scan OFF execution type program Perform operations with the local device that corresponds to the program file where the interrupt fixed scan ON execution type program is stored a When SM777 is off File name DEF File name ABC Standby type program xo A Al Interrupt Lee BI 5 Si ais ito ded occurred 0 F Y ice bo Execution of interrupt Interrupt program i program eas i IRET END Local device writing reading Local device area for file name DEF Local device area for file name ABC b When SM777 is on File name DEF File name ABC Standby type program xo K al Interrupt LDEGP 3 5 es oe T occurred F i ee FINGE bo Execution of interrupt 2A interrupt program A program P Prog IRET END Local device area pra ads g gt Local device area for file name ABC for file name DEF c Precautions When SM777 is on local device data are read out before execution of an interrupt fixed scan execution type program
71. extended link register W Point To reduce the scan time increase due to latch minimize the number of latch points latch 1 setting latch 2 setting and latch relay as much as possible by performing the following Move data to be latched to the file register Store device data that is less frequently updated in the standard ROM with the SP DEVST instruction The device data stored in the standard ROM can be read with the S P DEVLD instruction gt Page 167 Section 3 28 1 For file registers including an extended data register D and an extended link register W the scan time is not increased due to latch 6 Service processing time The following shows the service processing time required for each communication function when the number of processing is set to one APPENDICES Processing time Online change in the Online change in the CPU Program read when ladder mode when ladder mode when Online change file Device data Monitor module a 10K step program adding 100 steps to adding 100 steps to when a 10K step Data register 32 file is read the start of an 8K step the start of a 20K step program file is read points program program LO2CPU LO2CPU P 0 95 ms 1 20 ms 4 40 ms 0 50 ms L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 0 95 ms 1 00 ms 3 70 ms 0 40 ms 7 Common processing time The CPU module performs common processing by the system The comm
72. function module to the specified device The TO instruction writes data stored in the specified device to the buffer memory of the intelligent function module For details on the FROM and TO instructions refer to the following MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction 3 Communications using the intelligent function module device The intelligent function module device represents the buffer memory of the intelligent function module as one of the CPU module devices 2 gt Page 262 Section 5 5 1 The difference from the FROM and TO instructions is that with this device both reading and writing data from and to the intelligent function module cab be processed with one instruction UA Go DO D2 selnpolN uoNoUNY lue6lllelul YIM SUOeEDIUNWWOD LL z 77 78 4 Communications using the intelligent function module dedicated instruction This instruction enables easy programming for the use of functions of the intelligent function module Ex Serial communication module dedicated instruction OUTPUT instruction The OUTPUT instruction allows communications with external device by nonprocedural protocol regardless of the buffer memory address of the serial communication module CPU module Serial communication module Set channels to be used in control data b15 to b0 Send 62 0 Channel 1 i 1 y 2 Channel 2
73. hea de ade het 84 3 4 batoh FUNCION wi esi tbat ad buch ne vet hed de ea ee ba dla es 85 3 5 Initial Device Value i 87 3 6 Service Processing Setting a os em r a a a i r h a 90 3 7 Output Mode at Operating Status Change STOP to RUN i 96 3 8 Input Response Time Setting o 97 3 9 Error Time Output Mode Setting i 98 3 10 PLC Operation Mode at H W Error Setting i 99 Side File Password IZ aba 100 311 1 Setting file passwords ici a A A ced tl hae a 100 3 11 2 Password authentication et 105 3 12 Remote Password ss Se E ttt ete eet teens 107 3 13 Remote Operation a 265 8 Ro hee dd diia 109 3 13 1 Remote RUN STO Pe eis es d Mec eatd eerie ed sean sean ee ates bas 109 3 13 2 Remote PAUSE srota e i a de 111 3 13 3 Remote RESET ice Sot seek es Aten al ei elle ci SI Ma el os 113 3 13 4 Remote Latch Clears cocina ave eee BR Seed eh ede pa Whe ed d NRE 114 3 14 Scan Time Measurement es 115 3 15 Program List Monitor wt eves baa Dood dhe a Aa a 117 3 16 Interrupt Program List Monitor 7 118 3 17 Local Device Monitor Test eens 119 3 18 External Input Output Forced On Off i 121 3 19 Executional Conditioned Device Test 000 eee tenet eee 124 3 20 Saimpling Traces se me A OS ee eee ee ee ie EG 132 3 21 Writing Programs in RUN Status i 139 3 21 1 Online change ladder mode 0 000 ccc ce eee teen eee ee 139 3 21 2 Online change files iedos uia ed tenn ees 140 3 21 3 Precautions for online Change 0 141 3 22 Deb
74. is expressed as a percentage value T2 O When T1 2 T2 n T1 T2 x 100 T1 6 When T1 lt T2 n T1 T2 100 T1 T2 T 7 Count input signal OFF Point The maximum counting speed can be increased by placing multiple counters within one scan At this time use the direct access input DX for the counter input signal gt Page 49 Section 2 6 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT END C Cc COEND C C Program l pte gt rt Ed gt Execution interval of the OUT CD instruction CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 5 2 12 Data register D The data register D is a memory in which numeric data 32768 to 32767 or 0000 to FFFFH can be stored 1 Bit structure of the file register a Bit structure and read write unit One point of the data register consists of 16 bits and data can be read or written in units of 16 bits b15 to bO Dl AE The most significant bit is a sign bit Point Data register area handled as signed data In the case of the hexadecimal notation 00004 to FFFFH can be stored However because the most significant bit represents a sign bit decimal values that can be specified are 32768 to 32767 b Using in a 32 bit instruction For a 32 bit instruction two consecutive points of the data register Dn and Di 1 are the target of the processing The lower 16 bits correspond to the data register number
75. it FF HU H XxX Ho 9D50 RE k F mH hk HK FF HH H HH BF l H 9D60 HH Ht A B h tt 5 MW E EZ fh 9D70 k E EE A tk hh ES ES 9D80 R B a E im k E R E 28 8 ERR 9D90 fm E m E 3 86 B E B 2 B FB R B 9DA0 E R E 8 A 8 F 5 5 A B f 9DB0 fe S E SS B 8 g E x KE hk k th 9DCO HZ Xx HE E BH mM mM Ex MH LE S us 9DEO E E tt mm 3 2 E E KR 6h Y E E RE A 9DFO W E E E ft B E Y E E Kk E 9E40 E HE E E E A amp WE FR B 9E50 3 wt RR F HK Hb HD K 4 A B 9E60 FE E th tw F wh Ww KH E W E ff 9E70 F E E ft EG FF B B E 9E80 MN HE E BE B W6 R E mM E A 9E90 E E E E E Y KR FD 5 ff Ff E 9EAO E E E NE SER HH E kE FH Mi El 9EBO hi E BEBER RM mm E 9ECO HE E EM RR te te HE E 32 B HE hb 9EDO E E B E ERA ZE E KE B E E E W SE 9EEO ME E E mM E E EE k B E As ta 9EFO E E E E E B ERES a W To the next page 333 yun Aejdsig ay ul eldqelleAV sepoD JeloeJedD G xipueddV 0 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 B C D E F 9F40 E E E tt BB B B i m 4H HE E E B B 9F50 E tt E ft E E mk me E th K RK M HR R 9F60 TM MH M EX E 7 ZE HZ hh FH 2B HF Ja B B 9F70 E RC x Rm kk HF Mm E SF gz E 9F80 E E EX RR sf A R H E JA it W 9F90 ABE A E BR sh FH R BH JE it JE 9FAO z E FP 8B RR amp th CB H KF HD DD FH HW EF
76. link information is stored as numeric data error locations and causes can be checked by monitoring the link special register Manuals for each network module SeolAed Jesn euJajul Z S MS Jelsl6ei eloeds Yu yzZ9 255 5 3 Internal System Devices Internal system devices are provided for system operations The allocations and sizes of internal system devices are fixed and cannot be changed by the user 5 3 1 Function devices FX FY FD Function devices are used in subroutine programs with argument passing Data are read or written between such subroutine programs and calling programs using function devices Ex When FXO FY1 and FD2 are used in a subroutine program and if XO MO and DO are specified with a subroutine program call instruction the following data passing are proceeded On Off data of XO gt FXO On Off data of FY1 MO Data of DO gt FD2 Subroutine program Calling program xa HT CALL PO Because a device in each calling program can be determined by using a function device for subroutine programs the same subroutine program can be used without considering other calling programs 1 Types of function devices The following three types of function devices are available e Function input FX e Function output FY e Function register FD a Function input FX The function input is used to pass on off data to a subroutine program Bit data specified by a
77. lt SH 080895ENG 13JZ41 gt Settings specifications handling data communication methods and troubleshooting of the built in CC Link function of the CPU module or the CC Link system master local module MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual lt SH 080972ENG 13JZ54 gt Overview of CC Link IE Field Network and specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the MELSEC L series CC Link IE Field Network master local module MELSEC L Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual lt SH 080899ENG 13JZ42 gt System configuration specifications se analog digital converter module ings and troubleshooting of the MELSEC L Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual lt SH 080900ENG 13JZ43 gt System configuration specifications se digital analog converter module ings and troubleshooting of the MELSEC L LD75P LD75D Positioning Module User s Manual lt SH 080911ENG 13JZ46 gt MELSEC L High Speed Counter Module User s Manual lt SH 080920ENG 13JZ49 gt System configuration specifications se positioning module ings and troubleshooting of the System configuration specifications se high speed counter module ings and troubleshooting of the MELSEC L Temperature Control Module User s Manual lt SH 081000ENG 13JZ64 gt System configuration specifi
78. module device is as follows The processing speed of writing or reading using the intelligent function module device is slightly higher compared with the case of using the FROM or TO instruction Ex MOV U5 G11 DO When reading from the buffer memory of an intelligent function module and another processing with one instruction totalize the processing speed of the FROM or TO instruction and the other instruction Ex U5 G11 DO D10 Point Instead of using the intelligent function module device in the program more than once to write or read buffer memory data use the FROM or TO instruction once in one place so that the processing speed increases Un Move KO G10 Un MOVP K10 G11 Un MOVvP K5 G12 Un MOVP K100 G13 MOVP KO DO 7 MovP K10 D1 7 Writes data to a device Move K5 Da Such as data register D MovP K100 D3 To H5 K10 DO K4 1 Writes data once in the program For the buffer memory address and application refer to the manual for the intelligent function module used For the FROM or TO instruction refer to the following MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction 263 3oIAep ajnpou uonouny zua Iau pyss SeolAed SseooV slnpolN G G 5 6 Index Register Standard Device Register Z 5 6 1 Index Register Z The index register is used for indirect specification index modification in programs Index modification uses o
79. of a name up to 8 one byte or 4 two byte characters and an extension File name Create with uppercase characters only Extension It is automatically appended according to the specified file type The following cannot be used as a file name since they are the reserved words of Microsoft Windows File name COM1 to COM9 PRN LPT1 to LPT9 NULL AUX CLOCK and CON When using characters recognition of uppercase and lowercase differs depending on the memory Program memory standard RAM standard ROM Not case sensitive ABC and abc are both considered to be ABC SD memory card Case sensitive Update date The date and time when the file was written to the CPU module is displayed Except for file registers at least 64 bytes are added to the capacity of the file created by a user To display the latest data click the Refresh button Size 4 Only ASCII characters can be used for a name of the file stored in the SD memory card Also characters other than ASCII may not be used for a name of the file stored in memories other than the SD memory card For ASCII characters that can be used refer to the following Operating manual for the programming tool used 34 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 1 Handling a Power off during online data operation including reset Files in memory are not discarded if the CPU module is powered off or reset during online operation However for SD memory
80. operations varies depending on the status of a CPU module Remote operation CPU module status Remote RUN Remote STOP Remote PAUSE Remote RESET Remote latch clear RUN status RUN status STOP status PAUSE status Not operable Not operable STOP status STOP status STOP status STOP status Reset Latch clear A Including the stop error status of the CPU module 3 13 1 Remote RUN STOP This operation externally changes the operating status of the CPU module to RUN or to STOP keeping the switch of the CPU module in the RUN position This operation is useful when the CPU module is inaccessible or e changing the status of a CPU module that is in a control panel to RUN or STOP by external signals 1 Program operation a Remote RUN The CPU module changes its operating status to RUN and executes a program from the step 0 The remote RUN operation must be performed to the CPU module whose operating status has been changed to STOP by the remote STOP operation b Remote STOP The CPU module executes a program until the END instruction and changes its operating status to STOP 2 Executing method The following three methods are available e Using a RUN contact Using a programming tool By an external device using the MC protocol e Using the link dedicated instruction of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module 109 dOLS NNd OUWe PELE uonyelado ajouay ELE a Using a RUN co
81. other controls to a running programmable controller such as program modification or operating status change read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety before the operation Especially in the case of a control from an external device to a remote programmable controller immediate action cannot be taken for a problem on the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure An absolute position restoration by the positioning function may turn off the servo on signal servo off for approximately 20ms and the motor may run unexpectedly If this causes a problem provide an electromagnetic brake to lock the motor during absolute position restoration Design Precautions CAUTION O Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise O During control of an inductive load such as a lamp heater or solenoid valve a large current approximately ten times greater than normal may flow when the output is turned from off to on Therefore use a module that has a sufficient current rating O After the CPU module is powered on or is reset the time taken to enter the RUN status varie
82. quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC L series programmable controllers This manual describes the memory maps functions and devices of the CPU module and programming Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC L series programmable controller to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to the actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Relevant CPU modules LO2CPU L26CPU BT LO2CPU P and L26CPU PBT This manual does not describe the details of the instructions error codes special relay SM and special register SD For the instructions refer to the following LO QCPU LCPU Programming Manual Common Instruction For the error codes special relay SM and special register SD refer to the following LL MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection RELEVANT MANUALS 1 CPU module user s manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt Description MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspecti
83. read or written in units of 16 bits b15 to bo Ra E A ee tthe most significant bit represents a sign bit 3 When using a 32 bit instruction The processing target is Rn and Rn 1 The lower 16 bits corresponds to the file register number Rp specified in the program and the higher 16 bits corresponds to the specified file register number 1 Ex When R2 is specified in the DMOV instruction R2 represents the lower 16 bits and R3 represents the higher 16 bits H DMOY Do R2 ias target R2 R3 R3 R2 Lower 16 bits Upper 16 bits phat Data of 2147483648 to 2147483647 or 00000000 to FFFFFFFF can be stored in a two point area of the file register The most significant bit in a 32 bit structure is a sign bit 4 File register data registration The standard RAM is available as a memory media for storing file register data 5 File register size The standard RAM can store the data up to the following size Note that however if the standard RAM is used YZ Y Jelslbe slld Z S other than as the file register available points are decreased 277 Page 30 Section 2 1 CPU module Points LO2CPU LO2CPU P 64K L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 384K 269 6 Setting method a File register setting When using a file register select Use the following file Set in the same way when using an extended data register D or an extended link register W O Project win
84. register ZR used to access the extended data register D EDzN ZRc EDN Dc Device number of the file register ZR used to access the extended link register W EWzn ZRc EDc EWN We 1 Variables in the table indicate the following e ZRc Points of the file register ZR EDzN Device number of the file register ZR used to access the extended data register D EDN Access target device number of the extended data register D EDc Points of the data register D EDc Points of the extended data register D EWzn Device number of the file register ZR used to access the extended link register W EWN Access target device number of the extended link register W hexadecimal EWc Points of the link register W Calculation example Dc Points of the data register D 12288 points e Wc Points of the link register W 8192 points e ZRc Points of the file register ZR 2048 points EDc Points of the extended data register D 2048 points Ex Device number of the file register ZR used to access D1300 EDzN 2048 13000 12288 2760 Ex Device number of the file register ZR used to access W2100 EWzN 2048 2048 2100 8192 2048 2048 8448 8192 4352 x DO Data register D ZRO D12287 Xe D12288 ZR2047 a ZR2048 ra 1 D13000 Extended data register D ZR2760 D143
85. sampling trace The first sampling trace is performed normally The second sampling trace cannot be performed Performing online change during execution of sampling trace The trace point or trigger point is specified by the step number The sampling trace is suspended but the online change is normally performed If neither of them is specified other than by step No both the online change and sampling trace can be performed g Performing sampling trace during online change The trace point or trigger point is specified by the step number The online change is completed normally but the sampling trace is not performed If neither of them is specified other than by step No both the online change and sampling trace can be performed CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 21 Writing Programs in RUN Status There are two types of writing programs to the CPU module while it is in the RUN status e Online change ladder mode gt Page 139 Section 3 21 1 e Online change files gt Page 140 Section 3 21 2 To perform from multiple programming tools use a pointer so that data are relatively written to the CPU module F Page 140 Section 3 21 2 3 21 1 Online change ladder mode Programs are written by a ladder block unit Programming tool A program is written in units of ladder blocks Online change can be performed only for the program memory program cache me
86. scan END processing A Point Request 4 Request 5 Request 2 Request 1 Request 3 ll 0 Sea Peripheral Multiple requests are processed until the processing time exceeds the set service processing time 1ms When the service processing time is exceeded the service processing is suspended and the remaining requests are processed at the END processing in the next scan The increases of the scan time remain constant even though qually while multiple requests are processed in one END processing If no request data for service processing exists END processing speeds up by the amount of request processing time The CPU module does not wait for requests 93 Bunjes 6ulsseoojd solAJeS 9 amp c Specify service process execution counts Operation when 1 time is set is as shown below Program execution Request 2 Request 4 Request 1 Request 3 Request 5 E E Ca Peripheral Even if the program execution time is the same the scan time depends on service processing time Operation when 2 times is set is as shown below Request 2 Request 4 Request 1 Request 3 Request 5 Peripheral 1 1 Y A g Pd a Regardless of request data size two requests z are processed at one END processing 1 1 de 1 1 Request 1 Reque
87. screen High speed counter function rotation speed monitor screen 210 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 4 Built in 1 O function error clear An error can be cleared by specifying an axis of the positioning function or CH channel of the high speed counter function Built in 1 O function error clear axis CH selection screen 1 Select the target item using the A and y buttons EEN _ Built in I O function error clear confirmation screen 2 Select YES using the A and y buttons and ee as Built in I O function error clear ae screen 3 After the setting is completed either of the screens shown left appear To return the display to the built in monitor error clear screen press the button 159 1 JOYUON Ndd lt p Jopuow UOROUN O I UFIING SZY 211 4 2 6 Error display clear The current and past errors and their information can be checked with the display unit Also the current error can be cleared The error display clear includes the following functions e Current error monitor Error log display Error clear 1 Screen transition The following shows screen transition of error display clear Selecting CLEAR Error log screen IT5 3 3 ERR IDV INF 3 3 SCPU gt ERR gt LOG IT5 2 3 ERR COM INF 2 3 212 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 2 Current error monitor The information of latest and current CPU module error inclu
88. specifying an internal user device as a local device Devices of the CPU module are classified into the following two types Global device that can be shared by multiple programs that are being executed e Local device that is used independently for each program 7 1 Global Device Programs being executed in the CPU module can share the global device Global device data are stored in the device memory of the CPU module and can be shared by all programs Program A Device memory Mo Internal relay y M0 ON OFF ON OFF data of M0 7 Program B MO y ON OFF data of M0 2 n q IeqolID L Z Sesa ae 05 07 Point O All of the devices that have not been set as local devices lt _ gt Page 286 Section 7 2 are global devices O For execution of multiple programs the range to be shared by all programs and the range to be used independently by each program must be specified in advance gt Page 286 Section 7 2 Example Internal relay MO Shared by all programs The ranges must be specified Used in program A for each program Used in program B Used in program C ESOO OOO 285 7 2 Local Device The local device is a device that can be
89. status and SD memory card insertion status Data size can be checked only when the backup operation was executed by a remote operation 3 LEDs indicating backup status Backup operation status can be checked by LED indication as shown below SD690 value Backup status LED indication Backup start ti 24 ERE a en MODE Flash green BAT Flash yellow completed The color changes as follows at intervals of 800ms 1 MODE Flash green BAT On green 3H Backup in execution 2 MODE Flash green BAT On green USER On red 3 MODE Flash green USER On red 44 Backup completed MODE Flash green BAT Flash green FFy Backup error MODE Flash green BAT Flash green USER Flash red 176 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 4 Causes of a backup error If backup was not completed a diagnostic error is not detected In that case the error cause is stored in SD689 and the error response is returned to the programming tool SD689 Error Backup error response Error cause factor value number Backup started without an SD memory card inserted or without the SD memory card lock switch slid down 100H 1 41FEH Backup preparation or backup started while an SD memory card is disabled by SM606 SD memory card forced disable instruction 2004 Size of data to be backed up exceeds the capacity of the SD memory card inserted 3004 Write protecti
90. stored in DO to D3 4 points Word devices of the CPU module can be used Point In subroutine programs with argument passing do not use any devices that are used by the function register If this occurs function register values will not be normally passed to the calling program PO E H CAuP Po DO Ho Ro R10 FDO SeolAed wals s leuJelu E G moy K D3 d4 Ad X4 SeolAep uonouny VEG Since DO to D3 are used for FDO D3 cannot be used in the subroutine program 257 5 3 2 Special relay SM The special relay SM is an internal relay of which details are specified inside the CPU module and the CPU module status data are stored in this special relay MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 5 3 3 Special register SD The special register SD is an internal register of which details are specified inside the CPU module and the CPU module status data such as failure diagnostics or system information are stored in this special register MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 258 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 5 4 Link Direct Devices The link direct device allows direct access to the link device of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module Regardless of the link refresh of the CPU module the direct reading writing from to the link device of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module can be done by using a
91. the CPU module is inaccessible or e externally performing latch clear to the CPU module in a control panel 1 Devices cannot be reset if they are in the range where a latch clear operation is disabled Page 86 Section 3 4 3 1 Executing method The following two methods are available Using a programming tool By an external device using the MC protocol Set the CPU module in the STOP status Not available in the RUN status a Using a programming tool Open the Remote Operation dialog box Online gt Remote Operation Select Latch clear for execution b By an external device using the MC protocol Use MC protocol commands MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 114 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 1 4 Scan Time Measurement This function displays the processing time of set program section during ladder monitoring The time required forthe subroutine and interrupt programs can be measured 1 Execution 1 Open the Scan Time Measurement dialog box Debug gt Scan Time Measurement Scan Time Measurement Measurement Limit Program Name MAIN Start Step End Step Scan Time Initial Value Current Value Maximum Value Minimum Value 2 Specify the start and end steps and click the Start button H CD Point 2 When displaying the Scan Time Measurement dialog box after specifying the scan time measurement rang
92. the program gt Page 306 Appendix 1 2 2 Instructions Some instructions among those applicable to the QnCPU cannot be used in the LCPU The following table shows the instructions not applicable to the LCPU Classification File set Instruction File register switching instruction Application instruction QDRSET P Other instructions Reading routing information S P RTREAD Registering routing information S P RTWRITE File register high speed block transfer RBMOV P S P TO Write to host CPU shared memory TO P CPU maple shared memory DTO P access instruction FROM P Reading from the CPU shared memory of another CPU DFRO P Motion SFC program startup request S P SFCS Servo program startup request S P SVST Axis speed change during positioning and JOG operation S P CHGV Motion CPU dedicated Torque control value change during operation and suspension S P CHGT j q in real mode instruction C t val h f halted axis hronized der urren i value change of halted axis synchronized encoder S P CHGA cam axis Write device data to motion controller S P DDWR Multiple CPU dedicated Read device data from motion controller S P DDRD instruction Motion SFC program startup request D P SFCS Servo program startup request D P SVST Multiple CPU high speed bus Axis speed change during positioning and JOG operation D P CHGV compatible Moti
93. the program that is being monitored 1 Monitoring local devices The following shows examples of monitoring local devices Ex DO to D99 are set as local devices and three programs A B and C are executed by the CPU module Three programs are to be executed in the order of A gt B gt C gt END processing gt A gt B Monitored device Item DO Local device D100 Global device Local device monitor is set The DO value in the specified program local device for a program is monitored 1 The D100 value after execution of the specified program is monitored Local device monitor is not set The DO value after execution of the program C is monitored The D100 value after execution of the program C is monitored 4 When Not Used is set for Local Device in File Usability Setting of the Program tab the DO value after execution of the specified program is monitored When local devices are set to be monitored and the program B is displayed for monitoring the local device s used in the program B can be monitored CPU module Program execution A B gt C Program A Program B Program C Set local device monitor and monitor the program B Display the local device data of the program B Example Programming tool If DO to D99 are set as a local device DO 4 an
94. the setting range To change a device by specifying a step No the index modified device must not be on the boundary of devices otherwise the device value is not changed Specifying the file register If the file register is specified to register the executional conditioned device test setting the CPU module does not check the file register file assignment and the file register number range A file register value is not changed within the specified step in the following cases e The file register file is not assigned The specified file register number is out of the file register range 131 159 solAed pauompuoo euonnoax3 6L 8 3 20 Sampling Trace This function samples the data of the specified device at a preset timing and at a preset interval sampling cycle and then stores the trace results in the sampling trace file In addition this function can be used to read the device data upon trigger condition establishment This function is useful to check the change of the device data used in the program during debugging at a preset timing To collect device data of 50 points or more use the data logging function For the data logging function refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Data Logging Function 1 Sampling trace file This file stores the trace setting necessary for executing the function and trace results Sampling trace file can be stored only in the Standard RAM 2 Devices that the sampli
95. traces total number of executions 4 Apply the following values for N1 and N2 according to the items selected under Additional Information on the Condition setting tab of the Trace Setting dialog box e N1 When Time is selected apply 4 N2 When Program Name is selected apply 8 PLC user data Depends on the value and the number of data Source information Depends on the specifications of the programming tool Drive heading 72 Device data storage file LO2CPU LO2CPU P Setting value at formatting 2K to 32K L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT Setting value at formatting 2K to 1024K Module error collection file Data logging setting file 76 64 64 x value set for the number of storable errors Refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Data Logging Function 1 The value is adjusted by the system so that the total number of bytes including the network parameter settings is multiple of four 2 The value is adjusted by the system so that the number of bytes is multiple of four 9 228 is set by default It varies according to parameter settings 4 After the decimal point of a value found by the number of bit device points 16 is rounded up 36 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 3 Program file structure The following shows a program file structure Program file structure i 57 steps File header a Execution program These areas are reserved in
96. turns off after MODE ERR MODE On green flashing RUN MOLA RUN Off A DS ERR Off In the next procedure run the CPU module To run use the switch on the CPU module 4 Move the switch to the RUN position We MA MODE On green RUN Whe S515 RUN On green BAT USER ERR Off When the RUN LED is lit green the program is being executed successfully slnpoN Ndd 94 Jo vOgesado ue Bunaya 9 Point By remote operation CPU modules can be operated without using switches gt Page 109 Section 3 13 27 2 Checking operation Conductivity and power distribution status of contacts and coils can be checked by switching GX Works2 to the monitor mode O Online gt Monitor gt Start Monitoring PRG MAIN 0 500ms Local Device not Executed When X0 and X1 are turned on Y10 turns on to turn on XO and X1 place the cursor on them and double click while holding the key While contacts and coils are conducting they are shown in blue Alternatively device states can be checked through a display unit _ gt Page 193 Section 4 2 1 Debug can be performed by forcibly turn on or off devices in the Modify Value dialog box Debug gt Modify Value Modify Value Device Label Buffer Memory Device abe Enter a device to be x turned on or off Data Type Bit v ON OEF Switch ON OFF Settable Range Execution Result lt lt Close
97. value setting only for those that should be set during END processing Point When a constant scan is set the results of processing performed in END processing are held for the period between after END processing is completed and until the next scan starts Buissad01d GNA Vez sjJnljonJlS SWI ueoS EZ 45 2 4 Operation Processing of the CPU Module for Each Operating Status There are three types of operating status for the CPU module e RUN status STOP status PAUSE status 1 Operation processing in the RUN status RUN status is a status where program operations are repeatedly performed in a loop between the step 0 and the END FEND instruction a Output status when entering the RUN status The CPU module outputs either of the following according to the output module parameter setting when its status is changed to RUN K gt Page 96 Section 3 7 Output Y status saved immediately before entering the STOP status e Result of operations performed for one scan after entering the RUN status b Processing time required before operations The processing time required for the CPU module to start program operations after its operating status is changed from STOP to RUN varies depending on the system configuration and or parameter settings Normally it takes one to three seconds 2 Operation processing in the STOP status Stop status is a status where the operation is stopped The CPU module status will be c
98. while the value in SD690 is 2H Backup start preparation completed starts backup Backup start setup is requested Backup start is requested from a programming tool or the backup from a programming tool or the backup startsetup contact is turned on start contact is turned on Backup start A A I preparation completed Backup in execution Backup completed Before backup start Backup start prepared Y Backup start ON setup contact iy i l SM691 ON 1 Backup start preparation OFF 1 status flag i i ji 1 i 1 I Backup start ON contact OFF SD690 Backup status 0 1 pes Aiowaw Gs ol dnyoeg 0 pleg Aioway GS ym uonounJd aBueyo slInpoN Ndo 088 175 b Execution by remote operation Open the Create Backup Data for PLC Module Change dialog box O Online gt PLC Module Change gt Create Backup Data Create Backup Data for PLC Module Change Connection Channel List Connecting Interface pse lt gt PLC Module Target PLC Point y Status Online fi station No Host PLC Type 26 BT Setting Backup Target Data IV Program memory Standard RAM IV Standard ROM Default Backup Data Backup not executed 0 3 completed Confirm Data Size 453 KB Options No setting Already set Clicking the Confirm Data Size button displays the backup data size A value appears regardless of the CPU module connection
99. 0 Low Speed 10ms increments of 0 01ms RUN Set the contacts that control RUN PAUSE P 109 Pi 7 10014 RUN PAUSE of the CPU XO to X1FFF ne PaA n PAUSE module Set the valid contact device No eos pi Operation 10144 used for backup of latch data to X M B Pea gt nes the standard ROM Select whether to allow th P 109 Remote Reset 1002 SOA ME IGE OO OW ME Selected deselected Deselected EA i remote reset Section 3 13 Set the status of the outputs Y P P tate Recalculat Th P 96 Output Mode at STOP to RUN 1003 when the operating status is vea e di eis 2 37 switched from STOP to RUN P i Start I O No Assianitheini init en e LO2CPU LO2CPU P Intelligent Function Module gru imtertuptpointers 0 to 3DO Setting Interrupt Pointer 100A to 1255 and set the start I O L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT Page 281 ra p A number and start SI number of cma 7 Section 5 11 Setting A a 0 to FFO each intelligent function module Start SI No 50 to 255 296 To the next page APPENDICES Parameter No Item io Description Setting range Default Reference Select whether to synchronize CPU module start ith P 87 Module Synchronization 100Cy eh EU a npm Selected deselected Selected age intelligent function module Section 3 5 startup MELSEC L CC Link gt Select whether t the built i Syst Built in CC Link Setting 2 10184 eect whether to use the bulen selected deselected Selected YSS 1 0 Master Local Module U
100. 07 BBC2 0000 00 00 00 00 00 L26CPU BT BT Remove memory card after placing the memory card oe Hsen 2000 00 09 00 00 00 eres pa ie San insert switch after inserting a 00005 7FEF 0000 00 00 00 00 00 LI71C24 R2 es o 00004 BBC2 0000 00 00 00 00 00 L26CPU BT BT 00003 7FEF 0000 00 00 00 00 00 LI71C24 R2 00002 BBC2 0000 00 00 00 00 00 L26CPU BT BT 00001 BBC2 0000 00 00 00 00 00 L26CPU BT BT Clear History Refresh Create CSV File Close Explanation olution Item Description Remarks Error Code Displays error code numbers a ae Displays the year month day hour minute and second when an error The year can be displayed within the range of Date and Time occurred 1980 to 2079 Displays a module model name For the built in I O and built in CC Link the model name is displayed as follows e Built in 1 0 CPU module model name IO example LO2CPU IO or Model N RARA L26CPU BT IO e Built in CC Link CPU module model name BT example L26CPU BT BT Start I O Displays the start I O number of a module in error d For details on error codes refer to the following Manual for the intelligent function module used 2 If an error occurred during initial processing its occurrence time may be stored as 0000 00 00 00 00 00 in the module error collection file Such errors are not displayed in the order of occurrence Point O The Error History dialog box can be displayed by selec
101. 0a gt If the online change function is executed during execution of the executional conditioned device test only the online change function is completed The executional conditioned device test setting registered in the ladder block that was changed online the corresponding setting is disabled 129 159 solAed pauonipuoo euonmosx3 61 c Online change to the CPU module where the executional conditioned device test setting has been registered For the online module change ladder if any executional conditioned device test setting has been registered in the ladder block that is to be changed online the CPU module disables the corresponding setting Ex Step numbers of registrations 1 to 3 are specified in the executional conditioned device test settings When the ladder block including the registration 2 is changed online the registration 2 is disabled Since the registrations 1 and 3 are not included in the change target program they are not disabled xo AN x2 0 Y100 1 QU iT Registration 1 Uo Move G1000 Do x10 x11 x12 4H 4 vio Registration 2 M100 X20 M20 UZ 164 move G50 D10 x21 Registration 3 1 The shaded area is a ladder block to be changed online Ex When multiple ladder blocks are to be changed online ladder blocks between the change target ladder blocks are included in the change target In the following example registrations 1 to 3 a
102. 0ms PLC System Setting Parameters of the system required for use of the CPU module are set Common Pointer No P After 0 4095 Points Occupied by Empty Slot jie gt Points PLC Name PLC System pe File PLc RAS Boot File Program sFc Device io Assignment Built in Ethernet Port Setting Built in IO Function Setting System Interrupt Setting Fixed Scan Interval 128 100 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms 129 40 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms 130 20 0 ms 0 Sms 1000ms 181 10 0 ms o sms 1000ms oh Speed interrupt Setting Interrupt Program Fixed Scan Program Setting High Speed Execution A PLC Compatibility Setting I Use special relay special register from SM SD 1000 Service Processing Setting ce Execute the process as the scan time proceeds Specify service process time C Specify service process execution counts 10 Yo ms 0 2ms 1000ms Times 1 10 Times Execute it while waiting For constant scan setting PLC Module Change Setting Print Window Print Window Preview PLC Module Change Setting Acknowledge XY Assignment Default Check cons Parameter E Item NG Description Setting range Default Reference Low Speed 1ms to 1000ms in increments of 100ms Timer Limit 4000 Set the time limit for the low 1ms Page 242 Setting N speed timer or high speed timer 0 01ms to 100 0ms in Section 5 2 1
103. 1 1206 999 Fax 46 0 40 93 23 01 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 MELTRADE Kft HUNGARY Omni Ray AG SWITZERLAND Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fert utca 14 Im Sch rli 5 Fax 1 847 478 22 53 HU 1107 Budapest CH 8600 D bendorf Phone 36 0 1 431 9726 Phone 41 0 44 802 28 80 Fax 36 0 1 431 9727 Fax 41 0 44 802 28 28 Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA GTS TURKEY Ritausmas iela 23 Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok No 5 LV 1058 Riga TR 34775 Yukar Dudullu Umraniye ISTANBUL Phone 371 0 784 2280 Phone 90 0 216 526 39 90 Fax 371 0 784 2281 Fax 90 0 216 526 3995 Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE Savanoriu Pr 187 4 B M Raskovoyi St LT 02300 Vilnius UA 02660 Kiev Phone 370 0 5 232 3101 Phone 380 0 44 494 33 55 Fax 370 0 5 232 2980 Fax 380 0 44 494 33 66 Systemgroup UKRAINE 2 M Krivonosa St UA 03680 Kiev 4 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Phone 380 0 44 490 92 29 Fax 380 0 44 248 88 68 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V FA European Business Group Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Germany FACTORY AUTOMATION Tel 49 0 2102 4860 Fax 49 0 2102 4861120 infoomitsubishi automation com www mitsubishi automation com
104. 1 The on off information for X0Z1 is stored in the VOZ1 edge relay For example the on off information of XO is stored in VO and that of X1 is stored in V1 Timing Chart ON X0 OFF ON Turns on for 1 scan by rise of XO When Z1 0 VO OFF l ON mor 1 4 1 scan ON X1 OFF f ON Turns on for 1 scan by rise of X1 When Z1 4 1 V1 orr LU o o ON M1 OFF 1 scan 240 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 5 2 9 Step relay S This device is provided for SFC programs MELSEC Q L QnA Programming Manual SFC s Aelel dais z s SeolAed SN eulaju Z S 241 5 2 10 Timer T ST Time counting starts when a coil is turned on and it times out and the contact turns on when the current value reaches the set value 1 Timer types Timers are mainly classified into the following two types e Timer of which value is set to 0 and contact is turned off when a coil is turned off Retentive timer that holds both the current value and contact status even if the coil is turned off Also each timer has low speed and high speed timers Timer Timer Low speed timer High speed timer Retentive a Low speed retentive timer timer High speed retentive timer 2 Specification of the timer The same device is used for the low and high speed timers and the type is determined according to the instruction used Ex For the OUT TO instruction the low speed timer is specified and for the OUTH TO instruction t
105. 1 to SD675 c Precautions To set the CPU module to the RUN status from the standby status power it on again or reset after the backup operation is complete e The status of latch data backup valid contact to the standard ROM is checked at execution of the END instruction Therefore data are not backed up even if a contact is repeatedly turned on and off on gt off gt on or off gt on gt off in one scan When the latch data backup valid contact to the standard ROM is set to X and the CPU module is powered off and then on or is reset without turning off the contact the data cannot be backed up unless the latch data backup valid contact to the standard ROM is turned off and then on again The latch data backup start contact to the standard ROM is set to M or B and data are backed up by turning off and then on the contact the data cannot be backed up unless the latch data backup valid contact to the standard ROM is turned off and then on again dnyoeq elep yoJe7 2Z8 WOH pJepuels ol dnyoeg eled Uole1 Ze 163 2 Execution by remote operation a Execution method Open a dialog box to execute a remote operation Online lt gt Latch Data Backup gt Backup MELSOFT Series GX Works2 A Do you backup data for operating latch data backup to the standard ROM Caution Backup target covers device memory breakdown history and SFC program continuing start information Device memory covers all d
106. 2 DO Project window gt PLC Parameter gt Parameter gt I O Assignment IO Assignment No so type Model Name Points Startxr Efe ccoo ee a Pec Built in 10 Function jiipmns v 2 fic Buleimcctink 7 zs gt 3 o o Pw a a icy ls apezy 6 fs Assigning the I O address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Switch Setting Detailed Setting Point In the I O Assignment tab the following settings are also available Response time from I O I O Response Time gt Page 97 Section 3 8 CPU module operation upon an error gt Page 98 Section 3 9 CPU module operation upon hardware failure of an intelligent function module gt Page 99 Section 3 10 Switch setting of intelligent function modules 41 juawubisse Jaquinu O ZZZ JOQUNN O I 2S 2 Precautions a Type setting The type set in the I O Assignment tab must be the same as that of the connected module Setting a different type may result as follows Type specified in the I O Results Assignment tab Connected modules Input module Intelligent Output module Branch Input Intelligent function module Output Branch SP UNIT LAY ERR occurs Empty Branch module lt input Output Intelligent Modules other than a branch module Empty Regarded as Empty
107. 2 1 2 2 2 4 2 6 5 2 10 Appendix 1 2 9 3 1 3 2 6 1 Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 1 7 2 6 1 3 1 3 4 3 27 4 2 1 4 5 1 5 2 5 5 1 5 6 1 5 7 5 8 Appendix 2 3 1 Additions Section 3 33 3 34 Japanese manual version SH 080873 l This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2010 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 346 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of p
108. 3 The result is stored in the input X device memory and is used as input data 4 to execute the program Execution of an output contact instruction Output data in the output Y device memory are read out 5 and the program is executed Execution of the OUT nstruction The operation result of the program 6 are output to the general purpose output and output module and stored in the output Y device memory CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 2 Response delay An output response which corresponds to the status change in the input module delays for one scan maximum depending on the on timing of an external contact The following shows response delay examples Example 55 Ar ovse A program that turns on the output Y5E when the input X5 is turned on DYSE turns on at the earliest timing 0 55 56 ON Exiemal contact PEF A ON DX5 OFF CPU module J External contact ON devices DY5E QEE External load Delay time DY5E turns on at the slowest timing 0 55 56 END 0 55 56 py Hy E Input refresh ON H Output refresh External contact cza ON DKE Orr CPU module External contact ON devices DY5E OFF External load Delay time maximum 1 scan 53 pulsseooJd aig 797 sindino pue slndul jo 6ulsseoojd 9z 2 1 Interrupt Program An interrupt program is from an interrupt pointer IO to the I
109. 35 J File register ZR 7 WO S R Link register W ZR4095 IO W1999 ZR4096 W2000 ZR4352 2 W2100 Extended link register W L ZR6143 W27FF J 276 5 9 Nesting N CHAPTER 5 DEVICES Nesting N is a device used in the master control instructions MC and MCR instructions to program operation conditions in a nesting structure The master control instruction opens or closes a common ladder gate to efficiently switch the ladder of a program Specify the nesting N in ascending order in order of NO to N14 starting from the outside of the nesting structure No __ P Specified in ascending order Control range of nesting NO Control range of nesting N1 Control range of nesting N2 Ni N2 Mc NO M15 M15 B i MC N1 M16 M16 T i i D 1 MC N2 M17 M17 For use of the nesting refer to the following MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction MCR N2 ia IT MCR N1 Jl 1 I MCR NO gt Executed when condition A is met Executed when conditions A and B are met Specified in descending order Executed when conditions A B and C are met Ll Executed when conditions A and B are met Ll Executed when condition A is J met N Bunsen 6 9 Executed regardless of conditions A B and C 277 5 10 Poi
110. 3JF68 gt System configuration and programming using structured text language MELSEC Q L QnA Programming Manual PID Control Instructions lt SH 080040 13JF59 gt Dedicated instructions for PID control 3 Operating manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt Description GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common lt SH 080779ENG 13JU63 gt GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual lt SH 080373E 13JU41 gt System configuration parameter settings and online operations common to Simple project and Structured project of GX Works2 Operating methods of GX Developer such as programming printing monitoring and debugging 4 I O module and intelligent function module manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt MELSEC L I O Module User s Manual lt SH 080888ENG 13JZ34 gt MELSEC L Serial Communication Module User s Manual Basic lt SH 080894ENG 13JZ40 gt Description Specifications and troubleshooting of the I O module System configuration specifications procedures before operation data communication methods basic and troubleshooting of the serial communication module MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual lt SH 080008 13JF89 gt Details of MELSEC communication protocol MC protocol that is used for data communication between a target device and a CPU module MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual
111. 5 Hexadecimal Page 282 Others 4 ER Cannot be set Section 5 12 2 device Macro P 282 instruction 10 VDO to VD9 Decimal nap a Section 5 12 3 argument device 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 32K points D12288 to D45055 for the LO2CPU and LO2CPU P The number of points that can be actually used varies depending on the intelligent function module LOA Manual for the intelligent function module used 0 to 64K in total for the LO2CPU and LO2CPU P 128 points BLO to BL127 for the LO2CPU and LO2CPU P UO to U3F for the LO2CPU and LO2CPU P This device can be used for the CPU module whose serial number first five digits is 13012 or later For CC Link IE Field Network Jn WO to Jn W1FFF are for RWw 8192 points and Jn W2000 to Jn W3FFF are for RWr 8192 points When change device points refer to 2 7 Page 232 Section 5 2 1 the lower half of the page 231 ISI aomag V S 5 2 Internal User Devices Internal user devices can be used for various user applications 1 Points for internal user devices Set the number of device points to be used Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter 2 gt Device L Parameter Setting PLC Name PLC System PLCFile PLCRAS Boot File Program SFC Device 1fO Assignment Built in Ethernet Port Setting Built in 1 0 Function Setting gg 8 ey Baty ESR e Local Device Start Local Device End E
112. 6K 16384 MO to M16383 16 1024 x1 16384 Latch relay L 10 4K 4096 LO to L4095 16 256 x1 4096 Link relay B 16 4K 4096 B0000 to BOFFF 16 256 x1 4096 Annunciator F 10 1K 1024 FO to F1023 16 64 x1 1024 Link special relay SB 16 2K 2048 SB0000 to SBO7FF 16 128 x1 2048 Edge relay V 10 1K 1024 VO to V1023 16 64 x1 1024 Step relay 10 8K 8192 SO to S8191 116 512 x1 8192 Timer T 10 2K 2048 TO to T2047 x 2304 x2 4096 Retentive timer ST 10 2K 2048 STO to ST2047 x a 2304 x2 4096 Counter C 10 1K 1024 CO to C1023 x 1152 x2 2048 Data register D 10 14K 14336 DO to D14335 x1 14336 Link register 16 4K 4096 W0000 to W4095 x1 4096 Link special register SW 16 2K 2048 SW0000 to SW07FF x1 2048 29568 Total 63488 as 29696 or less 1 The points are fixed for the system Cannot be changed However the points for the step relay S can be changed to 0 2 Up to 32K points can be set for each device 60K for the internal relay and link relay 3 Enter the values multiplied or divided by the number shown in the Size words column 234 5 2 1 Input X CHAPTER 5 DEVICES Inputs are the device used to obtain the on and off information from external devices to a CPU module Push button switch Selector switch Digital switch 1 Concept of input CPU module Input X C o gt UCD E o One input
113. 7C0 2 E KR ER E KE E E KF S amp S E HB tf fh 97D0 E A KH hk B qe 6 R 3 97E0 5 MA hh FF KF a FS Ex E E 97FO E Ff BR BE A CE eE EE 9840 2 XK E 8 E F E B amp B F BE F 9850 BE EE LE EB mM B E RD o 9860 E mz E E hh R Y E E HE E kr 9870 E m p 9880 9890 98A0 5 A WN J x E R al J ge R 98B0 E E FTF RF S amp F E HH K th 0 tk wg A 98C0 rt wr th amp th amp fh ff fF Els tk ff tk fl 98D0 eh fF E a amp BE fF E A fe A 98E0 E E f E E E E f amp fF fF fF TF tm E B 98FO E E E e E E R ases 9940 Za E E E E A E E EE E E E E E E 9950 EE EM 8 E BEE IL TD R f m HF 9960 R 1 El HK 8 FH SF KR E RR B 9970 H Y R E hk FR A FB E A A 9980 BH uU A 3 A A J A M 31 4 HK V El 9990 an 321 a HH A 2 3 4 3 21 E 99A0 Y tm XX Y wD 5 F HB Y HF 3 HS E HB 7 99B0 7 a UC E E E E TE H 99C0 t E F 1 OH OS es FS OB E RE 99D0 me B B amp B E SS Y MM NN E B 99E0 tT A RR WA F R hk HW F amp F K MH A E E E 99FO mw E ES E BM a To the next page 332 APPENDICES 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 A B C D E F 9A40 R MEE amp FF KR as Bm 9A50 E E E mw KR E R E E k Be mM mM 9A60 E Mom Hw FF FH R E amp E E 9A70 E E hk hk bh mm E E a Bw hh
114. 7EF 2009 12 11 11 57 57 L26CPU BT 00017 OBBS 2009 12 11 11 57 11 L26CPU BT 00016 OBBS 2009 12 11 11 56 58 L26CPU BT 00015 05DC 2009 12 11 11 56 09 L26CPU BT IO 0000 00014 0640 2009 12 11 11 55 22 L26CPU BT 00013 08FC 2009 12 11 11 54 50 L26CPU BT 00012 O8FC 2009 12 11 11 54 34 L26CPU BT 00011 05DC 2009 12 11 11 54 17 L26CPU BT IO 0000 00010 05DC 2009 12 11 11 53 36 L26CPU BT IO 0000 00009 08FC 2009 12 11 11 53 15 L26CPU BT Gaas 00008 05DC 2009 12 11 11 52 59 L26CPU BT IO 0000 1 Supported module The CPU module collects errors occurred in the connected intelligent function modules The CPU module does not collect errors of those modules on other stations in the network 2 Timing when module errors are collected Module errors are collected in END processing Executing the COM instruction does not collect errors 3 Storing module errors The module errors can be stored either the system memory 1 or the standard RAM The errors are stored separately from error history CPU module data 1 The memory is managed inside the system CPU module System memory Standard RAM LO2CPU L26CPU BT LO2CPU P L26CPU PBT 100 fixed 1000 fixed 2 Note3 1 Although the parameters of this function can be set in GX Developer the error history cannot be displayed 158 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 4 Setting procedure On the PLC RAS tab select Collection of intelligent function module error histories is
115. 80 5 11 Interrupt Pointer 0 4 281 542 OM e ed e dd dd a 282 5 121 SEC block device BL piae eiaa a a A pe oa Pe a ee R 282 5 12 2 I O No specification device U i 282 5 12 3 Macro instruction argument device VD i 282 CHAPTER 6 CONSTANTS 283 6 1 Decimal Constant KK sepan a eke et a ee bbs elie ea hed eet a 283 6 2 Hexadecimal Constant H i 283 6 3 Real Number Ey eu stor i a a Jaen iat ieee be aed lel bo ek 284 64 Character String Ce nm aaa a dd a 284 CHAPTER 7 CONVENIENT USAGE OF DEVICES 285 7 1 GS DEVICE Se el ee a he ee a 285 T2 Vo A DEVICE ad dira dd ae de lech Sole 286 APPENDICES 292 Appendix 1 Parameter Setting 0 00 0 ccc teens 292 Appendix 1 1 List of Parameter Numbers 0 292 Appendix 1 2 PLC Parameter 0 295 Appendix 1 2 1 PLC Name Setting 0 295 Appendix 1 2 2 PLC System Setting o o oooooorr eee eee 296 Appendix 1 2 3 PLC File Setting 0000 eee 298 Appendix 1 2 4 PLC RAS Setting 0 299 Appendix 1 2 5 Boot File Setting 0 301 Appendix 1 2 6 Program Setting 0 302 Appendix 1 27 SFC Seting 0c ee ti tt Yio ee eee eee 303 Appendix 1 2 8 Device Setting 9 304 Appendix 1 2 9 I O Assignment Setting 0 306 Appendix 1 2 10 Acknowledge XY Assignment i 308 Appendix 1 2 11 Built in Ethernet Port Setting i 309 Appendix 1 2 12 Built in I O Function Setting i 311 Appendix 1 3 Network Parameter Setting et 312
116. Appendix 1 4 Remote Password setting 0 313 Appendix 2 Added and Changed Functions i 314 Appendix 3 CPU Module Processing Time a an auauua cece eect teens 315 Appendix 3 1 Time Required for Each Processing Included in Scan Time 315 Appendix 3 2 Factors that Increase the Scan Time 00000 eee eee eee 322 Appendix 4 Data Used in the CPU Module i 325 Appendix 5 Character Codes Available in the Display Unit i 327 Appendix 6 Differences Between LCPU and QnUCPU i 339 Appendix 6 1 Specification Comparison 0000 cece eee ee 339 Appendix 6 2 Precautions for Utilizing Programs 00 eee 340 Appendix 7 Precautions for Using GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer 341 Appendix 8 Device Point Assignment Sheet i 342 INDEX 343 REVISIONS gronie daa dise dai a tees terse go seals Bate es 346 WARRANTY A wed ee eit Ee ee pa 347 16 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following page illustration is for explanation purpose only and is different from the actual pages 7 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS is used for screen names and items 7 1 1 setting method The chapter of 1 Setting garameters the current page is shown 1 shows operating AQperatinNgrocedure rocedures 1 Open thg PLC Parameter ialog box p ures
117. Auto refresh by CC Link e Refresh with intelligent function modules d Specifying in a program Set the following properly so that each specification does not cross over the boundary between the internal user device and the extended data register D or extended link register W Index modification e Indirect specification Specification for instructions that use block data 4 Block data means the following Data used in instructions such as FMOV BMOV and BK which treat more than one word for operation Control data composed of two or more words which are specified in instructions such as SP FWRITE and SP FREAD Data in a 32 bit or greater format binary 32 bits real number indirect address of a device For details on the index modification and indirect specification with the extended data register D and extended link register W refer to the following MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction 275 M 1a sibay um papuajx3 pue q Ja siBay ejeq pepuelx gg e Access from an inapplicable module To access the extended data register D or extended link register W from a module that does not support the use of these devices device numbers need to be specified with those of the file register ZR Calculation formulas for obtaining device numbers of the file register ZR to be specified and calculation examples are described below Item Calculation method Device number of the file
118. Bh 9A80 E E k E E E E EEE MM E E E E 9A90 i le amp we ihe EE O A El El 9AAO El E rR fF WA x F F 9ABO E E 0 K R E YF HF KF FH CQqU E 9ACO H E E A amp 5 E E E FF 9ADO E e 46 E E E R B E B B 9AEO E t amp E 5 E amp X 3 B B XX K 9AFO 5 XK F E amp E F E YX B E E E 9B40 FF Ww wh E E th B Rm HE A He th Hh 2 9B50 5 E W E E h 2 E Z m m R 9B60 E it E E tf fh A Ss B th 2 E A 9B70 pes E Ff 2 F FF B B 35 fF o e 9B80 E E R amp E E E RE E B B E B E B E 9B90 a mn B E E FP FF E RF EER 9BAO FRE BE L 5 amp F amp F F E E th Ww wh oe 9BBO EO ZA ZE IA E E lt lt UE 9BCO E E Ml la ll q amp IE 5 1 9BDO E we E E A E E NE BE HE HR E 9BEO E BR E E te tf te hk fe 9BFO E FF 4 EF E gt was 9C40 E E e SR FR E hk E E E 1 Bw H 9C50 F Y FR S amp S XX K BE Zg E mM ft q g A 9C60 E E 2 E F tt E E g 9070 HE E E A MN E th a BE B af 9080 HE W E EZ E BE th tk amp KRK K W 9C90 E E th XX tm tf tf E me ICAO E E k E W EZ BE fF Ff E TFA k W 9CBO E E E E WW tt E E R 8 E R E E 9CC0 E R E E 4 E 2 E E kk EB RK Tm 9CDO E B B f y E E tf 2 RK EEE 9CEO E E E E ER E 2 amp E RX E A 9CFO es E amp E E E XxX EX Y E 9D40 E HH EX KH KR KR Bm wm
119. Built in high speed counter function monitor e Built in MO function error clear 1 Screen transition The following shows screen transition of built in I O function monitor Built in 1 O function monitor Positioning function monitor axis selection screen High speed counter function monitor CH selection screen Built in O function error clear axis CH selection screen High speed counter function monitor target selection screen 208 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 2 Built in positioning function monitor The setting values of the built in positioning function can be monitored a Displayed items The following items are displayed Displayed item Description Setting range Position p Positioning range 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulses Velocity v Speed command speed limit value 0 to 200000 pps Data No Data No of positioning being executed ABSENT or 1 to 10 Error code Error code of the built in positioning function ABSENT or an error code is displayed b Operating procedure Perform the following operation Positioning function monitor axis selection screen 1 Select AXIS 1 or AXIS 2 using the A and y buttons and press the button y Positioning function monitor screen 2 The displayed items are shown 3 Built in high speed counter function monitor The setting values of the built in high speed counter function can be monitored
120. Coil of STO OFF y A Current value 0X1 to F X151 to 200 Xo of STO i Current value is held even if the coil is turned off ON i Contact of OFF STO l Contact remains on even if the coil is Instruction execution turned off RST STO instruction X1 6 Timer processing and accuracy a Processing When the OUT TO or OUT STO instruction is executed the on off switching of the timer coil current value update and on off switching of the contact are performed In the END processing the current timer value is not updated and the contact is not turned on off Program example x0 Ki0 TO Processing at execution of OUT TO instruction END OUT TO END Processing Coil ON OFF Current value update Contact ON OFF 244 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES b Accuracy The value obtained by the END instruction is added to the current value when the OUT TO or OUT STO instruction is executed The current value is not updated while the timer coil is off even if the OUT TO or OUT STO instruction is executed Timer limit setting 10ms Setting value of TO 8 10ms x8 80ms Scan time 25ms el K8 y Z Z Fa Fa Tr gt END END END END END END processing processing processing processing processing processing Program l i I i il l i I 1 2 11 2 3 1 2 I1 2 3 1 ZA 2 9 10ms counting k H i k l H j Count at y execution
121. Current T T T i this period the contact value of TO 7 0 A 7 X 0 X 7 is simultaneously turned 1 1 1 N 1 on because the count at xo OFF i i f i execution of the END 1 1 1 ON 1 instruction becomes Coil of TO OFF i equal to or larger than OFF A ON the timer setting value Contact oT i gt gt lt gt i 20ms i 20ms 20ms E Ex When the timer setting value is 2 2 x 100ms the scan time is 110ms and the timer limit setting is 100ms If the coil of the timer TO is turned on at the next scan after the values satisfy Count at execution of the END instruction Timer setting value the coil and the contact are simultaneously turned on because the values satisfy Timer current value Timer setting value at the start of the timer Timer setting value Timer setting value lt lt Scan time Timer Limit Setting 4 2x 100ms 110ms 100ms XO K2 TO H Program END ie END END ER i i tooms 1 1 o al E A counting k Count at 1 CS su execution a of the END 2 so El instruction 1 1 1 If the coil is turned on for Current i this period the contact value of TO P 0 is simultaneously turned 1 1 ON 1 on because the count at xo OFF A 1 execution of the END 1 1 1 ON 1 instruction becomes Coil of TO OFF i E equal to or larger than ON 1 the timer setting value Contact OFF l
122. D turns off and the ERR LED starts flashing SM1 turns on and the error codes 5000 and 5001 are stored in SDO The watchdog timer can be reset by executing the WDT instruction in a program To avoid the time up of watchdog timer while a program is repeatedly executed between the FOR and NEXT instructions reset the watchdog timer by the WDT instruction FOR K1000 Repeatedly executed program L 2 E pe ES E S 2 E lt Repeated by MO J 1 000 times A WDT J WDT reset NEXT Note that the scan time value is not reset even after the watchdog timer is reset The scan time is measured up to the END instruction CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 4 Latch Function This function holds data in each device of the CPU module when the CPU module is powered off and then on the CPU module is reset or a power failure occurred exceeding the allowable momentary power failure time Data in each device of the CPU module are cleared and set back to its default bit device off word device 0 when this function is not used By using this function the operation can be continued with the previous data even after powering off the CPU module while the data are managed by a sequential control Program operation does not change regardless of the latch 1 Devices that can be latched Set the device to latch among the following By default only the latch relay is latched e Latch relay L e Link relay B e A
123. Description Each Scan Collects trace data during END processing of each scan Specified Interval Collects trace data at specified time intervals Specify a device or label from the following Bit device X DX Y DY M L F SM V B SB T contact ST contact C contact FX FY BLONS JONX JOV JO SB e Word device T current value ST current value C current value D D extended data register SD W W extended link register SW R Z ZR FD UD G JO W JO SW The following modifications are available for the above devices Detail Setting Digit specification of bit device Bit specification of word device Indirect specification of word device Index modification Step No specification When the set conditions are met data collection is performed ag Pay attention to the sampling interval and sampling processing time for one sampling since the sampling trace is performed as interrupt processing If the sampling processing time for one sampling is long WDT ERROR may occur 2 Data are collected when the status immediately before execution of the specified step changes to the specified status d Trigger Condition Setting Select the trigger point ae Bulldwes oze Item Description At the Time of Trace Instruction Execution The time of execution of the TRACE instruction is set as a trigger At the Time of Manual Trigger Execution Trigger ExecutionThe time of exe
124. E H 8B50 E NN 2 EA amp amp B KR Kk HH hk B amp B FH 8B60 E nz R Y S amp S Y F amp A HB FHF HH HF 3 8B70 E E Y E A th A IR E 5F ABA 8B80 5 K WH KR Rh E KR HH ez EF 8B90 E E W RR E E HE 4 8 A F FF R 8BAO E FF a E MM amp E E 4 KF KR HR E 8BBO ZE HE E XX nm EF KR BSB B a NN HE g 8BC0 Z E U Y E EA F ES y 8BDO t F ie amp E B FH KB F G E Eo 8BEO E BE A E 0 KH FH FB REE DA 8BFO BE E KR ZE BB 88 6 A SS ll BE E 8C40 E E a Z x E E E E Hh HR A E 8C50 E An 3 mR RBR REAM RR BF g 8C60 2 E E XX E YH HK BS E FR FEF FB KR E 8C70 Mm E Y FF x E HH B DBD f 8080 EI H E A KR HT E R KR BR NK FF mm RR A 8090 E amp E S E E BR YX E E XK KB B 8CA0 E E XK E R ff R BP HR BR F a E B 8CB0 a ER Moo BM 2 Xx mM EZ EEB 8CC0 BE F amp F F A 4 M 2 qn F Kh 4 A 8CDO 6 E Mm mM ES Ss E HE Xx HE E tf F 8CEO E 1 E E BH KF BF KH E HH 2 8CFO Z E E BE E B DWH BW 4 EF A 8D40 E E it E A E I D E E 8D50 BE kt hm yy kK a E E ft KE E BE 8D60 B E E EH 1 E E fH H F A hh E 8D70 EM kk Ff EEEE E hh hk Hf A B 8D80 I A fF th 8 B H EX amp BW m Al 8D90 A amp i B E A E E amp 2 1 FF FH UA 8DAO E 5 A fh B amp B E B F EF E WH E mR E 8DBO am E 4 X RE F 2 E
125. EP pat aid EXE ERROR Instruction execution Stop Off Flashing O O Watchd O WDT ERROR Always Stop off Flashing O CPU error Supervision Program timeout PRG TIME OVER Always Continue On On O Power on reset INCORRECT Switching from STOP to RUN File di ic check St Off Off Ey eee FILE Writing to programmable ne O O controller USER Annunciator check pues e Instruction execution Continue On LED O O On 1 The operating status can be changed to Continue with the parameter setting Stop is set by default 2 This error includes an operation error when device range check is made at index modification 152 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 24 Error Clear Continuation errors can be selected by user to clear them by error type Continuation error occurred gt Remove the error cause and clear the error Continuation error occurred No continuation error Continuation error occurred BATTERY ERROR DISPLAY ERROR OPERATION ERROR Programming tool A Clear Continuation Error Error Information Continuation Error Information PLC Status Information Select All Select None Selection Status Error Message Abbreviation Error Message Detail Clear Continuation Error 1 s BATTERY ERROR BATTERY ERROR a DISPLAY ERROR DISPLAY ERROR 3 A OPERATION ERROR OPERATION ERROR
126. EV Ss A i eee 2009 12 14 10 01 32 2936 Bytes Y y COMMENT O Detail 2009 12 14 10 01 33 eit AAA pe eee es EEE P MAIN 2009 12 14 10 01 34 Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Writing Size Free Volume Use Volume 5 176Bytes jumm 76 732 5 188Bytes Refresh Execute Close Set if itis needed No Setting Already Set Related Functions lt lt Posa Start Stop PLC Set Clock PLC User Data Write Title Format PLC Memory Clear PLC Memory Arrange PLC lemory The project has been written In the next procedure execute the program Point Note that parameter setting is required to operate CPU modules In this chapter the procedure for parameter setting is not introduced since default values are used Page 292 Appendix 1 CHAPTER 1 BASIC PROCEDURE FOR PROGRAMMING 1 6 Checking an Operation of the CPU Module To check an operation execute the program written to the CPU module In this chapter operation is checked through the monitoring screen of GX Works2 1 Executing a program Before operating the CPU module data written to the CPU module must be validated To validate power off and then on or reset the CPU module 1 Before resetting the CPU module check the current MODE On green LED status MAA RUN Off ERR Flashing red 2 Move the switch on the front of the CPU module to the RESET position One second or longer 3 Hold the switch until the ERR LED
127. Es window gt Parameter PLC parameter Select the I O Assignment tab O shows mouse sansan operations E is used for items x in the menu bar and the project window item Description Reference Tee Sele the ype othe connected mode Page 4 Secon 7 12 Modai Name Selec te model name ofthe comedied mode Page a Secton 713 Pons Sette numberof parts assigned io each si Page a Secion T TA EE Spec a stan VO number or each sio Page 4 Secon 7 T5 sates ati Configure the swich setong ofthe builtin UO or inteligent function modules Page 74 Section 7 1 8 BB Detaled setang er pao Page 75 Section 7 1 7 ee The section of T E ora a H the current page is shown Setting Start X Y enables modification on the start O numbers assigned to connected modules El i shows setting or Ex When 1000 is specified in Start X Y to the slot where a 16 point module is connected the assignment operating examples range of an input module is changed to X1000 to X100F tails refer to the following LO shows reference CO WELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals manuals Point Easing tcugent inci n module VO pois ust alo be fhe sam in dion oe UO assignment seting the VO por same in additon i lt gt shows Se Point shows notes that reference pages requires attention When an intelligent module is connected I O assignment can be omitted by selecting connected modules from Intelligent
128. Fixed Scan Program Setting saves or restores gt _ High Speed Execution index register data When not writing data to the index register during interrupt fixed scan execution type program select High Speed Execution in the Interrupt Program Fixed Scan Program Setting area This setting enables faster program switching because saving and restoration are not performed 2 Processing of the index register a When High speed execution is not selected 1 The CPU module saves the index register 2 The CPU module restores the index values and passes them at program register values saved at program switching switching r4 Switching Interrupt fixed scan execution type program Restored Scan execution type program Z0 1 Restored Scan execution Execution program type program Index register value 1 Index register save area Z0 1 Z0 1 i Z0 Saved for scan execution type program 4 The ZO value is changed to 3 in the interrupt program Point To pass index register values from the interrupt fixed scan execution type program to the scan execution type program use word devices 266 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES b When High Speed Execution is selected 2 If data are written to the index register the values of the index register used in the scan execution type program will be corrupted at program switch
129. Function Module in the Project window pp Remark Showe uschil information 73 sg The mouse operation example is provided below For GX Works2 RE MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Unset Project PRG MAIN Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diaeno Menu bar XD Online gt Write to PLC Select Online on the menu bar and then select Write to PLC A window selected in the view selection area is displayed W Project window 5 gt Parameter lt gt PLC Parameter Select Project from the view selection area to open the Project window In the Project window expand Parameter and select PLC Parameter Global Device Comment E Program Setting E POU Program w MAIN E Local Device Comment Device Memory Device hitial Value LG Destination E Parameter Intelligent Function Module View selection area Unlabeled TERMS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms Term Description CPU module The abbreviation for the MELSEC L series CPU module Power supply module The abbreviation for the MELSEC L series power supply module Branch module The abbreviation for the MELSEC L series branch module Extension module The abbreviation for the MELSEC L series extension module END cover A cover to be attached to the right side of the rightmost MELSEC L series module Display un
130. Help Error History Occurrence Order Display Ascending 4 Status No Error Message Abbreviation Error Message Detail Year Month Da Time a Error History ICM OPE ERROR ICM OPE ERROR 2009 12 11 11 53 15 ICM OPE ERROR ICM OPE ERROR 2009 12 11 11 54 34 Clear History ICM OPE ERROR ICM OPE ERROR 2009 12 11 11 54 50 BATTERY ERROR BATTERY ERROR 2009 12 11 11 55 22 En PARAMETER ERROR PARAMETER ERROR 2009 12 11 11 56 58 Error Help PARAMETER ERROR PARAMETER ERROR 2009 12 11 11 57 11 NO END COVER NO END COVER 2009 12 11 11 57 57 Status Icon Legend ICM OPE ERROR ICM OPE ERROR 2009 12 11 11 58 8 Oia ICM OPE ERROR ICM OPE ERROR 2009 12 11 11 58 38 ICM OPE ERROR ICM OPE ERROR 2009 12 11 11 58 53 A Moderate Error ICM OPE ERROR ICM OPE ERROR 2009 12 11 11 59 0 A User Specified AC DC DOWN ACIDC DOWN 2009 12 11 12 0 44 BD minor Error AC DC DOWN ACIDC DOWN 2009 12 11 12 58 22 Stop Monitor Create CSV File Close Errors can also be checked by the display unit 27 Page 193 Section 4 2 1 Up to 100 module errors can be stored in the system memory 1 4 The memory is internally controlled by the system 2 Once the memory is full the oldest stored log is deleted to store a new log To clear the module error data click the Clear History button CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 4 CPU module operation at error detection When an error is detected by the self diagnostic funct
131. It is disabled to clear with latch clear Please do the clear by the program when the remote operation WordDevce K Words e e aceasta rete E ithe latch if recur mrimum ateh range e rm File Regisifer Extended Setting capacty 150 Kponts Following setting are available Device Latch 1 Latch 1 Latch 2 Latch 2 Device No Device No when select Use the Following file Sym Dg points tart End Start End Start End in file register setting of PLC file setting Fie Roster li 1000 O feriaz honoe of atch of fle register Exter register expanded link register of a part Extended tink W 16 o of file register area Indexing Setting for ZR Device 32Bit Indexing Usez z After 0 18 C Use zz 85 A E ra T lt 2 o 5 3 Effect on the scan time Data latch processing is performed during END processing therefore the scan time increases Consider the effect on the scan time when latching devices 2 gt 7 Page 315 Appendix 3 1 Point To reduce the scan time increase due to latch minimize the number of latch points latch 1 setting latch 2 setting and latch relay as much as possible by performing the following Move data to be latched to the file register Store device data that is less frequently updated in the standard ROM with the SP DEVST instruction The device data stored in the standard ROM can be read wi
132. L P100 Execution of subroutine p100 program ep ey a eal 1 x LINCP D0 J Subroutine program RET END L cal devi Local device Local devi ocal device area writing reading ocal device area for file name ABC for file name DEF b When SM776 is on File name DEF File name ABC Standby type program xo CALL P100 Y Execution of subroutine P100 X program Lo 1 x 8 INCP DO 1 gt Subroutine program D 1 i Local device 3 2 writing reading RET 7 2 END Local device area L Local device area for file name ABC for file name DEF c Precautions e When SM776 is on local device data area read out when a subroutine program is called and the data are saved after execution of the RET instruction Because of this the scan time is increased if one subroutine program is executed with SM776 set to on The on off status of SM776 is set for each CPU module It cannot be set for each file If the on off status of SM776 is changed during program execution control is implemented according to the information after the change 289 4 When executing an interrupt fixed scan execution type program The local device in the file where the interrupt fixed scan execution type program is stored can be used by ON OFF of SM777 1 1 The index register set as the local
133. LAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 4 2 2 Device clear Device memory values and file register values can be cleared with the display unit The device clear includes the following functions Device memory clear e File register clear Point Device clear can be executed while the CPU module is in the STOP or PAUSE status 1 Screen transition The following shows screen transition of device clear MENU SELECT CPU MON TES MENU gt CPU_MON TES DEV MON 1 Jea 9 eolIAed ZZY S9 JIOYUON NAO ZY 2 Devices whose value can be cleared a Device memory clear The following table shows devices whose value can be cleared by device memory clear Whether to clear the values of devices within latch range can be selected Type Device Bit device X DX Y DY M L B F SB V S T contact coil ST contact coil C contact coil FX FY FD D D extended data register W W extended link register SW Z RI ZR T current value ST current value C current value Word device 4 A value stored within latch range cannot be cleared b File register clear Only fire register R ZR values can be cleared by file register clear including extended data register D and extended link register W 201 3 Operating procedure Perform device clear by the following operation Device clear screen 1 Select DEVICE MEMORY or FILE REGISTER 21 gt CPU gt 4Y7 MENU gt CPU gt CLR
134. LC PLC Name i er ii Setting o Timer Limit Setting B Low Speed 100 ms lms H Low Speed 100 ms lms Sm BBB BBP AAA AA T High Speed T00 ms an gt High Speed 10 00 ms 0 01n cr Timer setting value lt lt Scan time Timer limit setting Timer setting value gt Scantime Timer limit setting 100ms x1 100ms 20ms 100ms 10 00ms x10 100ms 20ms 10ms The following show the examples of the coil and the contact being simultaneously turned on if the values are set to become Timer setting value lt Scan time Timer Limit Setting 247 1S 1 Jewl 0FZ9 SeolAed SN eulaju Z S Ex When the timer setting value is 1 1 x 100ms the scan time is 20ms and the timer limit setting is 100ms If the coil of the timer TO is turned on at the next scan after the values satisfy Count at execution of the END instruction Timer setting value the coil and the contact are simultaneously turned on because the values satisfy Timer current value Timer setting value at the start of the timer Timer setting value Timer setting value lt lt Scan time Timer Limit Setting 1x 100ms 20ms 100ms X0 K1 1 1 TO H END END a END A END Program 1 i T i 1 1 1 1 100ms i i a i counting 1 Count at l sa execution i i of the END o o DJ Lo instruction i i If the coil is turned on for
135. Latch relay D i 236 ECRU ceca d eh a been ate wa ood 18 LED control function 2000 156 LED indication priority 157 Level navigation 0000000 eee 191 Lighting period setting 227 Link register W i 254 Linkirelay B 5 00 02 pocas dla eae ieee eg 236 Link special register SW 255 Link special relay SB i 240 Local device 020 a a E a 286 Local device monitor test 119 Local pointer sica e a te 279 M Macro instruction argument device VD 282 Memeries qm ias Ped 30 Memory capacity i 38 Menu structure i 189 Methods for turning off the LEDS 156 Module access devices o ooo o o o o o 262 Module error collection function 158 Module model name read o o o o 168 Module monitor teSt o o o ooo o o ooo 218 Module refresh time o oo o o o o o o o 318 Module settings i 222 344 N Nesting N anaana ccc ee eee 277 Network parameter setting 312 O Online change files 140 Online change ladder mode 139 Online change from multiple programming tools 147 Option settings i 225 Other deVviees sn sn si 282 Output Visio sand rd e dre 235 Output mode at operating status change STOP to RUN da ala o as dr et A do 96 OVEMIOW a eee ee eee 284 P Parameter numbers i 292 Param
136. M 10 K MO to 116 x1 Latch relay L 10 K LO to 116 x1 Link relay B 16 K B0000 to 116 x1 Annunciator F 10 K FO to 16 x4 Link special relay SB 16 K SB0000 to 16 x1 Edge relay V 10 K VO to 16 x1 Step relay 1 10 8K 8192 SO to S8191 116 512 x1 Timer T 10 K TO to xE x2 Retentive timer ST 10 K STO to x H x2 Counter Cc 10 K COto x x2 Data register D 10 K DO to x1 Link register 16 K W0000to x1 Link special register SW 16 K SWO000 to x4 Total 29696 or less 1 2 3 342 The points are fixed for the system Cannot be changed The points for the step relay S can be changed to 0 Up to 32K points can be set for each device 60K for the internal relay and link relay Enter the values multiplied or divided by the number shown in the Size words column INDEX A A series CPU module compatibility setting 323 Acknowledge XY AssignMent 308 Annunciator F 000 a eee 237 B Backlight o 190 Backup data restorati0N 179 Backup to SD memory card 171 Batch transfer to the program memory 322 Battery oean Dra areas 18 Battery life prolonging function 185 BCD binary coded decimal 325 BIN binary code i 325 Boot file settinQ o ooooo 301 Boot operation i 73 Buffer memory monitor test
137. MITSUBISHI Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSECL MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals A series SS LO2CPU LO2CPU P OJD L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels WARNING and CAUTION WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions N CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under AN CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions WARNING O Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable controller Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or mal
138. Mode program Resume start MELSEC Q L Start Conditions 80034 Set the conditions for starting an SFC Autostart Block 0 Autostart Block 0 QnA program Do not Autostart Block 0 Programming Output Mode When the 8006 Set the output mode for the case of a Turn OFF Turn OFF Manual SFC Block is Stopped A block stop Keep ON 303 Appendix 1 2 8 Device Setting Number of points latch range and local device range are set for each device L Parameter Setting PLC Name PLC System PLC File PLCRAS Boot File Program SFC Device 1 O Assignment Built in Ethernet Port Setting Built in 1 O Function Setting Local Device Start Latch 1 Latch 2 Latch 2 Start Start Internal The total number of device points is up to 29 K words Latch 1 It is possible to clear with latch clear Latch 2 It is disabled to clear with latch clear Please do the clear by the program when the remote operation Scan time is extended by the latch range setting including L Tf the latch is necessary please set the required minimum latch range When using the local devices please do the file setting at PLC file setting parameter Device Total K Words Word Device 50 K Words Bit Device K Bits qi File Register Extended Setting Capacity 3 K Points Following setting are available Device Latch 1 Latch 1 Latch 2 Latch 2 Device No Device No when select
139. Monitor Testi is web idee fe ee ne 193 4 24 Device monitor test s irs aa ha hie a RAE ee E A oe TES 193 42 2 Device clear aia abad na aa aa daa e add da dea rhe 201 42 3 7 FOrCed On Off AS Sia Nee AA o 204 4 2 4 Scamtime Monitor ii i 207 42 5 Built in VO funcion Monitor s sir Or ee arsed 208 4 26 Error display clear se Cetema a ia a eer oa es 212 4 3 CPU Settings oi A tad 216 ASA DEIS SINO tii ele he ht as e ld es o od el a ad ds e 216 4 4 Module MonitorTest et 218 4 4 1 Buffer memory monitor test 7 218 45 Modul Settings vetar kaw ye et ey ad baal etl a 222 4 5 1 Initial setting change 7 222 4 6 User Messages i a Leaner a dan dane eee tee Obata 224 AT sOption Settings se nissai fy seeks ea oe tase a eas AAA hy nh da ees 225 474 banguagesetting ii GAR 225 4 7 2 Contrast adjustment sssi oh sn ces ateatha hi inad add aa tals 226 4 7 3 Lighting period setting 4 227 ATA Pop up display se A ate bc ies econ ech la oh th eh asda i Sacra dates 228 PART 3 DEVICES CONSTANTS CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 230 Sylt RA O ew a he i tn he ot ate Dawa aaa dele 230 5 2 Internal User Devices 0 232 Bde o A a eles 235 5 22 Output Y nade bias A A A E 235 5 23 Internal relay Mco cat a a ee armies atte wer ane ato aaa 236 5 24 Lateh telay Elo ici as A e Aa Na iio ae 236 525 Link relay B o A Ghd At dtd hy aa hh ee Seema 236 5 2 6 Annunciator F esis he eae eR ate eee di ee ae od ted Wee nee ie site teak 237
140. N STOP Changes the CPU module status to RUN or STOP without using switches Page 109 Section 3 13 1 Remote PAUSE Changes the CPU module status to PAUSE without using switches Outputs Y are held Page 111 Section 3 13 2 Remote RESET Resets the CPU module when it is in the STOP status without using switches Page 113 Section 3 13 3 Remote latch clear Clears latch data of the CPU module when the module is in the STOP status without using switches Page 114 Section 3 13 4 Scan time measurement Measures the execution time of the specified steps in a program Page 115 Section 3 14 Program list monitor Interrupt program list monitor Displays the scan time and execution status of the program being executed Displays the number of executions of an interrupt programs Page 117 Section 3 15 Page 118 Section 3 16 Device monitor test Monitors and or tests the local devices of the specified program Page 119 Section 3 17 External input output forced on off Forcibly turns on off the external input output of the CPU module Page 121 Section 3 18 Executional conditioned device test Changes a device value for the specified step of a program Page 124 Section 3 19 Sampling trace Continuously collects data of the specified device at a specified timing Page 132 Section 3 20 Online change ladder mode Writes programs while the CPU module is in the RU
141. N status Page 139 Section 3 21 1 Online change files Collectively writes files while the CPU module is in the RUN status Page 140 Section 3 21 2 Debug from multiple programming tools Enables simultaneous debugging from multiple programming tools Page 145 Section 3 22 Self diagnostic function Self diagnoses the CPU module to see whether an error exists or not Page 148 Section 3 23 Error clear Clears continuation errors by error type User can specify continuation errors to clear Page 153 Section 3 24 LED control function Sets the timing to turn off and indication of the LEDs located on the front of the CPU module Page 156 Section 3 25 Module error collection function Lists descriptions of errors occurred in the intelligent function module Page 158 Section 3 26 80 To the next page CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS Item Description Reference Latch data backup to standard ROM Backs up latch data such as device data and error history without using a battery Page 162 Section 3 27 Writing reading device data to from standard ROM Writes reads device data to from the standard ROM using an instruction Page 167 Section 3 28 Module model name read Reads the model name of a module connected Page 168 Section 3 29 CPU module change function with SD memory card Saves the data in a CPU module to an SD memory card when
142. P B A M E4EO a E R e E E B E E XX E BF B EAFO E F 3 KR RX Y J E Mm B R E E540 E M E 4 E A 2 FH E E K A B E550 A E E E KC R mE g se ea E Ma E560 Bm WM E E E 8 E RE E BH SM B E570 aA E a ea aC E580 gg E A k AD AE BR SE E R BA g m E590 Bo th A 2 1 A A 8 B E E w E A R E5AO ey E E E ww zZ E amp E FF E E E E B E5BO E E E m E E E E E Ft E B B E B g E5C0 a 8 E a A tf DD amp amp f 8 E EX E E5DO A E E fH AR CL E A 40 RR FB e CR te E5E0 i oc E E RF 4 A fF E E fF CR E5FO a BE E tt E E E E640 E tf a XX RF Hk RR MA wi E650 3 a 51 E Mm Al A fe fh o zo 5 E660 E TM a A i E a 5 MM He Rw E670 5 a mM Hi 554 dl E E R Ga R GR GR E680 i R E Go 2 M R a E R im E RB M E690 E 3 j R m mM m E f E E EGAO E Z HB ht ff B E im i a E BK E E6BO mn E E z A 3 3 3 3 32 REEK E6CO i R E B amp BS A HH RR B B amp B R B BAB B R E6DO E E E EY m E E HN Mm a Am mz a EGEO E y Y HE HE mm RK hk mm E R KR e E6F0 W oR GR E R B M amp R B B 9 E740 E E EE R Mi E hk BP EF E FB D E750 D E 4 E E 8 amp KH B amp B 8B e B amp B K O E760 ye 8 jf E 4 HH y E E TH E E E770 ES E E E E E E E so 5 e E780 Ff F E c um us A Es 2 E790 E aA CE E 2 KR EE B F TF H B gt E7AO BRE 2 E am
143. Phone 40 0 21 430 40 06 ax 27 0 Fax 48 0 12 63047 01 Fax a 36 940 03 ni l Fax 40 pa 1430 40 02 UN EL EC EO Russia AutoCont CS s r o ZECH REPUBLIC INEA RBT d 0 0 ERBIA 52 bid 3 Kosmodamiansk haf Technologick 374 6 Izletnicka 10 R 054 Mo amlanskaya Nab 6 Noor CZ 708 00 Ostrava Pustkovec SER 113000 Smederevo ade ih Phone 420 595 691 150 Phone 381 0 26 615 401 E Rete Fax wan 595691 se 381 0 26 615 401 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V SPAIN ra DENMARK Fred ai LOVAKIA ro E DK 4000 Roskilde SK 911 01 Trenc n AMO Sai Cugat del Vall s Barcelona Phone 45 0 46 75 76 66 Phone 421 0 32 743 0472 Phone 902 131121 34935653131 DA Se Fax 34 935891579 re jer a Eesti OU ESTONIA ane pol sr o Pre ov SLOVAKIA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V SAS iinn ey faa A UK Brondi a Phone 372 0 6 518140 Phone 421 0 51 7580 611 UK Hatfield Herts ALTO 8XB Fax 372 06 1518149 Fax 421 0 51 7580 650 Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND INEA RBT d o o SLOVENIA anne Eo Pis vila z Jubijana e oaie CORPORATION JAPAN phone 358 0 207 463 540 Phone 386 0 1 513 8116 ICE Ower f Fax 358 0 207 463 541 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 UTECO GREECE Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN Phone 81 3 622 160 60 5 Mavrogenous Str Box 426 dol L624 18073 Pr mer a30211 1206 900 lote erry 35 86 00 one one MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION Inc USA Fay 439 21
144. RET instruction eI Main routine lt program i Indicates the end 1 _ of the main routine m FEND J program 0 Interrupt HA program 10 lt c TIRT 129 Interrupt 7 program 129 lt TIRET END Interrupt pointer The interrupt pointer number IO varies depending on the interrupt factor gt Page 281 Section 5 11 When an interrupt factor occurs an interrupt program of the interrupt pointer number corresponding to that factor is executed Interrupt program are executed only after the corresponding interrupt factor occurs An interrupt factor for An interrupt factor for 10 occurred interrupt program 129 occurred Main routine Execution Execution Execution program Interrupt 8 Execution program 10 IRET Interrupt Execution program 129 IRET gt Time 54 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 1 Creating an interrupt program Create interrupt programs between the FEND and END instructions in the main routine program Before executing any of interrupt programs of l0 to 115 123 to 131 or 150 to 1255 allow an interrupt by the El instruction Program A Main routine program A FEND m HA 010 IRET 132 Interrupt m y program 1 c RET J 128 4 Y12 m IRET J c TEND Interrupt pointer 2 Pal The pointer numbers do not need to be specified in ascending order
145. ROR FILE OPE ERROR REMOTE PASS FAIL SNTP OPE ERROR DISPLAY ERROR OPERATION ERROR PRG TIME OVER F Annunciator Empty Empty Empty SD82 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 Li All empty N Remove the error cause of the continuation error e In SD84 and SD85 specify the continuation errors to clear The bit patterns specified in SD84 and SD85 are same as those in SD81 and SD82 4 Turn off and on SM84 5 In SD81 and SD82 check that the bits corresponding to the cleared errors are off Point Errors can also be cleared by storing the error code of the error to be cleared in SD50 and turning SM50 from off to on In this method however errors cannot be cleared by error type 3 Status after error clear When the CPU module is recovered from an error SM SD and the LED that are relevant to the error return to the status before the error If the same error occurs after clearing the error the error is registered to the error history again 4 Precautions The error code that the user did not desire to clear may be cleared if its error message is the same regardless of its error code To clear multiple annunciators perform error clear operation as the same time as the number of annunciators that are on 155 JeelD JOU ze 3 25 LED Control Function Whether to turn off the LED after an error and whether to indicate an error or not on of
146. Status Icon Legend User specified gt Minor Error Select an error to clear check all that apply CD 1 Errors that can be cleared X Only the errors shown below can be cleared 3 SP UNIT DOWN AC DC DOWN e BATTERY ERROR 9 FLASH ROM ERROR SP UNIT ERROR e ICM OPE ERROR FILE OPE ERROR e REMOTE PASS FAIL e SNTP OPE ERROR e DISPLAY ERROR OPERATION ERROR PRG TIME OVER e F Annunciator 2 Clearing errors To clear errors by error type use any of the following e Programming tool SM and SD Display unit 153 a Programming tool Perform the following procedure ETE a 1 Onthe PLC Diagnostics dialog box check the i Ea os continuation errors that have been detected ii Model Name Toneration Status Swtch RUN RUN Lzscuer The function menus extended From the PLC image Error Information Error Information Cortinuation Error Information PLC Status Information Current Error Ana oia Eror June 4100 OPERATION ERROR umn OPERATION ERROR a PODRE 1 8 4 hd A Error Clear Eror Hep Error Hstory Occurrence Order Display Ascending gt Error Message abbreviation Error Messaqe Dstal TYearihonhipay Tine Enor History ERROR ICM OPE ERROR 200 E ICM OPE ERROR 2009 12 11 ICM OPE ERROR 2009 12 11 BATTERY FRROR BATTERY FRROF 2009 12 11 PARAMETER ERROR 2009 12 11 2009 12 11 SAA 2009 12 11 Status IconLegend
147. T DOWN i Off O error 1 function module dedicated Continue 4 On O O instruction Execution of the END instruction BUS a a ai Fanci System b UNIT BUS St Off Flashi ee ERR Execution of the intelligent id asning O O SYSTEM RST oo dedicated ERR Always Powered on END COVER End cover error ERR Execution of END processing Stop Off Flashing O O i Always Momentary power failure AC DC DOWN Always Continue On Off O FLASH ROM de a Flash ROM error ERROR Writing to ROM Continue On On O O 150 To the next page CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS O Self diagnostics is performed x Self diagnostics is not performed CPU LED status L26CPU Diagnostics Enor Diagnostic timin module puis ee J message E 9 RUN ERR LO2CPU P L26CPU status PBT UNIT BAD Execution of the END Flashing Module verification CONNECT Astr cilo Stop Off On On O O Intelligent function module SP UNIT LAY Power on reset b St Off Flash assignment error ERR Switching from STOP to RUN op asang O O Intelligent module program E ti f the FROM TO Stop Flashing 9 ds SPUNITERROR on ol ine En OfflOn 9 O O execution error 1 instructions Continue On Intelligent function module SP UNIT Version amor VER ERR Power on reset Stop off Flashing O O Power on reset END cover is not attached NO END COVER Execution of the END Stop Off Fl
148. T operation e Using a programming tool By an external device using the MC protocol Before performing the remote RESET operation select the Allow checkbox for the remote RESET operation in the PLC System tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box and then write the parameter setting to the CPU module Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System Remote Reset Select this checkbox before gt Y iiw performing remote RESET Esad a Using a programming tool Open the Remote Operation dialog box O Online gt Remote Operation Select RESET for execution LASAY 90W9y EELE uonyelado ajoway l b By an external device using the MC protocol Use MC protocol commands MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 2 Status after reset processing When the remote RESET operation is completed the CPU module will be placed in the operating status set by the switch Consider the operating status of the CPU module after the reset operation ifthe CPU module had stopped due to an error 3 Precautions Note that the CPU module may not be reset by the remote RESET operation due to noise In this case reset the CPU module using the switch or power off and then on the CPU module 113 3 1 3 4 Remote Latch Clear This function resets the device data when the CPU module is in the STOP status 1 This operation is useful when e
149. TSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V EUROPE GEVA AUSTRIA ALFATRADE Ltd MALTA TOO Kazpromavtomatika KAZAKHSTAN German Branch Wiener StraBe 89 99 Paola Hill Ul Zhambyla 28 Gothaer Stra e 8 AT 2500 Baden Malta Paola PLA 1702 KAZ 100017 Karaganda D 40880 Ratingen Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Phone 356 0 21 697 816 Phone 7 7212 50 10 00 Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 Fax 356 0 21 697 817 Fax 7 7212 50 1150 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 TECHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS srl MOLDOVA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V orgsl CZECH REP Oktyabrskaya 19 Off 705 bld Traian 23 1 Czech Branch BY 220030 Minsk MD 2060 Kishinev Avenir Business Park Radlick 714 113a Phone 375 0 17 210 46 26 Phone 373 0 22 66 4242 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES CZ 158 00 Praha 5 Fax 375 0 17 210 46 26 Fax 373 0 22 66 4280 ANACAN ISRAEL Phone t420 513TA ESCO DRIVES amp AUTOMATION BELGIUM HIFLEX AUTOM TECHNIEKB V NETHERLANDS 24 Shenkar St Kiryat Arie aX PIU Ae Culliganlaan 3 Wolweverstraat 22 1L 49001 Petah Tiqva MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V FRANCE BE 1831 Diegem NL 2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone 972 0 3 922 18 24 French Branch Phone 32 0 2 717 64 30 Phone 31 0 180 46 6004 Fax 972 0 3 924 0761 25 Boulevard des Bouvets Fax 32 0 2 717 64 31 Fax 31 0 180 44 23 55 GEE UTE ET Rata anore Calar in Koning amp Hartman b v BELGIUM Koning amp Hartman b v NETHERLANDS 1 H aomanut Street F 0 l H 685757 Wo
150. U PBT 5 7 us 6 1 us Instruction execution time The instruction execution time is a total of the time required for all instructions used in the program to be executed and a and B described in the following page For execution time of instructions refer to the following MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction APPENDICES a Overhead time at execution of interrupt and fixed scan execution type programs When using an interrupt or fixed scan execution type program add the overhead time given in the following table Two kinds of overhead time pre start and program end need to be added to interrupt programs Pre start overhead time for interrupt programs Interrupt from the E 3 Interrupt from the intelligent A Fixed scan interrupt built in I O function module PU modul 128 to 131 CPU module ISS 128 to 131 150 to 1127 Without high With high Without high With high Without high With high speed start speed start speed start speed start speed start speed start LO2CPU LO2CPU P 57 0 us 19 0 us 51 0 us 17 0 us 66 0 us 31 0 us L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 54 0 us 18 0 us 46 0 us 16 0 us 61 0 us 26 0 us Program end overhead time for interrupt programs CPU module Without high speed start With high speed start LO2CPU LO2CPU P 28 0 us 9 0 us L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 26 0 us 8 5 us Overhead time for fixed scan execution type
151. U module is powered off and then on or the CPU module is reset Whether to restore data once after backup or per above operation can be set by on off of SM676 Status of SM676 Restoration operation SM676 is OFF Data are restored once when the CPU module is powered off and then on or is reset after backup SM676 is ON Data are restored whenever the CPU module is powered off and then on or is reset after backup Data are repeatedly restored until the backup data are deleted or the latch data are backed up next time After backup data are restored the BAT LED on the CPU module turns on green for five seconds Point If the number of device points at the time of parameter configuration are different from those at backup RESTORE ERROR error code 2220 is detected upon restoration and the restoration cannot be completed Restoration is performed again when the CPU module is powered off and then on or is reset the next time To complete the restoration perform any of the following operations Set the parameters back to the configuration before backup Delete the backup data Back up the data again 166 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 28 Writing Reading Device Data to from Standard ROM This function writes device data to the standard ROM Writing the fixed values for operation and operation results to the standard ROM can prevent losing data due to low battery The data written to the sta
152. UNIT FUNCTIONS 6 Buffer memory monitor The start I O No buffer memory address display format buffer memory value and bit status of the buffer memory value of the specified module can be monitored Start MO number of a module to be monitored A buffer memory address to be monitored can be changed by 1 word with the A and W buttons Display format Buffer memory value Bit position counted from the specified buffer memory address On off status of bits ON OFF _ Point The description of displayed items is the same as that of the device monitor lt _ 7 Page 197 Section 4 2 1 5 7 Buffer memory test A buffer memory value can be changed Buffer memory monitor screen 1 Press the button Buffer memory test value check screen 2 Select the target address using the A and y buttons and press the button The cursor moves to the buffer memory value Increase or decrease the value using the A and y buttons 3 Pressing the button will update the value set in buffer memory test Point Since the value displayed in the buffer memory test value check screen is used for testing if the relevant buffer memory is being used in a program the displayed value may differ from the one set in the buffer memory test screen 221 sayJoyuou oww yng yy 159 LOPUN SINPON Y y 4 5 Module Settings Values set to intelligent function modules can be che
153. a memory open the Format PLC Memory dialog box In this chapter a program memory is formatted so that a program can be written to it XO Online gt PLC Memory Operation gt Format PLC Memory Format PLC Memory Connection Channel List Connection Interface 56 lt gt PLC Module Target PLC 1 Station No Host PLC Type Loz Target Memory Program Memory Device Memory Format Type f Do not create a user setting system area the required system area only Create a user setting system area To check the capacity of the memory after formatting open the Online Data Operation dialog box 25 oww e Bunjeuloy 9 slnpoN ndo edl ollosfolde 6unuN SL 1 5 2 Writing to the CPU module Open the Online Data Operation dialog box In this chapter a project is written to the program memory XZ Online lt gt Write to PLC 2 Selecting this will automatically select 1 Select the program memory the parameter and program checkboxes Online Data Operation Connection Channel Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image Write C Verify C Delete PLC Module f inteligent Function Module Title 1 13 Edit Data lect All Cancel All Selections z Module Name Data Name Title Target Detail Last Change arget Memory Su l l Ha I J ES g Detail JAMAN E 2009 12 14 10 01 33 DD PLC Network Remote Password Switch Setting Ba Comme yw 2240 Bytes
154. ab e Intelligent function module error 27 Page 98 Section 3 9 O Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt I O Assignment gt Detailed Setting 5 Error check options Whether to check the following errors can be selected All the items are selected by default Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC RAS e Carry Out Battery Check Check Device Range at Indexing 149 6 Self diagnostics list O Self diagnostics is performed x Self diagnostics is not performed Hardware failure CPU LED status L26CPU Diagnostics sue Diagnostic timin module acia pr E message g 9 RUN ERR LO2CPU P L26CPU status PBT CPU UNIT CPU error DOWN e Always Stop Off Flashing O O END instruction not END NOT Execution of the END executed EXECUTE instruction Stop oF Flashing O O SFC program execution SFCP END i oror ERROR Execution of a SFC program Stop Off Flashing O O RAM check RAM ERROR e Power on reset Stop Off Flashing O O Power on reset OPE CIRCUIT Operation circuit check ERR Execution of the END Stop Off Flashing O O j instruction 1 0 interrupt error IO INT ERROR Occurrence of an interrupt Stop Off Flashing O O LAN CTRL A LAN controller failure DOWN Power on reset Stop Off Flashing x x e Power on reset Execution of the FROM TO instructions Intelligent function module e Execution of the intelligent Stop Flashing SP UNI
155. ages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in pro
156. al BCD binary coded decimal 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 10 2 2 10 11 3 3 11 4 4 5 5 6 7 7 8 8 1001 9 9 1001 1010 10 A 1 0000 1011 11 B 1 0001 1100 12 C 1 0010 1101 13 D 1 0011 1110 14 E 1 0100 1111 15 F 1 0101 1 0000 16 10 1 0110 1 0001 17 11 1 0111 10 1111 47 2F 100 0111 0111 1111 1111 1110 32766 7FFE 0111 1111 1111 1111 32767 7FFF 1000 0000 0000 0000 32768 8000 1000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0001 32767 8001 1000 0000 0000 0001 1111 1111 1111 1110 2 FFFE 1111 1111 1111 1111 1 FFFF 326 APPENDICES Appendix 9 Character Codes Available in the Display Unit The following chart shows character codes available in the display unit 0 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 B C D E F 0000 NULL 00104 00204 H amp C 3 o 00304 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lt gt 00404 A B C D E F G H l J K L M N 0 00504 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Y i _ 0060 a b C d e f g h j k m n 0 0070H p q r s t u v w x y z 0080 1 j 00A0H E 3 7 4 5 r x l 00B0 4 7 I t h 4 7 y y A t 00C0H 5 f Y 7 bo 4 n 7 7 00D0H 2 t Y 1 El 7 0 Y 0 7 7 00FOH 1 1 0081H to OO9F and 00E0y to OOFC are recognized as upper bits of the Shift JIS code The parts in the tables on the following pages are out of the Shift JIS code range The Shift JIS code range is 81y to 9F y and E0y to FC for upper bi
157. alay 41 97Z sindino pue slndul jo 6ulsseoojd 9z 2 6 2 Direct processing 1 Outline of the processing Data input and output are performed using a direct access input DX or direct access output DY 52 CPU module CPU operation processing area gt Programming 1 tool input 4 Input X area device 1 Dxo memory Input module H HE 1 3 General purpose 5 input Output Y 1 DY20 device E ea 6 memory 2 General purpose Y output AA Output module O 1 Data in the programming tool input area can be turned on or off by the following 2 Test operation of a programming tool Writing data from a network module e Writing data from an external device using the MC protocol e Writing data using the simple PLC communication function Data in the output Y device memory can be turned on or off by the following operation Test operation of a programming tool e Writing data to a program Writing data from a network module e Writing data from an external device using the MC protocol e Writing data using the simple PLC communication function Item Description Execution of an input contact instruction The OR processing is performed between the input information of the input module 1 and the input data of the programming tool 2 or general purpose input
158. alog box D Online gt Password Keyword gt New 1 Create Change Password Create or change passwords for data in the programmable controller Passwords can be set for each of the same name files stored in different drives Target Data Target Memory Aa y Read Prote Write Protection Data Type Data Name Fa Program Parameter Input Password Create password for the selected file After setting a password for PLC in the PLC the password is required when reading PLC on the PLC or writing to the PLC Registration Condition Read Protection Write Protection Y Use the same password for read protectionfwrite protection New Password Read Protection Aaa Re enter Password Read Protection Ekok New Password Write Protection Re enter Password Write Protection EEEE Explanation of Registration Conditions Registration Conditions Read protection Write protection Read protection Write protection Valid Characters Use 4 to 32 single byte characters numeric characters alphabets A Z and a z single byte blanks and 8 1 lt gt 7 _ l Passwords are case sensitive Create Change Password Create or change passwords for data in the programmable controller Passwords can be set for each of the same name files stored in different drives Target Data Target Memory Program Memory Device Memory
159. ampling trace file size 1 This is the size when the default device assignment is set The size increases or decreases depending on the parameter setting 2 Storage files are created only when data in the file register extended data register D and extended link register W are backed up 3 Storage files are created only when the trace registration has been made 4 For the CPU module whose serial number first five digits is 12112 or later the file size will be 99098 bytes 5 For the CPU module whose serial number first five digits is 12112 or later the file size will be 122778 bytes 162 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 27 1 Latch data backup The following two methods are available for backing up latch data to the standard ROM e By contacts By remote operation 1 Execution by contacts a Setting method Configure the setting for Latch Data Backup Operation Valid Contact The devices applicable to a contact are X M and B Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System Latch Data Backup Operation Valid Contact Seta contact 3 Device Name x ji0 X0 X1FFF b Execution method Backup starts at the rise of a contact off gt on After backup the BAT LED of the CPU module flashes green indicating that the CPU module is in the standby status ready to be powered off The execution status of backup operation can be checked by SM671 or SD67
160. andard RAM drive 3 All drives are backed up Standard ROM drive 4 Format memory card before Select whether to format the SD memory card Format backup before backup Not format Not format Current time is set at a title to append to the backup data stored 35 chatacters Example If data are backed up at in the SD memory card 12 p m on October 1 2008 20081001200 is set pleg Aioway GS ym uoyouny aBueyo NPON Ndo 0 Title Setting 4 The CPU module enters the STOP status at the rise of the backup start setup contact the backup start contact cannot be turned on in the program 2 The backup start setup contact and backup start contact cannot be set to the same device 3 This indicates the default number of points The setting range when the internal user device is set to the maximum number of points 60K points is M 0 to 61439 and B 0 to OEFFF 4 If data to be backed up is deselected in Backup Target Data only device data and system data are backed up 5 Title is used for identifying backup data Settings for the title of the backup data stored in an SD memory card can be checked on the Online Data Operation dialog box with the Delete radio button selected 173 Turn on the backup start setup contact and then the backup start contact Data are not backed up when only the backup start contact is on Turn on the backup start setup contact Preparatio
161. andard Standard File name and SD memory card i t Memory RAM ROM extension File type 3 Remarks any given name Drive 0 Drive 3 Drive 4 Drive 2 oe for Parameter O x O O PARAM QPA One file per drive Intelligent function module One data per i O x O O IPARAM QPA dri parameters rive Program O x O O OPG Device comment O x O O QCD Initial device value O x O O QDI File register x Oo x x QDR One fil Local device x 0 x x QDL eal module Sampling trace x o x x QTD PLC user data X x O O CSV BIN Source information simple project O x O O SRCINFOM C32 Source information structured mae O x O O 56 project Drive heading O x O O QN DAT Device data storage file x x O x DEVSTORE QST Module error collection file x o x x IERRLOG QIE Data logging setting file x x LOGCOM QLG 9 9 a LOG01 to 10 QLG Data logging file x x o O CSV Menu definition file x x O O MENUDEF QDF 1 Store parameters PARAM QPA and intelligent function module parameters IPARAM QPA in the same drive Otherwise the intelligent function module parameters are invalid 2 Only one file can be stored 3 This drive cannot be selected as a storage file by the data logging function To write data to this drive perform Write PLC User Data 4 The data in which the information of label program configuration is stored 11 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 5 F
162. ase a bit device value in increments of 10 bits decimal notation or 16 bits hexadecimal notation and will increase a A Up arrow button word device value in increments of 10 words decimal notation or 16 words hexadecimal notation e Device monitor test e Buffer memory monitor test Moves the cursor down scrolls the screen down and decreases values In the following screens pressing a device longer will increase a bit device value in increments of 10 bits decimal notation or 16 bits hexadecimal notation and will Down arrow button increase a word device value in increments of 10 words decimal notation or 16 y words hexadecimal notation Device monitor test Buffer memory monitor test gt Right arrow button Moves the cursor forward and switches screens lt Left arrow button Moves the cursor back and switches screens OK button Switches screens executes functions and accepts selection Returns the display to the previously displayed screen or the initial screen for each function Q ESC button 188 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 2 Menu structure Functions can be selected in the function selection screen MENU SELECT CPU M In screen figures the Japanese version is shown on the left and the English version on the right Switch a displayed language by language setting 27 Page 225 Section 4 7 1 The menu structure is as shown below
163. ased on relative step No Personal computer A Personal computer B Programming tool Programming tool 1 Online change based on relative step No Open the Options dialog box XZ Tool gt Options Options Unset Project Operational Setting Project Automatic Save Change Histor Program Eaton Selecting this will execute Deve COREA Relative step No by pointer Parameter Monitor PLC Read Write Online Change Intelligent Function Module Execute Fall instruction Explanation Select whether to execute online change based on relative step No from pointer Even if real step No is different online change is available as long as relative step No from the pointer is corresponding Back to System Default Set as User Default Cancel Display the program including the specified pointer and write the changed program during RUN Precautions for online change from multiple programming tools are the same as those for standard online change L gt Page 141 Section 3 21 3 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeaeaegeeaeaeeeaeaeeeeaeaeeeaaeeeeeeegeg eg e 147 sjoo 6uluweJ6oud ajdiy nu wou e6ueuyo eulluO ZZZ8 amp slool 6uluwueJ6ojd 9IdnINW wo 6nqed ZzZ8 amp 3 23 Self Diagnostic Function 148 This function allows the CPU module to diagnose itself to check for errors This function aims to preventive measures and prevention of malfunction of the CPU module 1 Self diagnostic tim
164. ashing O O instruction Execution of the END SYSTEM LAY instr ctio ERR Power on reset Stop Off Flashing O O ss No parameter MISSING PARA Poweron reset Sto off Flashin error P Switching from STOP to RUN P 9 Boot error BOOT ERROR Power on reset Stop Off Flashing RESTORE Backup error ERROR Power on reset Stop Off Flashing O O Memory card operation ICM OPE Insertion removal of the Stop ofon Flashing error ERROR memory card Continue On FILE SET Poweron reset File setting error Writing to programmable Stop Off Flashing O O ERROR controller a FILE OPE Stop Flashing i 1 File access error ERROR Instruction execution Continue Off On On O O Instruction execution CAN T EXEPRG Power on reset Sto Off Flashin O O disabled ERAS Switching from STOP to RUN E 7 Power on reset PARAMETER Switching from STOP to RUN P t tti heck St Off Flashi Ee Ke on ERROR Writing to programmable Pp st O O controller P t a i ae Switching from STOP to RUN SFC parameter error PARA ERROR Writing to programmable Stop Off Flashing O O controller Intelligent function module SP PARA P on reset St Off Flashi parameter error ERROR ONS Oe op asang O O REMOTE Power on reset P d St Off Flashi opener PASS ERR Switching from STOP to RUN ap silo O O Instruction code check E i pr to RUN Sto Off Flashin CODE ERR E j O O Instruction execution MISSING END Power on reset No END instructi St Off Flashi CNO INS S
165. ata and suspends the operation processing The CPU module however continues measurement in the timer device and holds the output status When resume start is specified for the SFC program data in the system is saved e The CPU module restarts its operation processing Even if operation processing is suspended due to a momentary power failure the CPU module continues the measurement of the watchdog timer WDT Ex When the WDT setting of PLC parameter is 200ms and the scan time is 190ms if a momentary power failure occurs for 15ms WDT ERROR occurs Instantaneous power failure occurred Power recovery ENDO d ENDO END A The CPU module suspends its program operation 2 When a momentary power failure occurs for a period longer than the allowable power failure time The CPU module starts its operations initially and the operation processing will be the same as that when either of the following is performed e Powering off and then on the CPU module e Resetting the CPU modul 48 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 2 6 Processing of Inputs and Outputs The CPU module can batch access the general purpose 1 0 I O modules and intelligent function modules before program operation refresh processing Note that I O processing can be performed upon execution of an instruction by using a direct access device in the program direct processing Compared to the refresh processing data acquisition is faster in direct proc
166. ater is operated 4 To perform online change to one file from multiple programming tools refer to _ Page 147 Section 3 22 2 9 The one in execution and the one intended later are different functions these functions can be simultaneously performed The one in execution and the one intended later are the same function the later one is not executed 6 If the condition other than for step No is set as a trace point or trigger point these functions can be performed simultaneously If a trace point or trigger point is specified for the step No the one in execution stops and the one intended later is performed 7 The functions cannot be simultaneously performed in the following cases In any of the following cases the function in execution stops and another function intended later is operated The data to be changed online includes the registration of an executional conditioned device test When adding a ladder block by online change registration of an executional conditioned device test is included in the ladder block immediately after the one where the ladder block is to be added The program to be changed online includes registration of an executional conditioned device test sjoo 6ulwuwueJ6ojd ajdr ny wos 6nqed zz e 145 3 22 1 Simultaneous monitoring from multiple programming tools Creating a user setting system area allows high speed monitoring from multiple programming tools Setting a monitoring file for the host s
167. ation device n I O No gt Instruction name gt O No specification instruction For details on the intelligent function module dedicated instructions refer to the following Manual for the intelligent function module used 5 12 3 Macro instruction argument device VD The macro instruction argument device VD is used with ladders registered as macros When a VDO setting is specified the value is converted to the specified device when the macro instruction is executed With the macro instruction argument device VDO to VD9 can be used in one macro registration ladder Among the devices used in the ladders registered as macros specify a device used for VD When using macro instructions in the program specify devices that correspond to the macro instruction argument devices used in the macro registration ladders in ascending order Ladder registered as a macro Program registration name MAX MMAX DO D1 RO gt yoo vot MOV VDO VD2 ea gt veo ypj mov vs vh Passing to VD2 Passing to VD1 Passing to VDO lt voo vw vov vol vzh Command with the name of the ladder registered as a macro Program that actually runs in the CPU module H gt Do p mov Do Ro H lt po pi mov D1 Ro 282 CHAPTER 6 CONSTANTS CHAPTER 6 CONSTANTS The following constants can be used in the CPU module Decimal constant K e Hexadecimal constant H Real number E
168. ayed up to 5 two byte characters 11 one byte characters Point y y _ O ifa device comment file is changed while the device comment is displayed the device comment is updated when the screen transitions O When several device comment files are used the device comment in the device comment file used when the screen changes to the device monitor screen is displayed 196 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 5 Device monitor A device specified in 3 in this section can be monitored from the device monitor screen Point Depending on update timing of a screen the update of a value displayed in the device monitor screen may delay accordingly a Monitoring a bit device display format 16 bit integer The specified device and display format a value and bit status of the specified device can be monitored The device number can be changed by 1 word 16 bits with the AX and W 2 buttons 0 Display format 7 1H lt Device value Bit position counted from the specified device 3 On off status of bits ON E OFF 1 When a bit device is specified within one word from the start number of the bit device the specified device number will be changed to the start number Ex x1 to XF gt Xo 2 When a bit device is specified within one word from the last number of the bit device the specified device number will be changed to the last number Ex
169. cards doing so may result in data corruption Stop accessing to an SD memory card and then power off or reset the CPU module All of SD memory card operations can be disabled by SM606 SD memory card forced disable instruction For the forced disablement of SD card refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection b Simultaneous writing to the same file from multiple programming tools While a file is being written accessing the file from another programming tool is not allowed Also while a file is being accessed writing data to the file from another programming tool is not allowed To write data to the same file from multiple programming tools perform one by one c Simultaneous accessing to different files from multiple programming tools Up to ten different files in a CPU module can be simultaneously accessed from multiple programming tools sold ELZ Sell pue seuouelN Lz 35 2 File size The size of a file used in the CPU module depends on the file type Calculate the rough size of each file referring to the following table File type File size Unit bytes Default LO2CPU LO2CPU P 2936 can be increased by parameter setting L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 2964 can be increased by parameter setting 1 Reference Parameter Boot setting gt 84 18 x number of files 2 e With CC Link setting fo MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User s Ma
170. cations se temperature control module ings and troubleshooting of the 10 Memo 11 CONTENTS 12 SAFET PRE CAUT ONS E E E a IN Vo 1 CONDITIONS ORUSEFORTHE PRODUCHES nye et reree seo mas eee cere a ee pe Ro ore i INTRODUCTIONS ar sais pa bette O siames ed 8 RELEVANTIMANUAIES oD a ety ee annie os iN aeRO SC ti dd MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION sees srs ot segs ee ie Des Siege 17 MER CE We ee Od e a le are se ae 18 PART 1 PROGRAMMING CHAPTER 1 BASIC PROCEDURE FOR PROGRAMMING 20 1 1 System Configuration Example i 21 1 2 Creating a Projeti suia a ee oe evade ea ee AE E E ob a 3G 22 13 Creating aiProgran ss os ea le A a o EE 23 1 3 1 Prior knowledge for creating a prograM oooooooocccccococna 23 1 3 2 How to create a program osia ciesa eina ea a Pi nA E a E a EE eee aes 24 1 4 Converting a Program 0 6c ees 24 15 Writing a Project to the CPU Module 4 25 1 5 1 Formatting amemo er ee a i n a teen eee eee 25 1 5 2 Writing to the CPU module rr 26 1 6 Checking an Operation of the CPU Module i 27 TT SAVIO a Prolects aa a shot 29 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 30 2 4 Memories and Files es e dt 30 E O A rates bat aun ate vee Gre ashes ay cape att cnet more ccd maha htc ee ge See aE 30 2 1 2 Parameter valid drive 2 eee e eee 33 22153 34 2 2 OiNumbers se De se tee bd hee denon eles ee lt A td at 39 2 2 1 Concept of I O number assignment ooo 39 2 2 2 WO number assignment c
171. ceed the refresh ranges of network modules or the auto refresh ranges of intelligent function modules If a new device point setting exceeds the corresponding device range the data may be written to another device or an error may occur 2 When latching a device consider the increase in the scan time because the scan time increases L gt Page 315 Appendix 3 1 3 The points for the step relay S can be changed to 0 4 For an internal relay and link relay the maximum number of points can be set up to 60K 305 J9lawWeJed Old Z xipueddy Buas JelewueJed xipueddy Appendix 1 2 9 I O Assignment Setting The connecting status of each module in the system is set L Parameter Setting PLC Name PLc System Puc File Puc RAS Boot File Program sFc Device I O Assignment Buit in Ethernet Port Setting Built in IO Function Setting I O Assignment Model Name Points StartXxY XY o fac FP a fac Em TJO Function v mn D ze Built in CC Link a oeo Ent 2 2 6 farsa Assigning the I O address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will mot cause an error to occur Power Model Name Switch Setting Detailed Setting En Moltiple i Read PLC Data Print Window Print Window Preview Acknowledge XY Assignment Default Check Cancel Parameter E i Item N
172. ch in the RUN position PAUSE status is a status where program operations in the CPU module are stopped holding the status on or off of all outputs Y This operation is useful especially during the process control to hold the on status of outputs Y even after the operating status of the CPU module is switched from RUN to STOP 1 Executing method There are three methods for performing the remote PAUSE operation e Using a PAUSE contact e Using a programming tool By an external device using the MC protocol a Using a PAUSE contact Set a PAUSE contact Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System RUN PAUSE Contacts RUN Xx X0 X1FFF Set a device used as a contact PAUSE X o X0 X1FFF Turning off the PAUSE contact or SM206 will exit the PAUSE status and restart program OO operation from step 0 3 T N p3 0 END END gt END po on 9 END 0 0 23 aa oo oO Set PAUSE contact OFF K vg kolz 2s ON el Co SS oO e OFF m3 PAUSE enable coil SM206 q 7 ON np _ me PAUSE contact M204 OFF a ale E i PAUSE status 1 A i Co RUN PAUSE status RUN IX PAUSE RUN AS X Turns on at execution of the END CPU module enters the PAUSE status and processing in the scan where set stops operation when an operation is processed up PAUSE contact and SM206 turn on to t
173. ch as CALL P FCALL P from a main routine program Program A Main routine program fre Ho Subroutine program 1 cc RET Ho Subroutine program 2 RET gt Pi Hre Subroutine program 3 4 RET END Pointer 1 Pointer numbers do not need to be specified in ascending order 44 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING Use a subroutine program for the purposes such as the following Handle the program that is executed several times in one scan as a subroutine program so that the entire number of steps can be reduced Handle the program that is executed under the specific condition as a subroutine program so that the scan time can be decreased Point O Asubroutine programs can be managed as one separate program standby type program Page 65 Section 2 8 3 Subroutine programs can be configured with the nesting gt Page 277 Section 5 9 Using an interrupt pointer in a subroutine program changes the program to an interrupt program Page 54 Section 2 7 2 3 4 END Processing END processing includes the following e Link refresh with CC Link IE Field Network master local module e Auto refresh with intelligent function module Intelligent function module dedicated instruction processing e Device data latch processing Service processing Watchdog time reset Self diagnostics processing e Special relay special register
174. ch instruction in the following manual MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction O For the concept of the number of words used for the local devices refer to gt Page 232 Section 5 2 286 CHAPTER 7 CONVENIENT USAGE OF DEVICES 1 Local device setting To use a local device perform the following procedure 1 Seta local device range L Parameter Setting PLC Name PLC System PLCFie PLCRAS boot File Program SFC Device I O Assignment Built in Ethernet Port Setting Buit in 1 0 Function Setting a a ENEE O Project window gt Parameter gt ym Dig Points Start End Start End Local Device Start Local Device End E E PLC Parameter gt Device E Annunciator F pio 2k E A ee loa O E E a Counter 10 kk Data Register D 10 12K a o altea Deves Toal EET Kwords O word Device 50 KWords AO a by the program when the remote operation BtDevce 57 kets cessary please required minimum latch range le File Register Extended Setting co 2 ae ae AAA Pru iene aaron atro i aa ss SSS 2 mo o meto can Extendedtink w J16 ox of fle register area Indexing Setting for ZR Device G Usez z After 0 18 P Print Window Print Window Preview Acknowledge XY Assignment Default check end cana ES 2
175. change e Change T C setting e Local device monitor Program memory backup e Writing to reading from the file register or the buffer memory of an intelligent function module The scan time is increased when the write or read size is large Diagnostic function of a network module CC IE Field diagnostics CC Link CC Link LT diagnostics e Monitor function module access device link direct device 4 Note that the scan time is increased much longer if the CPU module simultaneously receives multiple requests while the service processing count specification is set many 5 If a data communication is performed over Ethernet when Specify service process execution counts is selected in parameter the scan time will increase by the service processing time approx 500ms To keep the scan time 500ms or less select an item other than Specify service process execution counts in parameter For example select Specify service process time and set a time value to 500ms or less Bunjeas 6ulsseoojd solAJeS 9 amp 91 2 Operation for service processing setting Operations for each service processing setting is described below a Execute the process as the scan time proceeds Operation when 10 is set is as shown below Request 2 Request 4 Request 1 Request 3 Request 5 Program execution G 1st scan Sa 10ms is 7 Peripheral END processing Peques 1 j
176. cified device and a value and bit status of the specified device can be monitored The current value is displayed in decimal or hexadecimal the format specified in the display format selection screen When REAL has been specified the current value is displayed in decimal The device number can be changed by1 word 16 bits with the A and W buttons Display format is not displayed Coil Contact On off status of bits ON Current value OFF 199 JSOVJOWUOW solAed L Z y 159 1 JOYUON NO lt p 6 Device test On off status of a bit device and a word device value can be changed Device monitor screen 1 Press the button 4 Device test check screen 2 Selecta device using the A and y buttons a Bit device device value is changed by 1 bit for bit device and 1 E en word for word device and press the Jon button Word device Timer T retentive timer ST and counter C y Device test screen 3 Change device status Bit device Change on off status of a bit device using the A and y buttons For a word device the cursor can be moved forward or back using the lt and buttons Increase or decrease the value at the cursor Word device Timer T retentive timer ST and counter C position using the A and W buttons 4 Pressing the button will update the value to the one set in device test 200 CHAPTER 4 DISP
177. cked and changed with the display unit 4 5 1 Initial setting change The initial setting value of an intelligent function module can be changed The changed value is reflected to the CPU module after any of the following operations are performed e Powering off and then on the CPU module e Resetting the CPU module Setting the CPU module from STOP to RUN 1 Perform this operation twice STOP gt RUN gt STOP gt RUN Point Write the following items to the CPU module before changing the initial setting If the setting is changed before the items are written an error message will be displayed Intelligent function module parameters _ gt Page 74 Section 2 11 1 e Menu definition file gt Page 223 Section 4 5 1 2 1 Screen transition The following shows screen transition of initial setting change puro Function selection screen RR EU Module settiong_module specification screen Module setting_start I O No specification screen Module setting_module selection screen Levels lower than the initial setting change screen depend on intelligent function module used Manual for the intelligent function module used 222 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 2 Registering canceling display unit menu To change an initial setting value with the display unit write a menu definition file to the CPU module Select the standard ROM or an SD memory
178. cludes a stop error 172 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 2 Execution method The following two ways are available for backing up data to SD memory card e By contacts By remote operation a Execution by contacts Backup is executed by turning on the device specified in the PLC Module Change Setting dialog box Project window 2 gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System PLC Module Change Setting Backup Setting for Memory Card by Contact Backup Start Setup Contact Device Name MN Backup Start Contact Device Name X Backup Target Data Options IV Program memory Format memory card before backup IV Standard RAM Auto restore at turn OFF gt ON or reset MV Standard ROM E Title Setting When no setting is specified the time when the backup was executed is set Set a backup contact target data for backup options and title When no target backup data is selected only the device data and system data are backed up Default Check Cancel Item Description Setting range Default At the rise of the selected device backup is i ices 2 Backup Start Setup Contact E Available devices ready to start X 0 to 1FFF Backup Start Contact At the rise of the selected device backup M 0 to 8191 enters execution status B 0 to 1FFF 3 pJeo Aiowaw Gs ol dnyoeg poce Program memory drive 0 Backup Target Data Select the data to backup St
179. crease a time value using the 4 and y buttons and press the button Clock setting confirmation screen 2 Select YES using the A and y buttons and sl F n Clock setting completion screen 3 After the setting is completed either of the screens shown left appear To return the display to the CPU settings screen press the button Buimes 19019 Ley s6umes Add v 217 4 4 Module Monitor Test The buffer memory values of intelligent function modules including the LCPU with the built in CC Link function can be checked and changed with the display unit 4 4 1 Buffer memory monitor test Buffer memory values can be monitored and tested 1 Screen transition The following shows screen transition of buffer memory monitor test r Module monitor test_module selection screen 218 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 2 Specifying a module A module to be monitored or tested is specified by the following ways e Start I O No specification Module selection a Start I O No specification Perform the following operation Module monitor test_start I O No specification screen 1 Move the cursor using the 4 and gt buttons increase or decrease a start I O No using the A and y buttons and press the button b Module selection Perform the following operation Module monitor test_module selection screen 1 Select a target item using the 4 and y buttons and press the button AS
180. cs SAN ds z When the execution condition for an instruction is satisfied a device Repeated Loop BREAK P value is not changed even when the specified step is executed CALL P e When execution condition for an instruction is not satisfied a device value is changed after the specified step is executed FCALL P Subroutine program call ECALL P EFCALL P XCALL End FEND Jump JMP A device value is not changed even when the specified step is executed Return from subroutine program RET Return from interrupt program IRET FOR and NEXT instructions When the executional conditioned device test setting is registered specifying the step for the FOR or NEXT instruction timing of device value change is different from the timing when steps for other instructions are specified Execution timing setting Instruction Before Executing Instruction After Executing Instruction Executed once after the start of loop processing Executed FOR Executed once before the start of loop processing before the operation of the program between the FOR and NEXT instructions Executed every loop processing Executed after the NEXT operation of the program between the FOR and NEXT Executed once after the start of loop processing instructions END instruction If After executing instruction is set the CPU module returns a registration error to the programming tool d Number of settings that can be simultaneously registe
181. ction gt Page 277 Section 5 9 4 Registering executional conditioned device test settings a Operation method 1 Open a dialog box to edit the program and select the step number to register 2 The setting can be set by Executional Conditioned Device Test dialog box Debug gt Executional Conditioned Device Test gt Register Executional Conditioned Device Test Executional Conditioned Device Test Device Label Data Type Bit FORCE ON FORCE OFF w Execute Condition T Program Name marn m Cannot set it to SFC program Step No E Execution Timing Before Executing Instruction 3 O 5 Q o Item Description a a Device Label Target device or label is displayed Data entry is also available o For bit device Forced on off operation is executed Data Type D For word device Enter a value For a signed value specify decimal or hexadecimal a o Program Name Select the name of the program that is registered in the CPU module ad Execute Step No Specify the step number step number from 0 to END instruction that exists in the program Specification of Condition ee a start step of the instruction Execution Timing Select either Before Executing Instruction or After Executing Instruction Multiple executional conditioned device test settings can be registered for one step number D0 D10 D20 Se i Devices that can register e
182. cution of the trigger from the programming tool is set as a trigger Specify a device or label from the following e Bit device X DX Y DY M L F SM V B SB T contact ST contact C contact FX FY Word device T current value ST current value C current value D D extended data register SD W W extended link register SW R ZR Detail Setting The following modifications are available for the above devices Bit specification of word device Step No specification When the set conditions are met this timing is set as a trigger point 4 Trigger point is the timing when the status immediately before execution of the specified step changes to the specified status 135 5 Online operation of trace data Before execution of a sampling trace write the created trace setting to the CPU module O Debug gt Sampling Trace gt Write to PLC The trace data written to the CPU module can be read T Debug lt gt Sampling Trace gt Read from PLC 6 Executing a sampling trace The following describes how to execute from a programming tool a Start 1 Onthe Sampling Trace window enter devices to trace XD Debug gt Sampling Trace gt Open Sampling Trace Device Label Device Comment t Data Type Radix Vertical Axis i e 4 Do DO Word Signed DEC Set trace data B Trace results are displayed Do Word Signed DEC al Configure tre
183. d 7 iat l F When time required for processing one request F 9 i i Program execution exceeds 10 of one scan time the service processing is suspended and the remaining 2nd scan Tms requests are processed at the END processing 10ms in the next scan END processing Request 2 1 eS Program execution The service processing time depends on the scan time program execution time 1 2ms 3rd scan 12ms Request 2 2 END processing Request 3 Point O When the constant scan is set 7 Page 95 Section 3 6 2 d the calculation of the service processing time is a calculation of the percentage of the time excluding the waiting time of the constant scan from the scan time not a calculation of the percentage of the scan time Ex Operation when 50 is set 0 50 100 I T T T T T T T T T 1 END processing Service processing Waiting time i Service processing time gt Mod lt Scan time constant scan setting O f no request data for service processing exists END processing speeds up by the amount of request processing time The CPU module does not wait for requests 92 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS b Specify service process time Operation when 1ms is setis as shown below Program execution 1st scan END processing Program execution 2nd scan END processing 3rd
184. d D99 8 are displayed when X10 and X11 are on respectively 119 IS JOPUOJN 298d 2907 LE 120 2 Device test procedure 1 Connecta personal computer to the CPU module 2 Display a program in ladder mode 3 Switching to the monitor mode W Online lt gt Monitor gt monitor mode 4 Select Local device monitor from the monitor window 3 Number of programs that can be monitored tested Local devices of 16 programs can be simultaneously monitored or tested from multiple programming tools 4 Precautions One programming tool can monitor or test local devices in one program at a time Local devices in multiple programs cannot be monitored or tested simultaneously When local devices in a stand by type program are monitored data in local devices are saved and restored For this reason the scan time increases When local devices in a fixed scan execution type program are monitored data in local devices cannot be acquired and 0 is displayed CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 18 External Input Output Forced On Off This function forcibly turns on or off the external input output of the CPU module 1 Input output operation when a forced on off operation is performed Three types of forced on off operations are available as shown in the following table The following table shows the status of input X and output Y when a forced on off operation is performed Note that a program operation
185. d in a list Devices that have already been registered can be reset Up to 32 devices can be registered Perform the following operation from the forced on off registration screen Forced on off registration screen 1 Switch a device using the A and y buttons y Forced on off registration screen 2 Move the cursor using the 4 and gt buttons and increase or decrease a device number using the A and y buttons y Forced on off registration screen 3 Move the cursor using the 4 and gt buttons and ae ae switch on off setting using the A and y buttons 4 Pressing the button will register the setting and will return the display to the forced on off screen HO UO peoJod ECV 189 L IOYUON NADO ZY Point When at least one device is registered the MODE LED on the CPU module will be flashing in green 205 3 Forced on off clear Registered devices are cleared one by one Perform the following operation from the forced on off clear screen Forced on off clear screen 4 Forced on off batch clear Registered devices are batch cleared Perform the following operation from the forced on off batch clear screen 1 Select a device to be cleared using the A and y buttons 2 Pressing the button will clear the selected device Forced on off batch clear screen Forced on off batch clear completion screen 5 Forced on off list Registered devices are listed in th
186. d in the STOP status The switch is set from STOP to RUN the RUN LED will flash then back to STOP and to RUN again Note that the PLSDIP instruction instruction for pulse conversion may not be executed properly with the above operation This is because the previous information may not be inherited depending on the program changes 43 2 3 2 Refresh processing of input output modules or intelligent function modules The CPU module performs the following before program operations On off data input from the input module or intelligent function module to the CPU module e On off data output from the CPU module to the output module or intelligent function module For details on refreshing processing refer to 277 Page 49 Section 2 6 2 3 3 Program operation A main routine program repeatedly executes its operation from the step 0 to the END or FEND instruction This program is executed from the step 0 for every scan nesses c Main routine program Program execution 1 scan After completion of END processing an operation is repeated END FEND starting from step 0 instructions i END processing END FEND aa A main routine program can be divided to main routine and subroutine programs A subroutine program is from a pointer P to the RET instruction and is created between the FEND and END instructions This program is executed only when it is called by a subroutine program call instruction su
187. d limit parameter so that the operation can be stopped immediately upon occurrence of a hazardous condition Disposal Precautions CAUTION O When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details on battery regulations in EU member states refer to the MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Transportation Precautions CAUTION O When transporting lithium batteries follow the transportation regulations For details on the regulated models refer to the MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCTO 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITYOR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCTLIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH
188. d setti h lecting th Condition detailed setting onfigure the detailed setting when selecting the LCPU User Connection No Select a user connection number s Connection 1 to Connection 16 Password Active MELSOFT Transmission Port TCP IP Module Select a port s where the remote password is MELSOFT Transmission Port UDP IP System Connection ae Setting enabled FTP Transmission port TCP IP Direct Connection of MELSOFT Regard as Error when Remote Set whether to generate an error when the number Pasword Mismatch Count Reaches of mismatches on remote password reaches to the Deselected Upper Limit upper limit Upper Limit of Setthe upper limit of the number of remote 1 to 65535 default 10 Count Mismatch password mismatches Point FP After setting a remote password store the parameters in the parameter valid drive 313 6ulles plJomssed ajowey y xipueddy Buas JelewueJed xipueddy Appendix 2 Added and Changed Functions Some functions are added to the CPU module and GX Works2 The following table shows serial numbers of the CPU module and software versions of GX Works2 that support those added functions Added function Serial No first 5 digits of CPU module GX Works2 version Reference Parameter valid drive information Data logging file transfer function 12112 or later 1 34L or later Page 22 Section 1 2 MELSEC L CPU Module User s 1 45X or later j
189. data refer to the Latch data clear section 2 gt Page 86 Section 3 4 4 4 The latch range of the file register can be set in the Device tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box 3 Page 270 Section 5 7 6 b 8 Deleting a file register file Open the Online Data Operation dialog box O Online lt gt Delete PLC Data 9 Precautions a If the file register number not registered is used If a file register file is not registered and writing to or reading from the file register is performed OPERATION ERROR error code 4101 occurs b If writing to or reading from the file register is performed exceeding the registered size of points OPERATION ERROR error code 4101 occurs c File register size check When writing to or reading from the file register check the file register size so that data can be written or read within the size points set for the CPU module Check the file register size at step 0 in the program if any file register is used 4K points specified on SM400 l Ny He SD647 K4 1 MO Final file register 2 range check o MO E Yo Alarm processing a Transfer a MO command 2 HE MovP kaxz0 RO Writing to the file 3 register N The file register size can be checked in SD647 Before executing a file register block switching instruction RSET ensure that 1K points or more of space are secured after the switching File register size gt 32K point
190. day 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 1 1000sec 0 to 999 4 Storing in SD213 for the first two digits and SD210 for the last two digits of the year 2 Use only the expansion clock data read S P DATERD to read LL MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction 2 Changing clock data To change clock data use any of the following e Programming tool e SM and SD Program Clock setting of the display unit a Programming tool Open the Set Clock dialog box UOHound A9019 LEE O Online lt gt Set Clock Set Clock Connection Channel List lt gt Fic Module Connection Interface Lse Target PLC Ni Station No Host PLC Type 26 8T A b Get Time from PC pal Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 27 28 Hb 30 31 Today 12 29 2009 12 29 2009 2 12 48 PM Execute Close b Clock setting of the display unit Clock data can be set and checked in the display unit K gt Page 216 Section 4 3 1 183 c SM and SD Store clock data in SD210 to SD213 After the END processing for the scan where SM210 Clock data set request were turned on from off write the values stored in SD210 to SD213 to the CPU module d Program Use an instruction to write clock data DATEWR MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction Point O After changing clock data a 1 1000 is reset to 0
191. ded data register and f extended link register are Points for reserved in this order after extended the area for the points for data register E file register ZR20479 D12288 D53247 W2000 Points for extended link register The points for each of the file register ZR extended data register D and extended link register W can be checked in the following SD SD number Corresponding points SD306 SD307 File register ZR SD308 SD309 Data register D Extended data register D SD310 SD311 Link register W Extended link register 274 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 2 Precautions a Specifying the extended data register D and extended link register W The values of the following items will be the same as those for the file register ZR Number of program steps e Instruction processing time e Processing time of link refresh by the CC Link IE Field Network master local module e Processing time of auto refresh by CC Link Processing time of auto refresh with intelligent function modules b Changing the file register size The file register size cannot be changed while the CPU module is in the RUN status c Refresh range Set the refresh ranges for the following auto refresh properly so that each refresh range does not cross over the boundary between the internal user device and the extended data register D or extended link register W e Link refresh by CC Link IE Field Network e
192. details refer to the following OA MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 106 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 1 2 Remote Password This function prevents unauthorized access to the CPU module 1 Settable modules and the number of settable modules The following shows the modules for which the remote password can be set and the number of settable modules The number of settable modules does not indicate the number of connectable modules in the system where a CPU module is used CPU module Ethernet port 1 Serial communication module 8 Point For details on the remote password of each module refer to the following I MELSEC L Serial Communication Module User s Manual Basic 2 Flow from remote password setting to reflection of the password 1 Register a remote password gt Page 295 Appendix 1 2 Project window gt Parameter gt Remote Password 2 Write itto the CPU module Write to PLC The remote password is transferred to the target module when the CPU module is powered off and then on or e the CPU module is reset w a N ys 3 9 a U n n S a Programming tool Ethernet CPU module 3 The remote password is transferred when the CPU module is powered off and then on or is reset Checks the remote password 1 Register a remote password 2 Write the password to the CPU module A rem
193. ding an annunciator can be checked The current error monitor includes the following screens Error information screen e Error common information screen e Error individual information screen a Error information If an error occurs the following information is displayed Error code e an Current page number of pages Error message Year and date when an error occurred Time when an error occurred a b Error common information If an error occurs the following information is displayed Current page number of pages T5 2 34 ERR COM INF 2 31 Error common information The following items are displayed in the error common information screen A n ae Error common rae Error common information Description A E Description information Slot No block No File name Module No I O No SFC block specification Drive SFC step specification File name drive name Program error location File name SFC transition specification Time setting value Time Step No transition condition Not error Sequence step No 213 Jeao Aejdsip JoJJ 9 Z p 189 1 JOYUON NO lt p c Error individual information If an error occurs the following information is displayed Error individual information gt The following items are displayed in the error individual information screen LL 3 31
194. dow 2 gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC File File Register I Not used ad Corresponding Memory Select Use the following file 3 Use the following file Corresponding Memory File Name MAIN Capacity 128 K Points 1K 384K Points I Transfer to Standard ROM at Latch data backup operation Following settings are available in device setting when select Use the Following file and specify capacity Change of latch 2 of File register Assignment to expanded data register fexpanded link register of part of file register area CPU module Corresponding memory File name Capacity LO2CPU LO2CPU P 1 to 64K points Standard RAM Any name L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 1 to 384K points 1 The total points of the file register ZR extended data register D and extended link register W Point When using the file register it is shared by all the programs to be executed A file register file is created after the parameters specified in Corresponding Memory and File Name are written to the CPU module When the capacity is not specified note the following When the specified file register file is stored in the specified drive the file is used The capacity is the same as that of the stored file register file If the file register file with the specified file name is not found in the specified drive PARAMETER ERROR error code 3002 occurs b Device setting Th
195. duct specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 347 Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation The SD logo and SDHC logo are trademarks All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies SH NA 080889ENG H 348 MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals MODEL LCPU U KP E pang 13JZ35 SH NA 080889ENG H 1110 MEE sfa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 oe NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPA When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES MI
196. e ASCII Code J Enable online change FTP MC Protocol Disable direct connection to MELSOFT I Do not respond to search for CPU Built in Ethernet port on network Simple PLC Communication Setting A Simple PLC Communication Setting Setifitisneeded Default f Changed Print Window Print Window Preview Acknowledge XY Assignment Default Check Cancel JelewueJed Old Z xipueddy Buas JelewueJed xipueddy Parameter ete Item No Description Setting range Default Reference IP Address 0 0 0 1 to IP Address Enter the IP address 223 255 255 254 of the CPU module 000000014 to ODFFFFFFE IP Address MELSEC L Subnet Mask Pattern Enter the Subnet Mask Pattern Blank or ia ssi Mogule IP Address 1016 subnet mask pattern when using 192 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 252 cee es i i a A a router 0C0000000 to OFFFFFFFC A anual Built Default Router IP In Ethernet Default Router IP Address Enter e Default Router IP Address Blank or a Address Blank Function the IP address of the router 0 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 00000001 y to ODFFFFFFE y To the next page 309 Parameter Setting function Item N Description Setting range Default O C icati Select th de for MC protocol o O Binary Code ASCII Code Binary Code Data Code communication Set parameters when using the MC Open Setting protocol for communication or t
197. e forced on off list screen 1 Select YES using the A and y buttons and press the button 2 After the setting is completed either of the screens shown left appear To return the display to the device clear screen press the button The screen is scrolled by one line by pressing it Aor button once 206 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 4 2 4 Scan time monitor The current value maximum value and minimum value of scan time can be checked with the display unit Values stored in the special register of the CPU module are displayed Displayed item Special register Description Current value SD520 SD521 Current scan time Maximum value SD526 SD527 Maximum scan time Minimum value SD524 SD525 Minimum scan time 1 These values of an initial execution type program are not displayed 1 Screen transition The following shows screen transition of scan time monitor 2 Monitor data The current value maximum value and minimum value of scan time are displayed Displayed up to third decimal place 207 JOlIUOU SWI UEoS Y Z py 159 1 JOYUON Ndd lt p 4 2 5 Built in I O function monitor I O status and setting values of the built in I O function can be checked with the display unit Also errors detected during execution of the built in I O function can be cleared The built in I O monitor includes the following functions e Built in positioning function monitor e
198. e Register Extended Setting Capacity K Points Following setting are available Device Latch 1 Latch 1 Latch 2 Latch 2 Device No Device No when select Use the Following file Sym Dig Points Start End Start End Start End in file register setting of PLC file setting er E Change of latch 2 of file register File Register ZR R 10 2K ZRO ETA Assignment to expanded data Extended Data io 100k 12288 D114687 register expanded link register of a part Extended link w 16 ox of file register area Set these points so that the total is equal to the file register size set in the PLC File tab Specify the latch range 1 Assign a part of the points set for the file register ZR in the PLC File tab to the extended data register D and extended link register W 2 The latch range can be changed if necessary e Latch 1 and 2 of the extended data register D e Latch 1 and 2 of the extended link register W 273 M 1a siBay um papuajx3 pue q Ja siBay ejeq pepus xy gg Once the points for the extended data register D and extended link register W is set areas for these devices are reserved in the file register file Internal user device Device Points for data register D12287 Data register File register file Points for Extended file register data register Areas for the points for exten
199. e condition is not recognized In these cases the trace setting must be registered again since the latched trace setting is cleared SM800 turns off e With the size of a local device in the standard RAM set to be changed the parameters have been written to the CPU module and the CPU module is powered off and then on or it is set from STOP to RUN e With a sampling trace file corrupted the CPU module is powered off and then on or it is reset b Reading trace result c The trace result cannot be read while the CPU module is in the STOP status Registering sampling trace when the trigger condition is established Even if the trigger condition is established the sampling trace setting can be registered by the following procedure 1 Turn on SM829 Forced registration specification of trace setting 2 Enable the forced execution registration Debug gt Sampling Trace gt Forced Execution Registration Effective For the above cases start the trace in the status where the trigger condition is not established With a trigger condition established the trigger may not be normally executed d Specifying a file register e f When a file register is selected as a specified device by the detail setting of trace setting do not change the block numbers of file register file and file register after trace registration Trace data may not be normally sampled Performing sampling trace during execution of another
200. e execution condition of OFF OFFS N E on gt off is met coincidentally 143 abueyo eulluo Jol Suoyneoejd LZ E snlelS NNy ul sueJ6oud BUI LZE 144 5 Automatic data transfer to the program memory The automatic data transfer to the program memory requires time obtained from the following formula e LO2CPU LO2CPU P Scan time s x 320 4 8 s L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT scan time s x 1100 15 0 s The number of writes to the program memory flash ROM is limited to 100 000 times When data are written to the CPU module in the RUN status or the T C setting values are changed frequently disable the automatic transfer to the program memory O Too gt Options Options Unset Project Project Automatic Save Change History Program Edie y pere Comment Editor To avoid automatic transfer of program Parameter memory data clear the checkbox Monitor PLC Read Write Selected by default Gre CAR Intelligent Function Module Back to System Default Operational Setting Execute fall instruction Execute online change based on relative step No Ladder Only Explanation Select whether to transfer the program cache memory to program memory when online change completed Set as User Default Cancel When the automatic transfer is set to be disabled the following message appears after online change When selecting No the program memory must be batch transfer
201. e execution type of programs can be changed using instructions even during execution Use the PSCAN PSTOP or POFF instruction to change a program execution type Initial execution type program PSCAN instruction Scan execution type program PSTOP PSTOP and POFF PSCAN and POFF instructions instruction instructions PSCAN instruction Fixed scan execution PSTOP type program and POFF instructions Standby type program Execution type before Instruction change PSCAN PSTOP POFF T ff outputs in th t Scan execution type Remains unchanged Changes to the standby type li Sean Changes to the standby type in two scans later T ff outputs in th t Initial execution type Changes to the scan execution type Changes to the standby type Poma a aati he scans later Standby type Changes to the scan execution type Remains unchanged No processing T ff outputs in th t y Fixed scan execution type Changes to the scan execution type Changes to the standby type ee ae ee Changes to the standby type in two scans later Point Once the fixed scan execution type program is changed to another execution type the type cannot be returned to the fixed scan execution type suweJBo1g adn in Bunnoex3 gZ adh uolnoexe weJ6oJd y Buibuey S 8 z 71 12 Ex In a control program a standby type program matching the preset condition is changed to a scan executio
202. e in the monitor CD mode the start and end steps are set in the specified ranges such as shown below 8 a 20 5 50 MO o o n a 3 o 3 108 END 115 2 Precautions The minimum unit of measurement time is 0 01ms If the measurement time is less than 0 01ms 0 000ms is displayed When between the FOR and NEXT instructions is specified the execution time of one scan between the specified steps is displayed e If a subroutine program call instruction CALL instruction exists within the scan time measurement range processing time for the subroutine program is included in the scan time Measurement range Main program Subroutine program Measurement range e If an interrupt fixed scan execution type program is executed within the scan time measurement range program execution time is added to the scan time Scan time from one program file to another cannot be measured Also scan time cannot be updated on the Scan Time Measurement dialog box in the following cases When the branch instruction is specified in the end step When only the start step is executed Ex The JMP instruction is specified in the end step Ex The specified end step is not executed by the JMP instruction i ot J Start step 3 Start step 3 a mA 3 l 311 l al J is E
203. e initial device values DO Project Window Device Initial Value gt Right click gt Add New Data 3 Clicking the ok button on the dialog box above opens the dialog box shown on the left Enter the range for initial device values CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 4 Configure the device memory Device Memory MAIN D Project Window gt Device Memory gt MAIN gt Right click gt Input Device 5 Store the initial device value file in the program memory of the CPU module standard ROM or an SD memory card O Online gt Write to PLC Point Whenever the initial device value range is changed execute Device Memory Diversion on the Device Initial Value MAIN dialog box For details on creating initial device value data refer to the following 1 Operating manual for the programming tool used 4 Precautions Initial device values also take effect when the CPU module status is switched from STOP to RUN Therefore they cannot be used for the data that are to be changed in a program after being set at CPU module power on from off Use an instruction such as the MOV instruction in the main routine program so that the initial device values are set to the specified devices For the intelligent function module use the TO instruction to write data to the buffer enleA eolAed lemul G E memory 89 3 6 Service Processing Setting 90 This functio
204. e local device file size can be reduced Program execution Local device file QDL For program A For program C File size can be reduced since the saving or restoring area for program B is not created Scan time decreases since saving restoring processing is not performed a Setting method In addition to the setting in 1 in this section click the File Usability Setting button and specify the programs that use the local devices Project window lt gt Parameter lt gt PLC Parameter gt Program gt File Usability Setting File Usability Setting aaa aa DIKE a IE A fe EN he ES Em ra ha haa bra he aaaaaaaaa b Precautions Do not change or refer to the local device in a program for which the local device is set to Not used The changed data are not held 288 CHAPTER 7 CONVENIENT USAGE OF DEVICES 3 Local devices when executing a subroutine program When executing a subroutine program the local device in the file where the subroutine program is stored can be used by ON OFF of SM776 SM776 Operation OFF Perform operations with the local device that corresponds to the source file of the subroutine program ON Perform operations with the local device that corresponds to the file where the subroutine program is stored a When SM776 is off File name DEF File name ABC Standby type program xo CAL
205. e points of the file register ZR can be set in the File Register Extended Setting Project window lt gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter 2 gt Device The number of file register points set in the PLC file tab is displayed File Register Extended Setting Capacity K Points Following setting are available Device Latch 1 Latch 1 Latch 2 Latch 2 Device No Device No when select Use the Following file Sym Dig Points Start End Start End Start End in file register setting of PLC file setting F Assignment to expanded data Extended Data D iof took D12288 D114687 register expanded link register of a part Extended Link w 16 oxk of file register area File Register ZR R 10 28k ZRO 26671 Change of latch 2 of file register When using an extended data register D and an extended link register W set the device points so that the total is equal to the file register capacity Specify the latch range set in the PLC file tab 1 The latch range can be changed if necessary e Latch 2 of the file register ZR 270 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 7 Clearing the file register If the Latch 2 is set in the Device tab of the PLC parameter dialog box the data in the file register are not cleared even if the CPU module is powered off or reset Data cannot be cleared by performing a latch clear operation 1 For how to clear the
206. e the memory card and write parameters without boot file setting to the program memory 2 Power off and then off or rest the CPU module d Boot operation precautions Set the maximum number of settable boot files in the Boot File tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box so that it is the same with the number of files storable to the program memory However the number of boot files is reduced by one when e a heading is set or e the parameters set in the Boot File tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box and stored in the SD memory card is booted The size unit of a file stored in each memory differs between the SD memory card and the program memory Therefore note that files transferred from the SD memory card to the program memory differ in memory capacity between before and after the transfer Set the same model name of the CPU module in the PLC type model name of the CPU module for the program written to the SD memory card program set in the Boot File tab and for the CPU module to boot CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 2 10 Programming Language The following programming languages are supported in the programming tool e Ladder e ST e SFC Structured ladder 1 Ladder A graphical programming language which uses contacts and coils For a project with a label the inline ST function can be used in the ladder editor which allows a user to edit an ST program 7 Sequence instruction XO MO nese HE lt to X
207. ecified by the last instruction executed 2 Restrictions on creating a execution type program Unavailable devices depend on the program type subroutine program or interrupt program or the execution type changed by an instruction 67 weJBold edAl Aqpue s 8 Z suwe JBo1g sldllInIN Bunnoex3 gZ 2 8 4 Fixed scan execution type program Fixed scan execution type program is a program executed at specified time intervals This type of programs unlike interrupt programs can be interrupted in units of files without interrupt pointers or the IRET instruction For the restrictions on programming refer to 277 Page 55 Section 2 7 2 The restrictions on programming are the same as those for interrupt programs Fixed scan interval Condition established Scan execution Hm e A type program END processing Condition established Fixed scan execution HH ________ type program Point To execute a fixed scan execution type program execute the El instruction in the initial execution type program or scan execution type program to enable interrupts 68 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 1 Processing a When two or more fixed scan execution type programs exist Each fixed scan execution type program is executed at specified time intervals If two or more fixed scan execution type programs reach the specified time at the same timing programs will be executed in ascending
208. ed operation Button name Description Button name Description mn F Cancels forced on off registered for the device Register FORCE ON Registers forced on for a specified device Cancel Registration specified Register FORCE OFF Registers forced off a specified device Batch Cancel Registration Cancels all forced on off registration The latest on off status can be checked by clicking the Update Status button HO UO psoloJlndinoHndul Ileuuelx 81 123 3 1 9 Executional Conditioned Device Test This function changes a device value for the specified step of a program This enables debugging of the specified ladder block without modifying the program Point The executional conditioned device test is not available for the SFC program 1 Operation of the executional conditioned device test A device value is changed based on the registration data once the executional conditioned device test setting is registered a Program MAIN N Registration MO a data A ING D1000 Program MAIN 879 Step number 10 MOV D1000 Dio 7 A 879 879 Device MO Setting value ON RST M0 Execution timing Before instruction execution E D10 H1234 Yo 879 w Joa E ING D2000 Y 880 MOV D2000 D20 880 880 vio Programming tool E Turns on at Note that a device value is changed in the specified step r
209. ed to the program memory when e the CPU module is powered off and then on or e the CPU module is reset a Boot operation procedure 1 Create a program 2 Configure the setting for a boot operation Specify the file name and transfer destination to boot O Project window gt Parameter lt gt PLC Parameter lt gt Boot File N co wW o e Boot File Setting O a ien _ _ O Program Transfer To g MAIN a Parameter Memory Card SD Drive 2 Program Memory Drive 0 w 3 Global Comment Memory Card SD Drive 2 Program Memory Drive 0 w 5 COMMENT i Program Memory Drive 0 5 Local Comment Parameter PARAM Device Initial Value Insert Delete 3 Insert an SD memory card 4 Write the setting to the SD memory card parameters and the files set in the Boot File tab Reset the CPU module after the above operation The boot operation is complete 73 74 b Checking whether a boot is complete The following indicates completion of boot operation SM660 turns on There is no BOOT ERROR Data in the transfer destination and in the program memory are found matched by a data verification O Online Verify with PLC c Operation for stopping boot operation To stop boot operation and operate the CPU module by the parameters and program files written to the program memory perform the following operations 1 Remov
210. egardless of an execution status of the instruction in the specified step Program example Operation Changes the DO value to 35 st gt MO OE On x 100 HH Kio DO DO value 10 x 35 X 45 i Fa MO value f OFF i Register executional conditioned device A device value is changed at the specified test that sets 35 to DO in this step step regardless of the MO value 2 Applicable devices The following table shows the applicable devices and the number of settable devices Number of settable Type Applicable device devices Bit device X DX Y DY M L B F SB V SM T contact ST contact C contact FX and FY T current value ST current value C current value D D extended data register SD W W extended link register SW R ZR Z UONG FD Up to 32 in total Digit specified bit device X Y M L F SM V B SB Indirect specification DO D SD W SW R ZR devices specified with Word device 124 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 How to check the execution status e By displaying the Check Disable Executional Conditioned Device Test Registration dialog box By the flash of the MODE LED in green By the on status of the first bit in SD840 Debug function usage Point When checking by the MODE LED or SD840 remind that they are also used to check the execution status of the external input output forced on off fun
211. eld Network b Auto refresh time via CC Link This is the time required for auto refresh via CC Link MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual c Auto refresh time via intelligent function modules This is the time required for refreshing data between the buffer memory of an intelligent function module and devices in the CPU module Auto refresh time via intelligent function modules KM1 KM2 x number of refresh points us When a CPU module is connected to a When a CPU module is connected to an CPU module main block extension block KM1 KM2 KM1 KM2 LO2CPU LO2CPU P 6 0 5 0 7 0 6 0 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 4 0 5 0 5 0 6 0 5 Function execution time in END processing This is the time required for updating calendar or clearing error in END processing a Calendar update processing time When SM210 Clock data set request turned from off to on or when SM213 Clock data read request turned APPENDICES on the processing time for changing or reading the clock data are required in END processing Processing time CPU module When the clock data set request is When the clock data read request is issued issued LO2CPU LO2CPU P 0 025 ms 0 006 ms L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 0 018 ms 0 006 ms b Error clear processing time Upon the rising edge of SM50 Error reset the processing time for clearing the continuation error stored in SD50 is required Processin
212. ent menu A21 gt CPUE 9 TAF MENU gt CPU MON TES Note that level navigation is not displayed in the detail setting screen of each function 7 Scrolling When the display screen consists of several pages the title line is displayed An arrow indicating a scrollable direction is displayed on the top right of the screen 117 Ayt Y IERROR MESSAGE Down scroll arrow 17 Ay it ERROR MESSAGE Up down scroll arrow Txt TS Up scroll arrow However when the contents of a screen with title line such as a screen that displays an error message can be displayed at a time the scroll symbol arrow will not be displayed 191 4 1 Function List The following table lists the functions of a display unit 7 Displayed ee Category Function name Description Reference function name Device monitor test DEV MON TEST Monitors and tests device memory values Page 193 Section 4 2 1 CPU monitor test Device memory clear DEVICE MEMORY Clears all device memory values Device i i i i P 201 Section 4 2 2 clear File register clear FILE REGISTER Clears values of file register including extended age ection data register and extended link register F d on off ae en F SET ON OFF Forcibly turns on or off devices X and Y registration Forced on Forced on off clear CLR FORCE Clears a forced on off registered device off Page 204 Section 4 2 3 F d on of
213. erver e By the MC protocol 1 By a programming tool 1 Whenever an online operation requiring password Disable Password authentication is executed the Disable Password Target Data dialog box appears remos eroren terion eves Hemor Select the one to authenticate and click the Data Type Data Name Write Protection Program MAIN Registered Setting button FH Parameter PARAM Registered Disable passwords For data in the programmable controller Setting pra Cancel 2 Entera password in the Input Disable Password Input Disable Password z dialog box Disable password for the selected file p Disable Condition Disable Password Write Protection Explanation of Registration Conditions Registration Conditions Read protection Write protection Read protection Write protection Valid Characters Use 4 to 32 single byte characters numeric characters alphabets A Z and a z single byte blanks and amp 3 lt gt 7 _ Do Passwords are case sensitive CE PIOMSSEJ alld LLE uoneonueyne plomssed ZLE Point The entered password is valid until the project is closed 105 2 By the FTP server To access a password protected file from the outside by using the FTP server function password authentication is required for each file To change a file to access password authentication is required again O Authentication required Aut
214. ery connecter is removed during power off the device data within the latch range are discarded and undefined values may replace A battery is required also in the boot operation to latch devices 86 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 5 Initial Device Value This function registers data used in a program to the device or the buffer memory of the intelligent function module without a program By using this function creating a device data setting program can be omitted in the initial processing program Device memory MOV H100 DO LMOV H2020 D1 Using an initial device value can omit creating device data setting program in an initial processing program Initial device value 1 Timing when initial device values are written to the specified device The CPU module writes data in the specified initial device value file to the specified device or the buffer memory of the intelligent function module when e the CPU module is powered off and then on e the CPU module is reset or the CPU module status is switched from STOP to RUN Nad a 2 A o is re o lt v lt 6 2 Devices that can be used The following shows devices that can be used for initial device value e Current timer value T e Current retentive timer value ST e Current counter value C e Data register D e Link register W e Link special register SW e Special register SD e Intell
215. es data for the preset number of times and latches the data in the sampling trace area CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS b On Off of the special relay The execution status of the sampling trace can be checked by the special relay Trace completed after performed Trigger condition by the number of times set in Trace start requested established Count after trigger y 1 Number of traces after trigger Total number of traces SM800 Trace preparation E i SM801 Trace start SM802 Trace execution in progress 1 1 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 A SM803 Trace trigger 1 i 1 1 SM804 After trace trigger SM805 Trace completed Also if SM801 Trace start is turned off during sampling trace execution of the sampling trace will be interrupted When the sampling trace is interrupted the trace count is cleared Trace completed after performed Trigger condition by the number of times set in Trace start requested established Count after trigger I Number of traces after trigger 1 1 Total number of traces ae Bulldwes 0Z amp SM800 Trace preparation SM801 Trace start SM802 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 T 1 1 I 1 l 1 1 1 Trace execution in progress y 1 I SM803 Trace trigger
216. essing while more time is required for processing of each instruction The general purpose input is an input signal received by the general purpose input function of the built in I O function The general purpose output is an output signal sent by the general purpose output function of the built in I O function 2 6 1 Refresh processing 1 Outline of the processing The following describes the details of the refresh processing a Input Before starting a program operation the ON OFF data in the general purpose module and input module are collectively loaded to the General purpose input input module access area of the CPU module When a program is executed the ON OFF data in the input X device memory are used for operation b Output The program operation result for output Y is output to the output Y device memory for every operation Before starting a program operation the ON OFF data in the output Y device memory are collectively output to the general purpose output or output module The processing outline is described in the illustration on the following page 6ulsseooJd ysalay 1 97 sindino pue slndul jo 6ulsseoojd 9z 49 50 CPU module Remote input refresh area 1 Network module CPU operation processing area Programming me Input X tool input
217. eter setting 9 292 Parameter valid driVe o o o o o o oooo 33 Password authentication 105 PAUSE status a cee ea TD eee eee 46 PEC File settingi s tica bA A Sues Ba ba 298 PLC name setting 002200005 295 PLC operation mode at H W error setting 99 PLC parameter i 295 PLC RAS setting 000000005 299 PLC system setting i 296 Pointer Picota ao pd ar pi SR eats hg 278 Pop up display i 228 Power supply module 22005 18 Precautions for online change 141 Processing time for the instruction DUTY instruction in END processing i 316 Program cache memory 005 30 Program list monitor 000 117 Program memory oooco eee eeee 30 Program operation 0 0 ee 44 Program setting 0000e eee eee 302 Programming language oo oooooo 75 Programming tool i 18 Q QnUCPW 18 R Real number E i 284 Refresh processing i 49 Registering canceling display unit menu 223 Remote latch clear i 114 Remote operation i 109 Remote password i 107 Remote password setting 313 Remote PAUSE 00000 eee eeee 111 Remote RESET 20000e eee eeee 113 Remote RUN STOP 000000000 109 Restoring backup data 166 RUN Stats vid 46 Sampling trace i 132 Saving a project i 29 Saving and restoration of the index register 266 Sca
218. evice value e Monitoring a real number single precision 2 The specified device and display format and a value of the specified device can be monitored The device number can be changed by 1 word 16 bits with the A and W buttons Display format lt Device value in exponent 1 4 If the device value is 0 unnormalized number nonnumeric character or is displayed 2 When a bit device is monitored the device value is displayed in 16 bit integer decimal 198 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS f Monitoring a real number double precision 2 The specified device and display format and a value of the specified device can be monitored The device number can be changed by 1 word 16 bits with the and W buttons Display format lt Device value in exponent 4 If the device value is 0 unnormalized number nonnumeric character or is displayed 2 When a bit device is monitored the device value is displayed in 16 bit integer decimal g Monitoring a bit device in decimal The specified device and bit status of the specified device can be monitored Regardless of display format a screen with the following style appears The device number can be changed by 10 bits the A and W buttons Display format and a device value are not displayed h Monitoring timer T retentive timer ST and counter C The spe
219. evices M L B F T 5T C D W Z To backup the file register at the same time parameters are required to be set At turn on or reset the PLC operation starts based on the backup contents If the PLC is in RUN mode the state becomes STOP Data to be backed up are the data at the execution of remote operation After backup the BAT LED of the CPU module flashes green indicating that the CPU module is in the standby status ready to be powered off 3 Deleting backup data The following two methods are available for deleting the backed up data e Remote operation Formatting the standard ROM a Execution by remote operation Open a dialog box to execute a remote operation This operation is available only while the CPU module is in the STOP status Online gt Latch Data Backup gt Delete Backup Data MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Do you want to delete data for operating latch data backup from the standard ROM Caution This will delete backup device memory breakdown history SFC program continuing start information At turn on or reset the PLC it is set not to transfer backup data from the standard ROM Do not execute when PLC is in RUN mode Deleting backup data clears values of SM and SD b Execution by formatting the standard ROM Open the Format PLC Memory dialog box SX Online lt gt PLC Memory Operation gt Format PLC Memory 164 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 4 Precauti
220. example refer to General Safety Requirements in the MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 5 Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of a component such as a transistor in an output circuit Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident In an output circuit when a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load short circuit flows for a long time it may cause smoke and fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as a fuse Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first and then the external power supply If the external power supply is turned on first an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or malfunction Configure a circuit so that the external power supply is turned off first and then the programmable controller If the programmable controller is turned off first an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or malfunction For the operating status of each station after a communication failure refer to relevant manuals for each network Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident When changing data from a peripheral device connected to the CPU module to the running programmable controller configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For
221. f can be set 3 25 1 Methods for turning off the LEDs The LEDs can be turned off by the following operations O Applicable x Not applicable Relevant LED How to turn off BAT ERR IO ERR USER After resolving the error cause execute the LEDR instruction O O O O After resolving the error cause clear the error usin 1 SM and SD spline 9 O O O O Continuation error only Use SM202 and SD202 x x x O 1 For operation of SM and SD refer to 3 Page 153 Section 3 24 For the I O ERR LED use SM1850 SM1870 SM1899 or SM1919 For details on SM and SD refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Point For LED of the built in CC Link function refer to the following LI MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual 156 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 25 2 LED indication priority The LED indication is determined according to the factor number in SD207 to SD209 LED indication priority The LED indication can be disabled off Factor number value 15 to 1211 to 87 to 43 to O bit 15 to O bit SD207 Priority 4 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 1 gt SD207 4 3 2 1 Factor number setting area SD208 Priority 8 Priority 7 Priority 6 Priority 5 SD208 8 7 6 5 Factor number setting area SD209 Priority 12 Priority 11 Priority 10 Priority 9 SD209 C B A 9
222. f L B aa aa Latch 2 Start End A be cleared by remote latch F V T ST C D and W clear operation devices Set a range start and end Setting is available for only Local Device Start End 2003 device numbers to be used one range for each of M V for a local device T ST C D and Z devices Points of the file register ZR Set points for the file register Assign part of the file F ZR extended data register Device Points 2000 register points to the D and extended link 4 register W extended data register 9 and extended link ist Page 85 File Register dia Section 3 4 Enended Latch 1 Start Latch 1 Seta latch range start and Each latch range for the file Page 264 Setting End 2004 end device numbers to be register ZR extended data Section 5 6 latch clear enabled a Peaca by remote latch clear register D and extended Page 268 operation link register W Section 5 7 Set a latch range start and Each latch range for the file Page 272 Latch 2 Start End 2005 end device numbers not to register ZR extended data Section 5 8 latch clear disabled H be cleared by remote latch register D and extended _ clear operation link register W Indexing Select Z or ZZ device for 32 ZO to Z18 wh i Setting for ZR 32Bit Indexing 20004 noa a eee eat 2160 When using Use Z Device bit indexing device Z 4 When changing the device points new setting must not ex
223. f batch Ro AA CLR ALL FORCES Clears all forced on off registered devices Forced on off list LIST FORCES Lists forced on off registered devices Scan time monitor SCAN TIME MON Displays the current value maximum value and minimum value of scan time Page 207 Section 4 2 4 Built in positioning function monitor BLT IN POSITION Displays the setting values of the built in positioning function Built in VO AECI i FER function Built in highspeed BLT IN COUNTER Displays the setting values of the built in high y counter function monitor speed counter function monitor Built in MO functi ee uncton error BLT INERR CLR Clears errors of the built in 1 O function Guin eror Morita MONITOR Displays me current error code message Error common information and individual information display Error log display LOG Displays information of error logs Error clear CLEAR Clears continuation errors Page 208 Section 4 2 5 Page 212 Section 4 2 6 CPU settings Clock setting CLOCK SETTING Sets the internal time of the CPU module Page 216 Section 4 3 Module monitor test Buffer memory monitor test BUF MEM MON TES Monitors and tests the buffer memory value of the selected module Page 218 Section 4 4 Hi Initial setting change INIT CHANGE Sets the initial value of the selected module Page 222 Section 4 5 User message User message USER MESSAGE o message execu
224. fied are 32768 to 32767 b Using in a 32 bit instruction For a 32 bit instruction two consecutive points of the data register Wn and Wn 1 are the target of the processing The lower 16 bits correspond to the link register number W specified in the program and the higher 16 bits correspond to the specified link register number 1 Ex When W12 is specified in the DMOV instruction W12 represents the lower 16 bits and D13 represents the higher 16 bits MO _ DMov Kso00000 w12 tan target W12 W13 upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Data of 2147483648 to 2147483647 or 000000004 to FFFFFFFF y can be stored in a two point area of the link register The most significant bit in a 32 bit structure is a sign bit 2 Retention of stored data The data stored in the link register are held until other different data are stored Note that the stored data are initialized when the CPU module is powered off or reset Point When using a link device in the network module by using the points of the link register in the CPU module default 8192 points or greater change the points setting of the link register in the Device of the PLC Parameter 254 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 5 2 14 Link special register SW The link special register SW is a register that stores communication status and error detection status of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module or the CC Link system master local module Because the data
225. function 1 Emergency stop circuits protection circuits and protective interlock circuits for conflicting operations such as forward reverse rotations or upper lower limit positioning must be configured external to the programmable controller Machine OPR Original Point Return of the positioning function is controlled by two kinds of data an OPR direction and an OPR speed Deceleration starts when the near point watchdog signal turns on If an incorrect OPR direction is set motion control may continue without deceleration To prevent machine damage caused by this configure an interlock circuit external to the programmable controller When the CPU module detects an error during control by the positioning function the motion slows down and stops Design Precautions WARNING 4 When the programmable controller detects an abnormal condition it stops the operation and all outputs are Turned off if the overcurrent or overvoltage protection of the power supply module is activated e Held or turned off according to the parameter setting if the self diagnostic function of the CPU module detects an error such as a watchdog timer error Also all outputs may be turned on if an error occurs in a part such as an I O control part where the CPU module cannot detect any error To ensure safety operation in such a case provide a safety mechanism or a fail safe circuit external to the programmable controller For a fail safe circuit
226. g according to the current parameters When the CPU module is turned off 3 9 and then on or is reset newly written parameters take effect according to the priority order 5 o b To write a parameter to the drive where another parameter is currently processed i Only the device settings become effective immediately after writing is complete To make all the parameters effective power off and then on or reset the CPU module 33 2 1 3 Files For the files written to the CPU module information such as written date file name if created and file size are appended to the file By monitoring the file through Read from PLC the file is displayed as shown below XZ Online gt Read from PLC Online Data Operation y Connection Channel Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image G Read write C verify Delete i Select All Cancel All Selections Title Project Name Target Detail Last Change TargetMemory Size Fail 2009 12 14 10 23 42 42256 Bytes 2009 12 14 10 23 10 2956 Bytes so peal O Device Data Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting Already Set Writing Size Free Volume Use Volume OBytes 36 708 45 212Bytes Refresh Related Eunctions lt lt 2 G amp we Ba g Start Stop PLC Set Clock PLC User Data Write Title Format PLC Clear PLC Memory Arrange PLC Memory Memory Item Description A file name consists
227. g time CPU module When the annunciator is cleared When the error is cleared LO2CPU LO2CPU P 0 101 ms 0 098 ms L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 0 075 ms 0 072 ms c Error clear processing time by error type The processing time for clearing the continuation error by error time is required Processing time gt CPU module When the annunciator is cleared When the error is cleared LO2CPU LO2CPU P 0 117 ms 0 111 ms L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 0 090 ms 0 087 ms 319 au ueoS ul pspnloul 6ulsseoojd y9e3 JO palmbay au e xipueddy au 6ulsseoojd SIMPON Add 8 XIPuaddy 320 d Device data latch processing time When the latch range is set the processing time shown below is required 1 Device data latch processing time N1 x KM1 N2 16 N3 x KM2 us N1 Number of device types specified to be latched N2 Number of bit device points specified to be latched 3 N3 Number of word device points specified to be latched 3 CPU module KM1 KM2 LO2CPU LO2CPU P 3 0 0 12 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 3 0 0 05 1 The scan time does not increase even if the latch range is set for the file register R ZR extended data register D or extended link register W 2 Count the latch range 1 and the latch range 2 as different device types 3 The scan time will not increase if the latch range is set for the file register ZR extended data register D or
228. get is used in the interrupt program In the interrupt program do not use any refresh target device 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms r T gt gt Interrupt factor Interrupt program execution Link refresh execution Link refresh is suspended and interrupt program is executed For the Block data assurance per station setting refer to the following MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual f When an interrupt factor occurs during END processing When the constant scan function is used and an interrupt factor occurs during the waiting time in END processing an interrupt program corresponding to the interrupt factor is executed g When an interrupt factor occurs during access to another module When an interrupt factor occurs during access to another module during service processing or instruction processing the interrupt program becomes standby status until the service processing or the instruction in execution is completed To shorten the wait time of the interrupt reduce the amount of data that access to other modules 4 Processing at program execution type change When the program execution type is changed from the scan execution type to the interrupt the CPU module saves and restores the following data 2 gt Page 266 Section 5 6 3 Data in the index register File register block number Whether to save and restore the data above can be set by para
229. gt New New Project Project Type Simple Project hd Use Label PLC Series LCPU y PLC Type LO2 LO2 P y Language Ladder v Item Description Project Type Select a type of project to create In this chapter Simple Project is selected Use Label Select this checkbox when using a label for programming In this chapter this is not selected PLC Series Select a series of the CPU module to use in the project In this chapter LCPU is selected PLC Type Select a type of the CPU module CPU module model to use in the project In this chapter L02 is selected Language Select a language of the program data to use for the new project In this chapter Ladder is selected 22 CHAPTER 1 BASIC PROCEDURE FOR PROGRAMMING 1 3 Creating a Program 1 3 1 Prior knowledge for creating a program 1 Device and constants Devices and constants such as shown below are used for creating a program gt Page 230 CHAPTER 5 Pi ES Device xo MO Ki00 To TO Y30 Xi BIN Kaxio DO Constant X41 x FROM H5 KO Did Ki 2 Concept of I O numbers 1 0 numbers are automatically assigned Power CPU Output Supply module module module 0000 to 000F Users can also assign I O numbers according to their purposes 2 gt 7 Page 39 Section 2 2 UeJ6ojld e 6uleeJD g 3 Program configuration A main routing program subroutine pr
230. hanged to STOP when a stop error occurs a Output status when entering the STOP status When entering the STOP status the CPU module saves data in the output Y and turns off all outputs The device memory other than that of the output Y will be held 3 Operation processing in the PAUSE status PAUSE status is a status where program operations are stopped after operations are performed for one scan holding the output and device memory status 46 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 4 Operation processing in the CPU module when switch operation is performed The operation processing of CPU module performs the following according to the RUN STOP status CPU module operation processing RUN STOP Program Device memory status operation External output j M L S T C D Y processing The CPU module The CPU module saves the The CPU module saves the executes the output Y status immediately The CPU module holds the device memory output Y status immediately RUN 3 STOP program until the before its status is changed to status immediately before its status is before its status is changed to END instruction STOP and turns off all the changed to STOP STOP and turns off all the and stops outputs outputs The CPU module holds the device memory The CPU module The CPU module outputs data status immediately before its status is The CPU module outputs data executes the according to the output mode changed to STOP accord
231. he socket communication function Set parameters when using the file FTP Setti SS transfer FTP function Time setting Set parame er when using the time n e setting function A Enable or disable writing data in Enabieonline devices or files to the running CPU change FTP MC 10164 g Selected deselected Deselected module when MC protocol or FTP is Protocol used Enable or disable direct connection Disable direct to MELSOFT connection to To enhance the security with the Selected deselected Deselected MELSOFT remote password setting select this to disable Do not respond to Disables response to the find CPU h for CPU functi f the MELSOFT SPa ae si raked Selected deselected Deselected Built in Ethernet connection port on network To enhance the security select this Simple PLC Set parameters when using the Communication 10194 simple PLC communication Reference MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In Ethernet Function 310 APPENDICES Appendix 1 2 12 Built in I O Function Setting Parameters required for use of the built in I O function are set L Parameter Setting PLC Name PLc System Puc File Puc RAS Boot File Program sFc Device jo Assignment Built in Ethernet Port Setting Built in I O Function Setting Positioning High speed Counter Positioning Axis 1 Setting High speed Counter CH1 Setting Setting condition Not used Used Positioning Axis 2 Setting High speed Counte
232. he END instruction in the scan next to the one where the PAUSE contact turns on Point When setting a PAUSE contact set a RUN contact as well Setting of only a PAUSE contact is not allowed 111 b Using a programming tool Open the Remote Operation dialog box O Online gt Remote Operation c By an external device using the MC protocol Use MC protocol commands Select PAUSE for execution jan Channel Connection Interface tation No lt gt fic mode lost PLC Type 26BT Execute MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 2 When forcibly keeping output status To forcibly keep the output status on or off in the PAUSE status provide an interlock with the PAUSE contact SM204 M20 x0 SM204 MO SM204 112 Yi0 Y71 Y72 In the PAUSE status on off status of Y70 depends on that of M20 Turns off in the PAUSE status Turns on in the PAUSE status CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 13 3 Remote RESET This operation externally resets the CPU module when the CPU module is in the STOP status Even if the switch of the CPU module is in the RUN position this operation can be performed when the module is stopped due to an error Use this function when an error occurred in the CPU module that is beyond the reach 1 Executing method There are two methods for performing the remote RESE
233. he high speed timer is specified The same device is used for the low and high speed retentive timers and the type is determined according to the instruction used Ex For the OUT STO instruction the low speed retentive timer is specified and for the OUTH STO instruction the high speed retentive timer is specified 242 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 3 Low speed timer This type of timer measures time in increments of 1 to 1000ms The default is 100ms in increments of 1ms Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System Timer Limit Setting Enter a value gt Low Speed 100 ms 1ms 1000ms High Speed 10 00 ms 0 01ms 100ms Timer counting starts when its coil is turned on and the contact is turned on when the current value reaches the set value The timer s coil is turned off the current value is changed to 0 and the contact is turned off Program example XO Kid T0 gt When X0 is turned on coil of TO turns on and the contact turns on after 1s when unit of the timer is set to 100ms Timing Chart XO Coil of TO Contact of TO 4 High speed timer This type of timer measures time in increments of 0 01 to 100ms The default is 10 0ms in increments of 1ms Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System Timer Limit Setting Low Speed 100 ms 1ms 1000ms Enter a value gt High Speed 1900 ms 0 01ms 100ms The timer
234. he operating status RUN STOP of the CPU module Note however that only input can be forcibly turned on off during a stop error The CPU module outputs on off data only to device Y b Registerable devices Forced on off can be registered as many as the number of I O device points in the CPU module c Target input output Input X and output Y of modules used in the built in MO function Input X and output Y of connected modules Input X and output Y of the CPU module to be refreshed from RX RY of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module or the CC Link system master local module including built in CC Link function 121 d Forced on off timing Refresh area Timing During END processing input refresh At execution of the COM instruction input refresh At execution of an instruction using direct access input DX and direct access output DY At execution of the RFS or MTR instruction At execution of an instruction used for a system Input and output used in the built in 1 0 function Input and output of modules connected Input and output of the CPU module to be refreshed from RX RY of the CC Link IE Field During END processing auto refresh Network master local module or the CC Link At execution of the COM instruction auto refresh system master local module including built in At execution of the ZCOM instruction auto refresh CC Link function e N
235. heck column Creating projects Creating programs Converting programs Writing projects Y Checking operations M Saving projects Y End 20 Create projects with GX Works2 Page 22 Section 1 2 Create programs Page 23 Section 1 3 Convert created programs into ones that can be processed by the CPU module CF Page 24 Section 1 4 Write the projects to the CPU module For the first use of the CPU module format the used memory beforehand Page 25 Section 1 5 Debug the programs using the monitoring function L gt Page 27 Section 1 6 Save the projects Page 29 Section 1 7 CHAPTER 1 BASIC PROCEDURE FOR PROGRAMMING 1 1 System Configuration Example The following system configuration is used for description throughout this chapter CPU module LO2CPU Input module LX42C4 Output module LY42NT1P Power supply module A A END cover L6EC USB connection GX Works2 1 Wiring of the power supply module and I O modules are omitted in this illustration ajdwex3 uoyelnbByuoo uaelsAS LL 21 1 2 Creating a Project A project is a set of information such as programs and parameters which is necessary to operate a programmable controller The following two projects are available e Simple project Structured project Create a new project using GX Works2 O Project
236. hentication not required Password authentication Operation Command Data write Data read Deleting a file of a CPU module delete O Reading a file of a CPU module get O Deleting a file of a CPU module mdelete O Reading a file of a CPU module mget O Changing the file name of a CPU module rename O Changing or displaying the file attribute of a CPU module change O Authenticate a password by using the password authentication FTP command Operation Command name Disable Password Write quote passwd wr lt password character string gt Disable Password Read quote passwd rd lt password character string gt For details on commands refer to the following OAJ MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In Ethernet Function 3 By the MC protocol To access a password protected file from the outside by using the MC protocol the request message format of the MC protocol must be changed and a command must be specified for the file password 32 1 Append Keyword at the end of the request message and set a password in that area 2 Authenticate the password using the password set to Keyword 3 For the commands requiring password authentication specify 0004 subcommand in a request massage as a command for the password 32 Function Command subcommand File delete 1822 0004 File attribute change 1825 0004 File copy 1824 0004 File open 1827 0004 For
237. igent function module device UD GD 2 e File register R ZR Extended data register D Extended link register W 4 The initial device value setting has a priority over the latch setting 2 To use an intelligent function module select Module Synchronization because the initial device value may not be correctly set to the target module gt Page 292 Appendix 1 87 88 3 Initial device value setting m Device Initial Value Not Used Use the same file name as the program Corresponding Memory y Use the Following file Corresponding Memory Memory Card SD Drive 2 File Name r Language y Data Type Device Initial Value he Cancel Data Name esult Type Device Initial Value MAIN Points Start a The device range and the device data that is set above will be write to PLC You must execute Device Memory Diversion operation when the device initial range setting is changed Setting Method startjend Device Memory Points Start j Device Memory Diversion for Diversion Poo o oj Deve Memory Diversion Print Preview Print setting OK y To the next page Specify a memory and name to store initial device values O Project Window lt gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC File Specify a name to stor
238. il of a timer is on do not make the OUT TO or OUT STO instruction jumped to any other part with another instruction such as CJ For subroutine programs where a timer is provided and a coil is on use the timer once in each scan c Programs that cannot use timers Timers cannot be used in interrupt programs and fixed scan execution programs d When the set value is 0 The contact turns on when the OUT TO or OUT STO instruction is executed 246 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES e Timer setting value and timer limit setting Set the timer to meet the following condition Timer setting value Scan time Timer limit setting L Parameter Setting PLC Name PLC System PLC Fie PLCI Hiem 4 SD526 SD527 Timer Limit Setting 100 Low Speed ms lms High Speed 10 00 ms 0 01n If the values are set to become Timer setting value lt Scan time Timer Limit Setting the coil and the contact might be simultaneously turned on depending on the timing on which the coil is turned on If the setting does not meet the above condition make the value of the timer limit setting smaller to meet the condition Ex Make the value of the timer limit setting smaller by changing from low speed timer to high speed timer Assume that the scan time is 20ms Before change low speed timer After change high speed timer H K10 To L Parameter Setting L Parameter Setting C File PLCI PLC Name PLC File P
239. ime If the interrupt disabled time by the DI instruction becomes too long use an interrupt program by fixed scan interrupt 128 to 131 instead of a fixed scan execution type program 1 This is the highest common factor of execution interval set to multiple fixed scan execution type programs When the condition 1 is satisfied the actual execution interval of a fixed scan execution type program may increase from the preset interval by the time shown in the expression below Interrupt disabled time Fixed scan execution interval set to Highest common factor of fixed the corresponding program scan execution interval The following shows an example of the increase in execution time of a fixed scan execution type program Ex Fixed scan execution intervales 10ms 5ms 1ms 0 5ms e Highest common factor of fixed scan execution interval 0 5ms Interrupt disabled time Dl 5ms Interrupt enabled time El less than 0 5ms With the settings above the condition 1 will be 0 5ms lt 5ms nth scan s n 1 th scans DI Program execution operation Interrupt enabled status Disabled Interrupt disabled time 5ms Interrupt disabled time 5ms The execution time of a fixed scan execution type program whose execution interval is set to 10ms increases 100ms 5 0 5 x 10 100 at the most 70 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 2 8 5 Changing the program execution type Th
240. ime Page 82 Section 3 2 Watchdog timer WDT Monitors operational delays caused by hardware failure or program error of the Page 84 Section 3 3 CPU module Latch function Holds the device data of the CPU module Page 85 Section 3 4 Initial device value Registers data used in programs without programs Page 87 Section 3 5 Service processing setting Specifies the service processing count or time to be executed in END processing Page 90 Section 3 6 Output mode at operating status change STOP to RUN Input response time setting Sets the output mode when operation status of the CPU module is changed from STOP to RUN Sets input response time values for modules such as the input module Page 96 Section 3 7 Page 97 Section 3 8 Error time output mode setting Sets whether to clear or hold the output status to each module at the time of a stop error of the CPU module Page 98 Section 3 9 PLC operation mode at H W error setting File password 32 Sets a operation mode of the CPU module when a hardware error CPU module detects SP UNIT DOWN occurred in an intelligent function module Prohibits writing reading data to from each file in the CPU module Page 99 Section 3 10 Page 100 Section 3 11 Remote Password Prevents unauthorized access from external devices using the built in Ethernet function or serial communication module Page 107 Section 3 12 Remote RU
241. ination drive was not completed 4335 1 Restoration started while latch data were being backed up to the standard ROM 410AH 1 Restoration started while data were being written in the RUN status w 42764 1 Restoration started during data logging w ro 4336H 1 Restoration started while a FTP client is connected to the CPU module in FTP connection ay i D 43304 Restoration started during another restoration Q c MFE e Restoration started without an SD memory card inserted or without the SD memory card lock switch slid down beg NN p e Restoration started while an SD memory card is disabled by SM606 SD memory card forced disable instruction gt 0 2 Q 2 5 If automatic restoration was not completed RESTORE ERROR error code 2225 to 2227 occurs Error code Error message Error cause The CPU module where data are restored is different model from the one where the backup source data are 2225 stored RESTORE ERROR Backup data file is corrupt The contents of backup data file do not match with the check code 2226 Reading of backup data from an SD memory card was not completed The SRAM card has been write protected so that Restore for the first time only setting can not take effect 2227 Writing of backup data to the restoration destination drive was not completed pleg KoweW GS ym uonounJd aBueyo slInpoN Ndo 088 181 5 Functions that cannot be performed during restoration Fu
242. increments of file size units Reserved area for online change 500 steps Item Description File header This area stores data such as the name size and created date of files The file header size ranges from 43 to 59 steps 172 to 236 bytes depending on the setting made in the Device tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box Execution program This area stores the created program Reserved area for online change This area is used when the number of steps is increased after writing data in the RUN status Default 500 steps 2000 bytes After the online change is complete remaining number of steps for this area is displayed The setting value can be changed in the Online Data Operation dialog box It can be changed while online change is performed 37 sold ELZ Sell pue seuoweW Lz 4 Memory capacity a Units of file sizes When a file is written to the memory area the unit of the stored file depends on the CPU module and memory area to be written This unit is referred to as a file size unit Memory LO2CPU LO2CPU P L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 1 step 4 bytes Program memory Standard RAM 128 steps 512 bytes Standard ROM 128 steps 512 bytes 512 steps 2048 bytes 32K bytes SD memory card b Calculation example of memory capacity Ex Memory capacity when the parameters and program are written to the program memory Conditions Program file to be written
243. index modification using two points of the index register is available The following two kinds of methods can be used to specify the index register e Specify the range used for 32 bit index modification e Specify the 32 bit index modification using ZZ For details on specification of the index register refer to the following MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction 5 6 2 Standard device register Z By using the index register between register operations operations can be executed at a higher speed The index register used in this case is called the standard device resister MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction 1 Device number Since the standard device register is the same device as the index register pay attention not to use the same device number when using the index modification Z Jelsl6e solAep pJepuelS Z 9 9 Z 1a siBay solwed pepue g 19 siBay xepul 9 9 265 5 6 3 Saving and restoration of the index register The CPU module performs the following when switching from the scan execution type program to the interrupt fixed scan execution type program Saving and restoring the index register data Saving and restoring block numbers of the file register 1 Setting for saving and restoration Configure the setting for saving and restoration using a programming tool Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System Selecting this Interrupt Program
244. ing 1 The CPU module does not save index register 3 The index register values at program switching Pa values are not saved Interrupt fixed Scan execution Switching Restored Scan execution scan execution Execution program type program type program type program i i Passed Passed Index register value 7Z0 1 79 1 gt 570 3 Z0 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 Save area of index register Z0 0 1Z0 0 Z0 0 ZO 0 Z0 0 for scan execution type program 4 The ZO value is changed to 3 in the interrupt program Point When writing data to the index register use the ZPUSH or ZPOP instruction to save and restore the data MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction 3 Processing of file register block numbers 2 The CPU module restores the block numbers of the file register saved at 1 The CPU module saves the block numbers of program switching the file register and passes them at program ie switching Switching Interrupt fixed Restored Scan execution scan execution p type program type program Scan execution type program Block No of file register Execution program Passed RSET KO Block 1 0 Block 1 Restored S Block 1 Block 1 Save area Block 1 Block 1 1 S16 1 xepul y
245. ing When an error occurs at power on or during the RUN or STOP status of the CPU module the error is detected and displayed by the self diagnostic function and the CPU module stops an operation Note that errors cannot be detected by the function depending on error status or an instruction executed When the operation is not stopped by the function configure a safety circuit external to the programmable controller so that the entire system operates safely 2 Storage location of error information and error check When the CPU module detects an error SMO and SM1 turn on and the error information error code are stored in SDO When several errors are detected the latest error code is stored in SDO Use SMO SM1 or SDO in a program as an interlock for the programmable controller and mechanical system Also it can be checked by the on status of the ERR LED 3 Checking error history The latest error history error description can be checked in the Error history area W Diagnostics gt PLC Diagnostics PLC Diagnostics Monitor Status Connection Channel Monitorir e Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image IRE Model Name Operation Status Switch RUN UN L L26CPU BT The Function menu is extended from the PLC image Error Information Error Information C Continuation Error Information PLC Status Information Current Error 3 Error Jump Error Clear Error
246. ing time A 5ms 2ms 6ms ms 5ms 2ms 7ms ms 7ms eet at gt Scan time for multiple programs with constant scan setting 10ms Execution of program A Execution of program B Execution of program C a END processing gt Waiting time 8ms emg 9ms ms 10ms 10ms 2 Constant scan time setting The setting range is from 0 5 to 2000ms in increments of 0 5ms When not using the constant scan function leave the setting box blank Project window gt Parameter lt gt PLC Parameter 2 gt PLC RAS Constant Scanning Enter a value 100 0 ms 0 Sms 2000ms The constant scan accuracy is 0 01ms However constant scan time may increase when an interrupt program or a fixed scan execution type program is being executed 82 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS a Condition Set a value that satisfies the following relational expression WDT setting time gt Constant scan setting time gt Maximum scan time of the program If the program scan time is longer than the constant scan setting time the CPU module detects PRG TIME OVER error code 5010 In this case the constant scan setting is ignored and the program scan time is applied When constant scan time is set to 4ms 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 Program execution h 4 H 0 5ms 0 2ms 0 6ms 3 5ms 3 8ms 3 4ms 4ms 5 3ms 4ms 4ms Scan where scan time is increased If the program scan time is longer than the WDT setting time
247. ing to the output mode STOP RUN program from the Parameter setting Note that the CPU module uses initial parameter setting step 0 3 Page 96 Section 3 7 device values if those values are present Page 96 Section 3 7 Local device data are cleared Point The CPU module performs the following in any of the RUN STOP or PAUSE status e Refresh processing with I O modules Refresh processing with CC Link IE Field Network master local module e Auto refresh processing with intelligent function modules e Intelligent function module dedicated instruction processing completion processing only Self diagnostics processing Service processing Special relay special register value setting only for those that should be set during END processing Even if the CPU module is in the STOP or PAUSE status the following operations can be executed 1 0 monitor or test operation from a programming tool e Read Write data from to external devices using the MC protocol snes Bunelado y9e3 JO elnpolN Add eu Jo 6ulsseoojd vonelado yz 47 2 5 Operation Processing During Momentary Power Failure When the input voltage supplied to the power supply module drops below the specified range the CPU module detects a momentary power failure and performs the following operation 1 When a momentary power failure occurs for a period shorter than the allowable power failure time The CPU module registers error d
248. ion Not used C Use the Following file Corresponding Memory y Capacity al K Points 1K 512K Points File Name File Name Acknowledge XY Assignment Default Parameter ee Item No Description Setting range Default Reference File Register 110044 Set a file for the file register used in the Not used ae Use the following Page 268 program Use the following file file Section 5 7 Transfer to Standard Select whether to batch transfer the Page 162 ROM at Latch data 1104 data in the file register at the time of Selected deselected en 3 97 backup operation latch data backup to the standard ROM 4 Not used Comment File Used in a Set a file for device comments used in Use the same file name as 11014 Not used Command the program the program Use the following file Not used Initial Device Value 11024 Set a file for initial values of the devices Use the same file name as Not used Page 87 used for the CPU module the program Section 3 5 Use the following file File for Local Device 11034 Set a file for local devices used in the Not used Not used Page 286 program Use the following file Section 7 2 File used for sera device data storage file used for sNobused Page 167 SP DEVST S DEVLD 11054 writing to or reading from the standard sags Not used A Use the following file Section 3 28 Instruction ROM 298 Appendix 1 2 4 PLC RAS Setting Parameters required fo
249. ion the CPU module operates according to the specified operation mode Mode that stops CPU module operation Stop The output mode setting in the detailed setting CPU module operation from the I O Assignment tab to When an error is detected the CPU module stops an operation and turns off all Clear external outputs of the module Outputs Y of the device memory are held When an error is detected the CPU module stops an operation and holds external Hold outputs of the module Outputs Y of the device memory are held Mode that continues CPU module operation Continue When an error is detected the CPU module executes programs other than the one instruction where an error occurred a Errors selectable in the PLC RAS tab e Computation Error including SFC program e Intelligent Module Program Execution Error e File Access Error e Memory Card Operation Error Set the operation mode for the case of an error Project window gt Parameter lt gt PLC Parameter lt gt PLC RAS Operating Mode When There is an Error Computation Error Stop _y lt Select the operation mode Expanded Command Error Fuse Blown Module Verify Error Intelligent Module Program Execution Error Stop File Access Error Stop Lel Let Lot Memory Card Operation Error Stop uoqound ogsou6elq JleS EZE External Power Supply OFF b Errors selectable in the I O Assignment t
250. ion clears the higher priority error To execute the LEDR S 5 instruction remove the error whose priority is higher than that of the annunciator o 2 58 D n LED indication When all of the annunciator numbers in SD64 to SD79 turn off the USER LED will turn off 239 5 2 7 Link special relay SB The link special relay SB is a relay that indicates communication status and error detection status of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module or the CC Link system master local module The relay is turned on or off according to various factors that occur during data link Status of the data link can be confirmed by monitoring the link special relay 11 Manuals for each network module 5 2 8 Edge relay V The edge relay V is a device in which the on off information from the beginning of the ladder block Contacts only can be used Coils cannot be used The edge relay of the same number cannot be set XO Xi X10 vi T La on off information of X0 X1 and X10 Ex Detecting a leading edge and execute it in the program configured using index modification Program example SM400 MOV KO zi Clears index register Z1 4 Specifies the number of repeats 10 times Turns on MOZ1 for 1 scan followed FOR K10 xozi 1 vazi a Mazi by rise of XOZ1 SM400 ING zi Increments 1 index register Z1 NEXT J Returns to FOR instruction
251. ir heey dae ae Pa he og dis Maeve Bites 41 2 35 Scan Time Struct Sm it A Dra 43 2 33 lnitialiprocessing iee vp A 43 2 3 2 Refresh processing of input output modules or intelligent function modules 44 2 3 3 Program operation caida Woh a A tia ee Oke ada 44 2 34 END Processing e cia Ate 45 2 4 Operation Processing of the CPU Module for Each Operating Status 46 2 55 Operation Processing During Momentary Power Failure 0 0 0 008 48 2 6 Processing of Inputs and Outputs 49 2 6 1 Refresh PLOCESSING sy sam nd E IR A a Melee RE 49 2 6 2 Direct proCeSSing iii a A A ay ora eae we oe eae aes 52 2 0 Interrupt Program sista a eyed eens eh od Chee Rae VA A ea hes 54 2 8 Executing Multiple Programs 4 60 2 8 1 Initial execution type program i 62 2 8 2 Scan execution type program 1 eee 64 2 8 3 Standby typeipregiar iii a sah te RERE a Std watts aad renee tada 65 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 8 4 Fixed scan execution type program 0 cee ee nee eee 68 2 8 5 Changing the program execution type 6 cence ene nna 71 Boot Operation bcs ah arse ee ira Sle i hee ek dnde 73 Programming Langyuage et 75 Communications with Intelligent Function Modules 000 cece eee eee eee 76 PART 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 80 3 Function Lists sees de Sein Oh re ea en ets 80 3 27 GonstantS Canada cinerea Ae RN 82 3 3 Watchdog Timer WDT soi ett does nog hort ochre hie ad ee ahh
252. ision floating point data 1 21024 lt Device lt 21 2 0 271022 lt Device lt 21024 1 Up to 15 digits can be entered in a programming tool b When an overflow or underflow has occurred Overflow Underflow OPERATION ERROR error code 4141 Turned to 0 without any error c When a special value is input If operation is performed with input data that contains a special value OPERATION ERROR error code 4140 occurs 4 The special values are 0 unnormalized numbers nonnumeric characters and too 2 Specification method Real numbers can be specified in programs by the following expressions Normal expression A numeric value can be specified as it is Ex 10 2345 can be specified as E10 2345 e Exponential expression A numeric value is specified by Value x 10 Ex 1234 is specified as E1 234 3 1 3 represents 10 in E1 234 3 6 4 Character String The character string is a device used to specify a character string in program Characters enclosed in quotation marks are specified Alphabets are case sensitive A string from the specified character to the NUL code 00H is one unit Note that however up to 32 characters can be specified for an instruction using a character string such as MOV 284 CHAPTER 7 CONVENIENT USAGE OF DEVICES CHAPTER 7 CONVENIENT USAGE OF DEVICES When multiple programs are executed in the CPU module each program can be executed independently by
253. it A liquid crystal display to be attached to the CPU module Battery A battery to be installed in the CPU module and used for backing up data such as the standard RAM data and latch device data in case of power failure The Q6BAT and Q7BAT are available SD memory card Secure Digital Memory Card which is a flash memory device The L1MEM 2GBSD and L1MEM 4GBSD are available Extension cable The abbreviation for the MELSEC L series extension cable LCPU Another term for the MELSEC L series CPU module QnUCPU Another term for the MELSEC Q series Universal model QCPU Programming tool A generic term for GX Works2 and GX Developer GX Works2 The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers GX Developer CC Link The abbreviation for Control amp Communication Link A field network system where data processing for control and information can be simultaneously performed at high speed Main block A block where a CPU module is connected in an extension system Extension block A block where an extension module is connected in an extension system 18 PART a In this part fundamental knowledge of programming is described CHAPETR 1 BASIC PROCEDURE FOR PROGRAMMING 20 CHAPETR 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING i 30 19 CHAPTER 1 BASIC PROCEDURE FOR PROGRAMMING This chapter describes the basic procedure for programming Start C
254. jo UONeJO Se1 pue Bulnes 9 G Z 1a siBay solwed pepue g 1a siBay xepul 9 9 267 5 7 File Register R ZR These device are provided for extending the data register DO Data register 1 Specification methods AOS DO 12K points gt RO The following two methods are available e Block switching method R Serial number access method ZR a Block switching method R The file register points used are divided and specified in units of 32K points RO to R32767 When multiple blocks are used the desired block is specified with the block number by the RSET instruction T Mov T Mov H rrer Bo A Ren BO 7 RO specification for block 1 Data register File register J RO RO 7 RO specification for block 2 R32767 RO RO b Serial number access method ZR A file register exceeding 32K points in size can be specified using consecutive device numbers R32767 RO 12K points Data register can be extended Block O Block 1 Multiple blocks of a file register can be used as a continuous file register MOV mov 268 DO BO 2R32768 ZR65536 ZRO ZR32767 gt ZR32768 ZR65535 ZR65536 Block 0 Block 2 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 2 Bit structure of the file register One point of the file register consists of 16 bits and data can be
255. k E E F 2 RX HW A 9560 E ff f m E m Y ct E q 8 B 9570 a E ft RE Am BEB B F F Hh 4 9580 E F R B E EF EE A E E E M dE 9590 HE E 5 MM A Bw El E R 4 95A0 E E HH Y hh h Y y YH 5 B amp B H 95B0 E E 2 MM 3 X FH A A E KF E FT E A 9500 to k A E X E F F amp F 8 f 95D0 AF mI es EG Mm FH em fH 95E0 RH A E 5 B R RK 4 B amp B th Ff a 95F0 R 2 FH A M 9640 RR MU F FH BB ER FSF KH 8 fA 9650 Ba mM 2 t E 8 tt B tt B amp B E B 9660 a hh amp Ema FSF K du bh 3 9670 FF Xx E Ba mm MW a R FH N B 9680 E E E CE k R Kk E B amp B E Kh amp GE 9690 fe H TIT E Kk XA K BZ R MM EB FH B 96A0 S Kk KR E KF HH B Z B X B We MD FH RE 96B0 E g EX RS CB a E RE EG E 9600 a A B E t hk AAA Ms 24 E E FE zz 96D0 LL E kt B E 2 E K KR B FD HK R 96E0 y E Mm E Xx 9 66 BH FF mm R EBE 96FO ZE YU E f E Kk E the DR q fh 9740 E E A B E E U K E E A WH FB 9750 am EX WA A SF EM F F 9760 E E E SI tk A B amp B amp EE E RR E FB 9770 E E KR M 2 b E amp 9780 KR R tl ME KF BH FB BH RC BE 9790 il DM A fil E E WN E NN E gt h Y AT 97A0 E ww HE K NN BR H B 97B0 m E E E GE R R E amp E x E CUB 9
256. k register SW SD Z R ZR T current value ST current value Word device C current value 1 Digit specified devices devices specified by indirect specification and bit specified devices cannot be set 2 Device test cannot be executed 3 Specifying a device to be monitored or tested Perform the following operation Device monitor screen 1 Press the lt button y Device selection screen 2 Selecta target device using the A and y buttons E E y Device No setting screen 3 Move the cursor using the 4 and gt buttons increase or decrease a device number using the A and buttons and press the button 3 The device number is displayed in decimal or hexadecimal according to the notation of each device Regardless of the notation the device number is displayed with the number of digits that can be set 194 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 4 Display format The following table shows display format available for device monitor test Numeric Been Format Bit display Remarks value Decimal A sign is appended for negative values only 16 bit integer Available Hexadecimal When a value is less than four digits 0 is assigned for the remaining digits Decimal A sign is appended for minus values only 32 bit integer Hexadecimal When a value is less than eight digits 0 is assigned for the remaining digits Real number Not available A value is displayed in fl
257. l or malfunction O After installation and wiring attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock Wiring Precautions CAUTION Ground the FG and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor dedicated to the programmable controller Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range If any spade solderless terminal is used it may be disconnected when a terminal block screw comes loose resulting in failure Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring to the module and connect the cables correctly Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure Connectors for external devices must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the manufacturer or must be correctly soldered Incomplete connections may cause short circuit fire or malfunction Securely connect the connector to the module Do nat install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact
258. l pointer can be divided for use of all the programs stored in the program memory The local pointer number ranges from PO to the highest number of the local pointer in use The CPU module s system computes the number of points used Even if only P99 is used in a program for example the number of points used will be 100 which is from PO to P99 For using the local pointer for several programs use the pointers in ascending order starting from PO in each program Ex The total is 600 points when the pointer is used as shown below Program A Program B Program C aon Using PO to P99 Using P100 to P199 Using P299 only oo TO O J a 100 points of PO to 200 points of PO to 300 points of PO to Total of 600 points 23 P99 occupied P199 occupied P299 occupied are used a UseofPoto T i g P99 occupies oor 100 points occupies 1 point L J a e Point O When the program where the local pointer is described the program cannot jump in from another program is not allowed Use the ECALL instruction from another program when calling a subroutine program in a program file that contains any local pointer O lf the total number of pointers in all programs exceeds 4096 points a CAN T SET P error code 4020 occurs 279 5 10 2 Common pointer The common pointer is used to call subroutine programs from all programs that are being executed Prog
259. le error collection Information on errors of the data logging file transfer File transfer error history function The data are backed up only when the serial number first five digits of the CPU module is 12112 or later SFC program continuation start A 4 Information to start the SFC program continuously information Trace condition settings and Trace data settings created by the sampling trace function Trace Setting Sampling trace file Data cannot be backed up in the following cases Trace setting is made in a memory card Trace setting is not registered with the CPU module 2 File size for storing backup data The following shows the file size of data to be backed up Data to be backed up File size Device data Internal user device index register standard device register Error history Sampling trace information Scan time measurement information SFC program continuation start information Module error collection file stored in system memory File transfer error history LO2CPU LO2CPU P 93802 bytes L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 117482 bytes 1 5 Module error collection file stored in standard RAM 92 64 x Maximum number of module error collection file stored Device data file register extended data register extended link register 64 2 x Number of file register points Trace setting sampling trace file gt 16 S
260. luwelaan 31 Haarlerbergweg 21 23 IL 42505 Netanya ax 33 0 BE 1800 Vilvoorde NL 1101 CH Amsterdam Phone 972 0 9 863 39 80 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V IRELAND Phone 32 0 2 257 02 40 Phone 31 0 20 587 76 00 Fax 972 0 9 885 24 30 Irish Branch Fax 32 0 2 257 0249 Fax 31 0 20 587 76 05 a EAN eee Park Ballymount INEA RBT d o o BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY Cebaco Center Block A Autostrade DORA shee u ele a Aleja Lipa 56 Postboks 487 Lebanon Beirut F sane 0 e 98890 BA 71000 Sarajevo NO 3002 Drammen Phone 961 0 1 240 430 ax 353 0 Phone 387 0 33 921 164 Phone 47 0 32 2430 00 Fax 961 0 1 240 438 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V ITALY Fax 387 0 33 524 539 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 tae AKHNATON BULGARIA Fonseca S A PORTUGAL l 500 rr pa str 4 Andrei Ljapchev Blvd PO Box 21 R Jo o Francisco do Casal 87 89 Ph E go I iama BG 1756 Sofia PT 3801 997 Aveiro Esgueira AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE oia Tensei Phone 359 0 2 817 6000 Phone 351 0 234 303 900 ant Fax 359 0 2 97 44061 Fax 351 0 234 303 910 CBI Ltd SOUTH AFRICA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V POLAND INEA RBT d o o CROATIA Sirius Trading amp Services stl ROMANIA Private Bag 2016 Poland Branch a 1 ZA 1600 lsando Krakowska 50 Losinjska 4a Aleea Lacul Morii Nr 3 Phone 27 0 11 977 0770 Pa da Bali HR 10000 Zagreb RO 060841 Bucuresti Sector 6 alas Fee Arkae 072 EM Phone 385 0 1 36 940 01 02 03
261. match the data in the program memory and those in the program cache memory 2 Execution timing The execution timing of this function is described below uonouny AieAooey olnV Howay eyoeD weJ6ojd YEE When the program is executed When data are verified or data are read from the programmable controller dd Note3 2 To confirm whether the CPU module supports the program cache memory auto recovery function or not check the version of the CPU module lt 7 Page 314 Appendix 2 187 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS A display unit is an LCD attachable to the CPU module Using a display unit allows checking system status and changing system setting values without software packages If an error occurs the error cause can be determined by displaying the error information Device monitor test Forced on off Checking changing the I O status and setting values of intelligent function module Error information log display Scan time display 1 Description of the buttons Unless otherwise specified buttons on a display unit operate as follows Type Name Description Moves the cursor up scrolls the screen up and increases values In the following screens pressing a device longer will incre
262. mber For instance when more than two CC Link IE Field Network master local modules are connected with the same network number the writing reading by the link direct device can be done only for the network module with the smaller slot number Ex When the CC Link IE Field Network master local modules Station No 1 and Station No 2 are connected as Network No 1 as shown below the usage of the link direct device is allowed only for the network module of Station No 2 Network No 1 o 0 0 Station Station No 2 No 1 Writng reading using link direct devices not allowed Writing reading using link direct devices allowed 4 Difference between the link direct device and the link refresh a The following table shows the difference between the link direct device and the link refresh hal 5 a Item Link direct device Link refresh 5 Q Link register JO WO0 to WO to o Notation in the program Link special relay JO SBO to SBO to D Link special register JO SWwo to SWO to R Number of steps 2 steps 1 step Access range of the CC Link IE Field Network master local The range that is set in the JONOO to 3FFF module Refresh Parameter Guaranteed range of access data 2 words 32 bits unit For the network parameters common parameters and refresh parameters refer to the following T MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual 261 5 5 Module Access Devices 5 5 1 I
263. meter When the data are not saved or restored the overhead time of the corresponding interrupt program can be shortened 2 gt Page 315 Appendix 3 1 58 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 5 Precautions a When the same device is used During execution of an instruction in a main routine program an interrupt program may be executed suspending the processing of the instruction being executed resulting in a device data inconsistency Take the following measures to prevent device data inconsistency Do not directly specify the device where the data are written by the interrupt program in the main routine program Use the data in another device by moving the data with the transfer instruction e Disable interrupts with the DI instruction if instructions that may cause inconvenience for the main routine program are used Note that interrupts do not occur during accessing the device of the corresponding argument of the instruction For this reason data inconsistency does not occur in units of arguments WeJ6ojd 1dnuaju z 59 2 8 Executing Multiple Programs Multiple programs can be stored in the CPU module by changing the file names of programs Dividing a program by process or function allows simultaneous programming by multiple engineers Control by one program Program A Control data A Program B Y Divide a program Dividing one program Control data B on the basis of each into multi
264. mory Up to 512 steps can be batch written 1 The reserved area for online change A program file has an area designated as reserved area for online change to support the one that changes number of steps The change in the number of steps does not affect the program file size if the change is within epow Jeppel aBueyo eulluO p LZ E snlelS NNy ul swWeJ6oud Bun LZE the reserved area for online change If more steps are required for the reserved area for online change during performing an online change change the setting 139 3 21 2 Online change files The files listed in the following table are batch written to the CPU module O Can be written A Cannot be written while the file is being accessed in the program x Cannot be written File name Program memory Standard RAM Standard ROM SD memory card Parameter x x x x Intelligent function module parameter x x x x Program O O O Device comment O x A A Initial device value x x x x File register x A x A Local device x x x x Sampling trace file x O x O Programmable controller user data x x O x 1 Online change files of SFC programs cannot be performed A file can be written to the CPU module in the RUN status regardless of space of a memory to be written and the number of files to be stored 1 Online change files from multiple locations Do nat simultaneously write files to one CPU module in the RUN status from mul
265. mple Coil of T1 is turned on for one scan after TO is turned on Ti K10 TO _4 Measures for 1 second when T1 is off TO K10 T1 Measures for 1 second after TO is turned on To MO Alternates on and off every second OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUTTO OUTTO OUT T1 OUT TA i OUT T1 OUT T1 OUT T1 OUT T1 END processing END processing END processing END processing essing END processing ON _ oe A Coil of TO OF FH y OFF Contact j of TO OFF l Y OFF curent 0X0 DK 9X10 10X0 j is gt ON Coil of T1 OFF A yoFF ON Contact of T1 OFF Y OFF Current Value of T1 0x1 1X2 9X10 10X0 900ms gt t Because current value is updated in a scan where TO is timed out the count starts from 1 or larger value 249 1S 1 Jewl 0FZ9 SeolAed SN eulaju Z S 5 2 11 Counter C The counter C is a device that counts the number of rises for input conditions in programs When the count value reaches the set value its contact is turned on 1 Counter type The following counter is available e Counter that counts the number of rises for input conditions in programs 2 Counting a When OUT CO instruction is executed The coil of the counter is turned on off the current value is updated the count value 1 and the contact is turned on In the END processing the current timer value is not updated and the contact is not turned on Program example xo Ki0 co
266. n The function is executed when the following conditions are all met e The CPU module is in RUN status Data in the program memory match those in the program cache memory Note that the function is not executed in the following conditions and RAM ERROR error code 1160 is detected even though the above conditions are met The change of data in the program cache memory was detected while the following operations were being performed with the CPU module during RUN e Online change of the program e Password registration to the program file Program memory batch download e Write device comment to the CPU module The change of data in the program cache memory was detected by SFC program The change of data in the program cache memory was detected by the dedicated instruction such as the S P instruction The change of data in the program cache memory was detected by the rise instruction or the fall instruction The data in the program cache memory was not restored due to the failure of the memory Point To match the data in the program memory and those in the program cache memory configure the setting to transfer the data of the program cache memory to the program memory from Options screen 1 237 Page 144 Section 3 21 3 5 O Tool gt Options 4 The transferring of the data in the program cache memory to the program memory is set by default Other than the above you can also use Program Memory Batch Download to
267. n 5 2 5 up to 29K words in Page 237 i E ge Annunciator 2048 FO to F2047 Decimal total s Section 5 2 6 Link ial P 240 PERRAS 2048 SBOtoSB7FF Hexadecimal ATIR relay Section 5 2 7 Internal user device Page 240 Ed 2048 VO to V2047 Deci ge rey E oo Section 5 2 8 a Select either OK point Page 241 St 8192 SO to S8191 D ety g PALT or 8K points Section 5 2 9 Bit device Timer 2048 TO to T2047 Decima Page 242 contacts and coils Retentive timer 0 STO to ST2047 Decima Section 5 2 10 e Word device y Page 250 current value Counter 1024 CO to C1023 Decima enteri Section 5 2 11 f Internal user device Page 253 Data register 12288 DO to D12287 Decima up to 29K words in Section 5 2 12 a Page 254 age Word device Link register 8192 WO to W1FFF Hexadecimal g Section 5 2 13 Page 255 Link regist 2048 SWO to SW7FF Hexadecimal ink register o exadecima Section 5 2 14 Function input 16 FXO to FXF Hexadecimal Page 256 P Function output 16 FYO to FYF Hexadecimal Section 5 3 1 Bit device P 258 Special relay 2048 SMO to SM2047 Decimal ge Internal system Section 5 3 2 eS Cannot be set Page 256 Functi ist 5 FDO to FD4 Decimal unction register o ecima Section 5 3 1 Word device Page 258 Special regist 2048 SDO to SD2047 Decimal pecial register o ecima Section 5 3 3 230 To the next page CHAPTER 5 DEVICES ona Default Parameter se
268. n allows to set the time and the number of times of service processing performed at END processing by parameters By using this function communications with a peripheral can be improved and the extended scan time due to service processing can be shortened Point O The service processing setting can be configured for the following communications Communication via an intelligent function module not including refresh with a network module Communication via a USB cable RS 232 adapter or the built in Ethernet ports communication with a programming tool or GOT or using the built in Ethernet function O Using the COM instruction enables the service processing during program execution while the processing is normally performed during END processing Use this function when the scan time is long CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 1 Setting method Configure the setting of the service processing Project Window lt gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System Service Processing Setting Select any one option button Execute the process as the scan 10 Deselected parameters remain SP time proceeds unavailable Specify service process time ms 0 2ms 1000ms Specify service process e oe execution counts Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting Execute the process as the scan time proceeds is selected by default Item Description Setting range Remarks
269. n execution type prograM o o o o o 64 Scan time measurement 115 Scan time monitor i 207 Scan time structure i 43 Strolling vo ias He ee oi 191 SD Memory card i 31 Self diagnostic function 148 Service processing Setting 90 Service processing time 321 Setting file passwords ooooooo o o 100 SE A RA 75 SFC block device BL i 282 SFC SettinGg oa a een ce ge my eee od 303 Simultaneous monitoring from multiple programming 1O0ISia otha ee Aa lace tec 146 Source information i 32 Special register SD 055 258 Special relay SM i 258 ST bn re a np O A 75 Standard device register 2 265 Standard RAM srank De san 31 Standard ROM i 31 Standby screen i 190 Standby type program 9 65 Start XY setting o oooooooooo 42 St p relay ico tan dai AS 241 STOP status tacon ls a is 46 Structured ladder 0000 e eee 75 T Time required for each processing included in scan time A cata ic be et On Eat Saree tele dated a ER 315 Time taken to collect module errors 324 Timer Ty ST ate A a aA 242 Transfer confirmation to the program memory 31 U UnderlOW lt lt tias Me palate Bee oaks Wee 284 Use of local devices i 322 User message iaa did es ods ed dado Rate 224 W Watchdog timer WDT o a anana aaau 84 Writing Programs in RUN Status 139 Writing to the
270. n for backup 1 Set the CPU module to the STOP status 2 Set the SD memory card so that the card can be removed from the CPU module 1 Check that the preparation for backup is completed by the following methods Check the LEDs Check the special relay and special register a SM691 is on b 2h is stored in SD690 2 Remove the SD memory card 3 Insert an SD memory card for storing backup data 4 Turn on the backup start contact Back up data Check that the backup is completed by Check for backup error 1 the following methods Check the LEDs Check the LEDs Check the special relay and special Check the special relay and special register register a SM691 is on a SM691 is on b 4h is stored in SD690 b FFh is stored in SD690 c An error cause is stored in SD689 Operation by the CPU module Operation by the user 1 Since SM691 Backup start preparation status flag is on data can be backed up again by turning off and then on the backup start contact 174 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS If the backup start contact is turned on while the value in SD690 is 0H Before backup start or 1H Backup start prepared data are not backed up If the backup start contact is on before the value in SD690 becomes 24 Backup start preparation completed turning off and then on the backup start contact again
271. n is datato a ors ea angen performed again programming tool performed again l y 2 Restoration in execution 2 Restoration in execution Restoration failed Restoration is completed Restoration failed Restoration is completed Yy Y Y 4 Restoration error 3 Restoration completed 4 Restoration error 3 Restoration completed Restoration is suspended gt End End After restoration power off After restoration the CPU module and then on or reset the CPU module can continue operation Powering off and then on the CPU module or resetting the CPU module is not necessary 4 Once a restoration is started the following functions are stopped They are not resumed after restoration e Refresh of a network module e Auto refresh of intelligent function module e Simple PLC communication function 2 Do not perform the following operations during restoration Inserting or removing an SD memory card uonesolsel eyep dnyoeg z 0 pleg Aioway GS ym uoyouny aBueyo slInpoN Ndo 088 e Power off e Reset Status Description SD693 value Before restoration start Restoration is not performed 0H Restoration in execution Restoration is in execution 1H Restoration completed Restoration is completed 2H Restoration error Restoration failed due to an error FFH After restoration is completed SM692 turns on Before restoration Restoration in 1 Restoration Star
272. n type program in the course of program execution An unused scan execution type program can also be changed to a standby type program When MO turns on the program ABC is changed from a standby N type to a scan execution l type program When M1 turns on the program ABC is changed from a scan execution type to a standby type program Control program MO PECAN M1 PSTOP c PSCAN PSTOP ABC ABC DEF DEF E The PSCAN instruction changes d the program ABC to a scan execution type program The PSTOP instruction changes the program ABC to a standby type program Standby type program ABC Standby type program DEF Standby type program GHI Standby type program JKL CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 2 9 Boot Operation CPU modules can be operated according to the program and parameters stored in an SD memory card Operating a CPU module by reading out boot those data are called boot operation The files that can be booted are as follows O Bootable x Not bootable 4 Boot destination File name Boot source Program memory Standard ROM Parameter O O Program O x Device comment SD memory card O O Device initial value O O Label program O O 1 Executing a program The programs specified in the Boot File tab are boot
273. n when a refresh occurs When write to the link device by using the link direct device write the same data to the corresponding device of the CPU module which is set in the Refresh Parameter Ex Writing to the link device which is set as the refresh range Settings of the refresh parameter Network number 1 Device of the CPU module WO to 3F Device of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module SWO to 3F Program _ _ 100 is written to CC Link IE field MOV K100 W1 network master local module SW1 when a a refresh occurs MOV w1 JN SW1 H 100 is written to CC Link IE field 7 network master local module SW1 when the MOV instruction is executed Writing timing CC Link IE field network CPU module master local module MOV K100 W1 Writing at instruction MOV W1 J1 SW1 a E WO y 1 W1 SW1 Writing at instruction execution Writing by a refresh When the writing by the link direct device is done in the write range of the other station the data will be replaced with the received data during the data reception from the other station 260 b Reading CHAPTER 5 DEVICES The reading of the link device range of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module can be done The writing reading by the link direct device can be done only for a single CC Link IE Field Network master local module per network nu
274. nctions that cannot be performed during restoration are the same as those cannot be performed during backup gt Page 178 Section 3 30 1 5 6 Precautions a When boot settings are configured If any parameter in the SD memory card has been set for booting the data are overwritten according to the boot setting even restoration is executed b When file password 32 is configured Even if a file in the CPU module is protected by password 32 restoration continues c Combination of CPU modules for restoration If the model of the CPU module where data is restored is different from the model of the CPU module where backup data is stored Restoration error occurs However using the CPU modules of the following combinations allows completion of backup and restoration e LO2CPU and LO2CPU P e L26CPU BT and L26CPU PBT 182 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 31 Clock Function This function is used for clock data management such as storing a date into the error history by reading internal clock data of the CPU module Clock data are retained the battery of a CPU module even after power off or a momentary power failure is occurred exceeding the allowable period of time 1 Clock data details Clock data Description Year Four digits 1 from 1980 to 2079 Month 1 to 12 Year 1 to 31 Automatic leap year detection Hour 0 to 23 24 hours Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 Day of the week 0 Sunday 1 Mon
275. nd graph setting A A trend graph is displayed a gt 2 Select Start Trace WO Debug lt gt Sampling Trace lt gt Start Trace b Stop When a trace is stopped the number of traces counted is cleared To resume the trace select Start Trace again O Debug lt gt Sampling Trace lt gt Stop Trace To clear the execution status perform a remote latch clear operation 2 gt Page 114 Section 3 13 4 To perform the trace operation again after the latch clear operation select Start Trace 136 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS c Execution of a trigger After completing a trace execute a trigger W Debug gt Sampling Trace gt Execute Manual Trigger After a trigger is completed trace results are displayed on Sampling Trace window Point The sampling trace can be performed from other stations in the network or serial communication modules Note that these functions cannot be simultaneously performed from several sites ae Bulldwes oze 137 138 7 Precautions a Holding and clearing the trace setting The trace setting sampling trace file registered with the CPU module is latched Even if the CPU module is powered off and then on or is reset the sampling trace can be performed again with the trace setting at registration However the previous trace result cannot be read Also in the following cases even when the trigger condition is established th
276. nd step 6 The end step is 5 JMP PO 5 JMP PO i a skipped Byte IMP End step 9 instruction ff SS SS SSS SS 2 7 HL 7 4 k m e e e PO 9 9 PO 11 14 END When the end step is executed before the start step When the start step is executed continuously Ex The start step is specified as the next step of the CALL instruction and Ex Only the start step is specified between the FOR and NEXT instructions the end step is specified in a subroutine program executed by the CALL instruction i 1m ol CALL PO A Start step 3 FOR K2 f A r 3 Start step 8 The start step is executed e am 8 L y E t after the end step by the CALL The start step is executed zl me instruction 5 FEND 1 continuously since it is specified Cenasepe between the FOR and NEXT 10 TNEXT po F instructions Hee E enews ___ n HH 3 2 9 RET 116 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 15 Program List Monitor This function displays the processing time of the program being executed The scan time number of execution times and processing time by item can be displayed for each program 1 Execution Open the Program List Monitor dialog box Online gt Monitor lt gt Program List Program List Monitor Entire Scan Time Monitoring Time ms Total
277. nd write password can be set individually Alternatively one same password can be specified for both read write passwords e Applicable characters ASCII characters numbers alphabets special characters 2 e Number of characters applicable 4 to 32 characters 1 Alphabets are case sensitive 2 Special characters are the following amp _ lt gt and spaces 2 Timing for file protection to be enabled disabled Files are protected immediately after registration of a password and file protection is disabled immediately after deletion of the password 3 Files that can be password protected The following files can be protected by a password e Program Parameter e Initial device value Device comment Source information 4 Online operations that require password authentication Password authentication is required for the following operations whenever the file is password protected lt gt Page 105 Section 3 11 2 e Write to PLC data writing e Read from PLC data reading e Online change ladder mode data writing e Online change files data writing Change T C setting data writing e Verify with PLC data reading e Create Change or Delete of a password data Delete PLC Data data writing reading and writing 100 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 5 Creating changing deleting and canceling passwords a Creating and changing Open the Create Change Password di
278. ndard ROM can be read at any given timing by using an instruction 1 Setting procedure Set the area where device data are stored to the standard ROM Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC File File used for SP DEYST S DEYLD Instruction C Not used Use the Following file Corresponding Memory y File N Set a file size bate The file name is fixed to gt Capacity 1 K Points DEVSTORE 1K 512K Points 2 Devices that can be written Internal user device X Y M L B F SB V T ST C D W SW Internal system device SM SD e File register R ZR Extended data register D Extended link register W 3 Execution method Use the SP DEVST instruction to write device data to the standard ROM The device data written to the standard ROM are read to the specified device by the S P DEVLD instruction For details refer to the following Lo MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction WOJ plepuelS woyo eleq soled Bulpesy 6uMM 8z 167 3 29 Module Model Name Read This function reads the model name of a module connected The connected modules can be identified in a program so that processing for individual module can be performed LJ71C24 R2 Processing 1 and 2 are performed LJ71C24 gt Processing 1 and 3 are performed Processing common to the C24 modules
279. ne point of the index register x0 MOYP K5 zo SM400 BCD Dozo K4Y30 N Specify the index register by one point 16 bits The index register has 20 points Z0 to 219 1 Bit structure of the index register One point of the index register consists of 16 bits and data can be read or written in units of 16 bits The most significant bit is a sign bit Point Link register data are handled as signed data In the case of the hexadecimal notation 0000 to FFFF yy can be stored However because the most significant bit represents a sign bit decimal values that can be specified are 32768 to 32767 When using T TS or C device specify the values within the range of 16384 to 16383 2 Using in a 32 bit instruction The processing target is Zn and Zn 1 The lower 16 bits correspond to the specified index register number Z and the higher 16 bits correspond to the specified index register number 1 Ex When Z2 is specified in the DMOV instruction Z2 represents the lower 16 bits and Z3 represents the higher 16 bits The most significant bit in a 32 bit structure is a sign bit mw DMOY Do z2 L Processing target Z2 Z3 z z2 Lower 16 bits Upper 16 bits te a 264 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 3 When using 32 bit index modification For the file register ZR extended data register D extended link register W using the serial number access method 32 bit
280. ng trace function is applicable The following devices can be set up to 50 points Type Description X DX Y DY M L F SM V B SB T contact T coil ST contact ST coil C contact C coil FX FY BLONS Bit device JONX JOY JO SB T current value ST current value C current value D D extended data register SD W W extended link register Wordi device SW R Z ZR FD UD G JOW JO Sw The following modifications are available for the above devices e Digit specification of bit device e Bit specification of word device Index modification 3 Sampling trace operation a Operating of the CPU module When a sampling trace trigger is issued the CPU module executes traces for the preset number of times CPU module Standard RAM Programming tool Sampling trace area Specified device HA Sampling trace area data 1st dat i Device 1 st data Writes data to 1 Displays data SSA 2nd data i 2 ifi area an 2 a programming by the specified VSN ST es 3 3rd data tool 3 number of times File od Ss 4 Ath data 4 Sampling trace 4 are ea register ea 5th data 5 data monitoring area y 6 6th data 6 MA i i y n 1 n 1 th data n 1 ton n th data n When data are stored by n th times the 1st data are overwritten by the next write data 1 When the trigger is issued the CPU module sampl
281. nging or deleting the password of the boot destination results in different passwords between the boot source and boot destination even though their file names are the same The following table shows boot operation availability when the source and destination have or do not have the same files and their password status Boot source File to transfer Boot operation password File Password Same as the boot source Allowed File with th the boot Sw OPS OY Different from the boot source Not allowed BOOT ERROR source available Set Not set Not allowed BOOT ERROR No file with the same name as the boot Allowed Source File with the same name as the boot Set Not allowed BOOT ERROR source available Not set Allowed Not set No file with the same name as the boot Allowed Source When boot file settings are configured to multiple files the files can be transferred only when all the passwords are matched If any of the passwords does not match the data in the SD memory card are not transferred and BOOT ERROR error code 2213 occurs b When Clear Program Memory is selected on the Boot File tab When Clear Program Memory is selected for boot setting a file can be formatted even if it is password protected 104 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 1 1 2 Password authentication The following three ways are available for password authentication By a programming tool By the FTP s
282. nnected to a device such as a serial communication module 301 Appendix 1 2 6 Program Setting File names and execution types execution conditions are set for each program when more than one programs are written to the CPU module L Parameter Setting Program setting File Usability Setting 7000 Set the execution order and type of the program For a fixed scan execution type program set the fixed scan interval execution interval n setting Wait Scan Initial Fixed Scan Set the use of local device files Set use the devices according to the PLC File settings e Not used Page 60 Section 2 8 302 APPENDICES Appendix 1 2 7 SFC Setting Parameters required for SFC programs are set L Parameter Setting PLC Name PLc System Ire File puc RAS Boot File Program evice jro Assignment Built in Ethernet Port Setting Built in IO Function Setting SFC Program Start Mode Initial Start Resume Start Start Conditions Autostart Block 0 Do not Autostart Block O Output Mode When the Block is Stopped Turn OFF C Keep ON Print Window Print Window Preview Acknowledge XY Assignment Default J9lawWeJed Old Z xipueddy Buas JelewueJed xipueddy Parameter Aer A Item No Description Setting range Default Reference SFC Program Start 80024 Set the mode for starting an SFC Initial Start Initial Start
283. nnunciator F Edge relay V e Timer T e Retentive timer ST Counter C Data register D e Link register W The following devices also can be set when a file register is set to be used in the PLC file e File register ZR Extended data register D e Extended link register W Point When the battery life prolonging function is set the latch function is disabled gt Page 169 Section 3 30 2 Latch range setting Set the following Project Window lt gt Parameter lt gt PLC Parameter lt gt Device e Latch clear is enabled Latch 1 Start End The latch range that can be cleared by remote latch clear operation e Latch clear is disabled Latch 2 Start End The latch range that cannot be cleared by remote latch clear operation Sym Dig Device Latch 1 Latch 1 Latch 2 Latch 2 Local Device Start Local Device End InputRelay x 16 sk Output Relay Y 116 ES Internal Relay Mpio 8k Latch Relay L_ 10 BK Link Relay B 16 e e 40 2c Link Special 58 16 25 dt la v jio 2K Set latch ranges by the start and SS a end device numbers e count c io iK Data Regter D 10 12K Link Regter w 16 SK Link Speflial sw 16 2K Inde z 10 20 The total iber of de ts I to 29 K words eves Tal E5 Kwords Lch 1 Teis possible to ear wth latch dear Latch 2
284. not be executed during backup Category Function Category Function Format PLC Memory Trace Sampling trace registration Drive operation Program memory batch transfer Data logging Data logging registration Arrange PLC Memory Remote operation Remote latch clear Online change Online change ladder mode Online change files Online change multiple blocks Change TC setting Monitor Monitor condition setup File operation Write to PLC Delete PLC Data Write PLC User Data Delete PLC User Data File Password 32 Latch data backup Debug Executional conditioned device test 6 Precautions a 178 During data logging FTP function For all operations and commands Backup operation cannot be performed during data logging To perform backup stop the data logging For how to stop data logging refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Data Logging Function CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 30 2 Backup data restoration This function restores backup data in an SD memory card to the CPU module 1 Procedure Restoration by remote operation Automatic restoration a gt 1 Before restoration star 1 Before restoration stat Insert the SD memory card storin the backup data to he CPU odiis Insert the SD memory card storing the backup Restoration is and restore the data with a Restoratio
285. nse time 1 Setting procedure 1 Select Input under Type in the I O Assignment tab and click the Detailed setting button Project Window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt I O Assignment 2 Select any of the following values for I O Response Time Default 10ms 1ms 5ms 10ms 20ms 70ms Intelligent Function Module Detailed Setting PLC Operation Mode at HIW Bulyes eull esuodsay indu 8 Cancel Point The shorter the input response time is the more the CPU module is susceptible to noise Consider the operating environment when setting input response time values 97 3 9 Error Time Output Mode Setting This function determines the output mode clear or hold from the CPU module to output modules and intelligent function modules when a stop error occurs in the CPU module For the error time output mode setting by the built in I O function refer to the following OA MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In MO Function 1 Setting procedure 1 Selecta target module under Type in the I O Assignment tab and click the Detaledseting button Project Window gt Parameter lt gt PLC Parameter lt gt I O Assignment 2 Select either of the following items for I O Response Time Clear or Hold Intelligent Function Module Detailed Setting Ad KN KREMER NEN ER MEN ENENENER El E A 98 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS
286. ntact Set a RUN contact Project window gt gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System RUN PAUSE Contacts N x 0 X0 X1FFF Set a device used as a contact gt at PAUSE Xx X0 X1 FFF The remote RUN STOP operation can be performed by turning on off the set RUN contact When the RUN contact is turned off the CPU module status changes to RUN When the RUN contact is turned on the CPU module status changes to STOP b Using a programming tool Open the Remote Operation dialog box O Online lt gt Remote Operation Select RUN or STOP for execution lt gt Premi Target PLC 7 RUN 1 OERR C stor BAT USER T Latch Clear C RESET Execute Point A remote RUN operation executed only from the programming tool that has executed a remote STOP operation to the CPU module c By an external device using the MC protocol Use MC protocol commands MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual d Using the link dedicated instruction of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module Use the link dedicated instruction of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual 110 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 13 2 Remote PAUSE This operation externally changes the operating status of the CPU module to PAUSE keeping the CPU module swit
287. ntact of CO turns on and execution of the RST instruction clears the execution value of CO At this time the coil of CO also turns off If MO is still on in the next scan the current value is updated since the coil of CO turns on from off at execution of the OUT instruction The current value is changed to 1 END OUT CO RSTCO END OUT CO RSTCO END Program ON MO OFF ON a Current value is updated Turning off the since the coil of CO turns coil of CO on from off Coilof CO OFF Current value update turning on the contact RST CO OFF Count value cleared the contact turned off To prevent the above it is recommended to add a normally closed contact of the OUT instruction execution to the condition for the RST instruction execution so that the coil of CO does not turn off while the execution condition MO of the OUT instruction is on Modified ladder program MO K10 co co MO E RST co 251 9 sajuno LL Z G SeolAed SN eulaju Z S 252 4 Maximum counting speed The counter can count only when the on off time of the input condition is longer than the execution interval of the corresponding OUT instruction The maximum counting speed is calculated by the following formula n 4 e n Duty y Maximum counting speed Cmax 100 y times s e T Execution interval of the OUT instruction sec 1 Duty n is the ON OFF time ratio of count input signal and
288. ntelligent function module device The intelligent function module device allows direct access from the CPU module to the buffer memories of the connected intelligent function modules 1 Specification method Specify the I O number and buffer memory address of the intelligent function module Specification method UO GO L Buffer memory address setting range 0 to 65535 in decimal gt Start I O number of intelligent function module Setting First 2 digits of start MO number expressed with 3 digits X Y1F0 X Y1F0 Specification 1F Setting range 00H to FFH 2 Application example When the L60AD4 high speed analog digital converter module is connected in the position of the start I O number X Y050 specify the device as shown below to store digital output values of CH 1 to CH 4 into DO to D3 accordingly US L60AD4 e Bvov G11 DO K4 na 11 CH1 Digital output value 12 CH2 Digital output value 13 CH3 Digital output value 14 CH4 Digital output value el Ko al o Point If the intelligent function module device is used device comments can be attached to the buffer memory LL Operating manual for the programming tool used 262 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 3 Processing speed The processing speed of the intelligent function
289. nter P The pointer P is a device used in jump instructions CJ SCJ or JMP or subroutine call instructions such as CALL Pointers can be used in the following applications Specification of the jump destination in a jump instruction CJ SCJ or JMP and a label start address of the jump destination Specification of the call destination of a subroutine call instruction CALL or CALLP and a label start address of the subroutine program c HL CALL PO FEND RET END There are the following two different pointer types e Local pointer The pointer used independently in each program Common pointer The pointer that can be called in all running programs by the subroutine call instruction The number of points available for the pointer is 4096 For the jump instructions and subroutine call instructions refer to the following MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction 278 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 5 10 1 Local pointer The local pointer is a pointer that can be used independently in jump instructions and subroutine call instructions in each program The same pointer number can be used in respective programs Program A Program B 7 J The same pointer MO g MO 7 No can be used 0 HE cau PQ 0 HH ca PO 3 FEND 3 FEND J M g 0 POH YO Po YO 7 RET 7 7 RET 8 END 8 END The loca
290. ntrol panel through a relay terminal block Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock For wiring methods refer to the MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Startup and Maintenance Precautions WARNING O Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction O Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Also do not expose it to liquid or strong shock Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat explode ignite or leak resulting in injury and fire O Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal block screw Failure to do so may result in electric shock Startup and Maintenance Precautions CAUTION O Before performing online operations especially program modification forced output and operating status change for the running CPU module from the peripheral device connected read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents O Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire O Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS Pe
291. nual e With CC Link IE field network setting MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual With remote password setting 92 the number of target modules x 10 2 Up to an increment of 172 Intelligent function module parameter 76 28 x the number of modules set parameter size for each utility 2 Program 228 3 4x number of steps number of steps reserved for online change Device comment 74 72 8 total comment data size of each device Comment data size per device 10 10250 x a 40 xb a Quotient of number of device points 256 b remainder of number of device points 256 Initial device value 66 44 number of settings of the initial device value 2 x total number of device points set to the initial device value 72 8 File register 2 x number of device points 70 6 x set device type 2 x total number of M and V points 16 number of D and Z points 18 x total number of T ST and C points 16 x number of programs where local devices are used M V D T ST and C indicate the following set devices e M internal relay Local device Vedge Telay D data register e T timer e ST retentive timer C counter Z index register Sampling trace file 362 number of word device points number of bit device points x 12 N1 N2 number of word device points x 2 number of bit device points 16 x 2 x the number of
292. o Enter the number of errors to Sctorsdin 4 collect in one scan standard RAM 1 to 128 300 APPENDICES Appendix 1 2 5 Boot File Setting Parameters required for boot operations are set L Parameter Setting PLC Name PLc System Puc File Puc RAS Boot File Jpragram sFc Device jro Assignment Built in Ethernet Port Setting Built in IO Function Setting Boot Option Clear Program Memory High Speed Monitor Area From Other Station i KSteps 0 15K Step fie Boot File Setting Program atleta Transfer To MAIN I Global Comment Oo D COMMENT Local Comment Parameter PARAM Device Initial Value Insert Delete Print Window Print Window Preview Acknowledge XY Assignment Default Parameter Pare 1 Item No Description Setting range Default Reference Select whether to clear the program memory at the time Cl Program of boot Selecting this item Boot Option ear Frog 9 cas Selected deselected Deselected Memory enables the setting of High Speed Monitor Area from Page 73 J9lawWeJed Old Z xipueddy Buas JelewueJed xipueddy 70004 Other Station Section 2 9 Set the type and data name of the boot file and transfer Boot File Setti a ae source and destination drives for boot operation 1 Selecting this area achieves faster monitoring from a programming tool co
293. o Description Setting range Default Reference Select from the following Empty Type Set the type of the connected module Input Output Intelligent Branch Set the model name of the connected 1 0 Model Name 04004 module Entered at user s discretion Up to 16 characters Blank Page 39 Assignment CPU modules do not use this data Section 2 2 Points Set the number of points assigned to Select a point of 0 16 32 48 64 each slot 128 256 512 or 1024 e LO2CPU LO2CPU P Op to 3F0H Start X Y Set the start I O number of each slot L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT E 0H to FFOy 306 To the next page APPENDICES Parameter ee Item No Description Setting range Default Reference Set the switches of the built in MO Switch Setting 04094 function or intelligent function E modules Error Time Set the output status for the case of a 0403 Clear St Cl Output Mode H stop error in a CPU module anon Sar PLC Sets an operation mode of the CPU Page 39 module when a hardware error CPU Secti Operation ection 2 2 Detailed Mode at H W 40044 module detects SP UNIT DOWN Stop Continue Stop Setting occurred in an intelligent function Error module 1 0 Set a response time for the input Select ims 5ms 10ms 20ms or Response 0405 f 10ms Time module or I O combined module 70ms 4 For the LO2CPU and LO2CPU P 1024 points cannot be set gt JojQweleg Old Z xipueddy Buas Jele
294. oating point exponent 2 lines A sign is appended for single precision 1 negative values only Real number A value is displayed in floating point exponent 2 lines A sign is appended for double precision 1 negative values only 1 Device test cannot be executed while a value is displayed in real number except for bit device timer T retentive timer ST and counter C Also a device number can be displayed with device comment Note that however the device comment can be displayed up to 5 two byte characters 11 one byte characters a Specifying display format Perform the following operation Device monitor screen 1 Press the gt button Display format selection screen 2 Select display format using the A and y buttons and press the button 195 JSOVJOWUOW solAed L Z y 189 1 JOYUON NO lt p b Specifying a device comment To display a device with device comment perform the following operation 2 Device monitor screen 1 Press the gt button twice y Device comment display selection screen 2 Select DSP DEV COMMENT using the A and y Eee isla E 1 A device comment can be displayed only in the following screens e Device monitor screen Device test check screen e Device test screen 2 To display a device with device comment preset Comment File Used in a Command in the PLC File tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box 3 The device comment can be displ
295. od The stored data are restored when the system is restarted Point When this function is used the battery life prolonging function is enabled even if it is set to be disabled by the parameter The battery life prolonging function is switched back to be disabled after executing this function restoring stored data The status enabled disabled of the battery life prolonging function can be checked with SD119 battery life prolonging factor For details on the battery life prolonging function refer to 2 gt Page 185 Section 3 32 1 Backup data The following shows data to be backed up Data to be backed up Description Remarks Internal user device M L B F V T ST C D W Index Register Z standard device register Z File register R ZR Extended data register D Extended link register W Device data The data of the file register extended data register D and extended link register W are backed up only when the file register in the standard RAM is used Select Transfer to Standard ROM at Latch data backup operation on the PLC File tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box Error history data immediately before the latch data backup function to standard ROM function is performed Error history pate Information on errors occurred in the connected Module error collection file intelligent function modules The data are backed up independent of the setting of the modu
296. odules i Note that a power supply module CPU module System display unit branch module extension module 2 i RS 232 adapter and END cover are not included configuration System extension Module whose serial number first five digit is 13071 or earlier Not allowed Module whose serial number first five digit is 13072 or later Allowed Allowed Power supply module ERR contact not provided ERR contact provided Multiple CPU system configuration Not available Available Redundant power supply system configuration Not available Available Memory card type SD memory card SRAM memory card Flash memory card ATA memory card Built in function Serial communication function Not available Available Q00U J Q01U Q02UCPU only 339 uosueduwo gt voyesioads 9 xipueddy NdINUO PUE ndo1 usemjeg SADUAJAHIG 9 xIpueddy gt Appendix 6 2 Precautions for Utilizing Programs This section describes precautions for applying a QnCPU program to the LCPU 1 I O assignment Since the LCPU is equipped with built in functions the start I O number assigned by default is different from that of the QnCPU Therefore to use the programs of the QnCPU I O assignments must be changed even if the configuration of the module has been the same Change the start I O number of the connected module in the I O Assignment tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box according to
297. of the 2ry Na Mo 1 3 END instruction i i i 7 Xi Ti Current value 1 of TO gt L gt A 7 3 X ON I 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 External input oFF i l to XO od 1 1 id l o 1 ION i l i l i l l i l XO of CPU OFF f Al ri A T A module E 1 ON l 1 I o Coil of TO OFF i 1 a 1 1 1 1 I 1 pol mi E po a Contact ofTO OFF i i i i io od ool wi od T 1 1 E J A pl 1 Scan time E 25ms pl 25ms gt 25ms gt 25ms le 25ms Pl 25ms gt o z MEM O A a ee os f gt e gt 42 7 33 Accuracy from when the coil of the timer turns on until Ge when the contact of the timer turns on en 1 scan time timer limit setting to 1 scan time a o gt Timing when the coil of the timer turns on e z D n Input reading timing Accuracy of the timer response that is from reading input X to output the data are up to 2 scan time timer limit setting 245 7 Precautions for using timers a Use of the same timer Do not use the OUT TO or OUT STO instruction that describes the same timer more than once within one scan If used the current timer value will be updated by each OUT TO or OUT STO instruction execution resulting in incorrect time measurement b When the timer is not executed in every scan Current values are not updated for every scan resulting in incorrect time measurement While a co
298. ogram 2 gt Page 44 Section 2 3 3 and interrupt program K gt Page 54 Section 2 7 can be included in a program WeJ6oJd e 6ulleeuo 10 se6pelNouy Joud VEL 23 1 3 2 How to create a program This section shows how to create the following sample program Y20 When X10 is turned on Y20 turns on END 1 To enter X10 type X10 at the original cursor position and select the contact shown in the left o figure Enter Symbol x aS 7 xi0 ok Ext Help LT 2 Toenter Y20 type Y20 and select the coil shown in the left figure Enter Symbol aao de ee re The program has been created In the next procedure convert the program 1 4 Converting a Program Operation of a program is defined after converting its ladder O Compile lt gt Build The program has been converted In the next procedure write the program to a CPU module Point FP O To use a label the program must be compiled GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common O After modifying a program it must be compiled 24 CHAPTER 1 BASIC PROCEDURE FOR PROGRAMMING 1 5 Writing a Project to the CPU Module Write the project the program and parameters described in Section 1 4 to the CPU module Note that when the program is new the memory gt Page 30 Section 2 1 1 is formatted so that a program can be written to it 1 5 1 Formatting a memory To format
299. ogram operations RUN gt STOP STOP RUN y ON X20 OFF a X21 OFF ON YO OFF When the output Y status is forcibly turned on while the CPU module is in the STOP status the CPU module outputs the previous output Y status The on status is not held if the output Y status before the CPU module is changed to STOP status is off b When clearing output Y status All outputs are turned off The CPU module outputs the output Y status after program operations are completed RUN gt STOP STOP RUN l 1 ON X20 OFF p X21 OFF 2 ON YO OFF When the output Y status is forcibly turned on while the CPU module is in the STOP status the CPU module holds the on status 2 Setting procedure Configure the setting under Output Mode at STOP to RUN Project Window lt gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System Output Mode at STOP to RUN Select either of gt Previous State these Recalculate Output is 1 scan later 96 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 8 Input Response Time Setting This function changes the input response time for each input module Input modules obtain external inputs within the set response time For the input response time setting by the built in 1 O function refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In I O Function ON OFF External input ON OFF i Input module Input respo
300. om RX of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module or the CC Link system master local module including built in CC Link function Input Uses the on off status refreshed via CC Link Output other than above outside of the refresh range Uses the results of program operations Holds the forced on off status Output used in the built in I O function Output from connected modules on the base unit Output of the CPU module to be refreshed from Outputs the results of program operations Holds the registered on off status Output RY of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module or the CC Link system master local module including built in CC Link function Output other than above outside of the refresh Outputs the results of program operations The Holds the forced on off status range results are not output externally 122 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 Operating procedure Te Open the Forced Input Output Registration Cancellation dialog box Debug lt gt Forced Input Output Registration Cancellation Forced Input Output Registration Cancellation E Device Register FORCE ON Cancel Registration z Register FORCE OFF Device ON OFF No Device ONJOFF Update Status Batch Cancel Registration Close 2 Enter the target device to the Device column 3 Click the button for intend
301. om the display unit by the self diagnostic function ba If this occurs the backlight will not turn off even after elapse of set period b Error status If an error occurs in the CPU module the backlight lights up red When any button is not pressed within set lighting period the backlight will turn off Check error information in the Error list screen and clear the error L gt Page 212 Section 4 2 6 Note that the backlight status does not change in the following cases 0 has been set to each cause number setting area of LED display priority ranking SD207 to SD209 The ERR LED USER LED or BAT LED of the CPU module does not turn on 5 Errors detected by self diagnostics When an error is detected from the display unit by self diagnostics a DISPLAY ERROR continuation error occurs in the CPU module and DISPLAY UNIT ERROR is displayed on the display unit If the same error is detected even after the CPU module is reset the possible cause is a hardware failure of the CPU module or the display unit Check a 4 digit error code displayed on the display unit and please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 190 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 6 Level navigation To clear where you are level navigation is displayed on the top of the screen The level navigation is inverted and the selected menu flashes Parent menu A Curr
302. on lt SH 080890ENG 13JZ36 gt MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In Ethernet Function lt SH 080891ENG 13JZ37 gt Specifications of the CPU modules power supply modules display unit branch module extension module SD memory cards and batteries information on how to establish a system maintenance and inspection and troubleshooting The built in Ethernet function of the CPU module MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In I O Function lt SH 080892ENG 13JZ38 gt The general purpose I O function interrupt input function pulse catch function positioning function and high speed counter function of the CPU module MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Data Logging Function lt SH 080893ENG 13JZ39 gt The data logging function of the CPU module 2 Programming manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt Description QCPU LCPU Programming Manual Common Instruction lt SH 080809ENG 13JW10 gt Detailed description and usage of instructions used in programs MELSEC Q L QnA Programming Manual SFC lt SH 080041 13JF60 gt MELSEC Q L Programming Manual MELSAP L lt SH 080076 13JF61 gt System configuration specifications functions programming and error codes for SFC MELSAP3 programs System configuration specifications functions programming and error codes for SFC MELSAP L programs MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Structured Text lt SH 080366E 1
303. on CPU dedicated z F a Torque control value change during operation and suspension D P CHGT instruction in real mode gt C t val h f halted axis hronized der urren l value change of halted axis synchronized encoder D P CHGA cam axis Multiple CPU high speed bus ATC dedicated instruction D P ATC compatible NC dedicated a Rotation control instruction D P ROT instruction Another CPU access instruction Other CPU interrupt program startup S P GINT Multiple CPU high speed bus Writing devices to another CPU D P DDWR compatible other CPU access Reading devices to another CPU D P DDRD A PE instruction Other CPU motion controller interrupt program startup D P GINT 1 Applicable to the QOOUUCPU Q01UCPU and QO2UCPU 2 Applicable to the QnUD E CPU 340 APPENDICES Appendix 7 Precautions for Using GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer For the precautions for using GX Works2 and differences with GX Developer refer to the following GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common ES JedoleAed X9 UM seousleyqg pue ZSYOAA XH 6ulsn 10 suoneodeig xipueddy 341 Appendix 8 Device Point Assignment Sheet Numeric Number of device points Restriction check Device name Symbol E notation Points Range Size words Points bits Input relay X 16 8K 8192 X0000 to X1FFF 116 512 x1 8192 Output relay 1 Y 16 8K 8192 Y0000 to Y1FFF 116 512 x1 8192 Internal relay
304. on and removal of an SD memory card a Power off e Reset 171 Backup status can be checked in SD690 SD690 value Status Description Ou Before backup start Backup is not started 1H Backup start prepared An SD memory card can be inserted removed 2H Backup start preparation completed Set data to backup 3H Backup in execution Backup is in execution 4H Backup completed Backup has been completed FFH Backup error Backup has failed due to an error a Insertion and removal of SD memory card An SD memory card can be inserted removed after preparation for backup is completed b Operating status of the CPU module To backup the CPU module must be in the STOP status When the CPU module is either in the RUN or PAUSE status it is switched to the STOP status after the END processing where a request to backup start preparation was received After replacing the CPU module it must be powered off and then on or reset Failure to do so keeps the CPU module in the STOP status even after setting the switch to the RUN position Backup start setup is requested Backup start is requested from a programming tool or the backup from a programming tool or the backup startsetup contact is turned on start contact is turned on Before backup start Backup start prepared I Backupistart preparation completed Backup in execution Backup completed CPU operating RUN STOP 1 N STOP 1 status PAUSE 1 The status in
305. on has been set to the SD memory card 400H Writing data to the SD memory card was not completed 500y Reading data from a drive storing backup data was not completed program memory read error 5034 Reading data from a drive storing backup data was not completed standard RAM read error 5044 Reading data from a drive storing backup data was not completed standard ROM read error 5104 Reading data from a drive storing backup data was not completed system data read error 600H 1 4335 Backup preparation started while latch data were being backed up to the standard ROM 601 an 410AH 2 Backup preparation started while data were being written in the RUN status 602H 1 4336 e Backup preparation started while a FTP client is connected to the CPU module in FTP connection 603 1 4276 E Backup preparation started during data logging 4082 gt j Backup preparation or backup started while another backup was in execution 43304 4333 Wit Backup started while the CPU module was in Before backup start SD690 0 4 Only when data are backed up using contacts 2 Only when data are backed up by remote operation 33 Only when data area backed up from another boot source 4 Only when data area backed up from the same boot source pes Jouauw Gs ol dnyoeg 1 0 pleg KoweW GS ym uohound aBueyo slInpoN Ndo 088 177 5 Functions that cannot be performed during backup The following functions can
306. on processing time shown below is required CPU module Processing time LO2CPU LO2CPU P 0 22 ms L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 0 18 ms 1 gt 4 Processing time when the setting of the built in CC Link is disabled 321 awl ueoS ul pspnloul 6ulsseoojd doe3 JO palmbay au pg xipueddy aul 6ulsseoojd NPON Add 8 XIPuaddy Appendix 3 2 Factors that Increase the Scan Time 322 When any of the function or operation described below is executed the scan time is increased by the amount of its processing time 1 2 Batch transfer to the program memory Use the following expression to calculate the increased scan time when data are batch transferred to the program memory Time required for batch transferring data to the program memory Scan time x KM1 KM2 s CPU module KM1 KM2 LO2CPU LO2CPU P 170 0 1 0 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 1100 0 15 0 Use of local devices Use the following expression to calculate the increased scan time when local devices are used Increase in the scan time N1 x KM1 N2 N3 16 x KM2 N4 x KM3 KM4 x n KM5 us N1 Number of device types that specified a local device N2 Number of word device points N3 Number of bit device points N4 Number of index register points that were specified as a local device n Number of programs where local devices are set to be used CPU module KM1 KM2 KM3 KM4 KM5 LO2CPU LO2CPU P 8 0 0 22
307. ons a Power off and reset of the CPU module during backup The backup data are deleted Performing power off of reset of the CPU module causes RESTORE ERROR error code 2221 and data cannot be restored b Priority of backup data When the device initial value has been set it takes effect Therefore after reflecting the backup data the device where the initial device value setting is configured is overwritten by the device data of the initial device value When the latch device or latch range has been set the backup data take effect Therefore even if data of latch device or latch range setting are changed after backup it is overwritten by the data backed up when the CPU module was powered off and then on or was reset c When using a local device Devices where local device range setting is configured are not backed up d The number of writes to standard ROM The number of writes to standard ROM FLASH ROM ERROR error code 1610 is detected data may not be normally backed up e Operations disabled during backup The following operations cannot be performed during backup Perform them after the backup operation Format PLC memory standard ROM only e Latch data backup by remote operation e Online change ladder mode files function block 165 dny9eq eyep yo e7 1 Z WOH pJepuels ol dnyoeg eled YoJe7 Ze 3 27 2 Restoring backup data Backup data are automatically restored when e the CP
308. ons to be performed Power on or reset Initial processing Page 43 Section 2 3 1 Ea gt Y Refresh processing Page 44 Section 2 3 2 Y Program operation Page 44 Section 2 3 3 Y END processing Page 45 Section 2 3 4 Scan time 2 3 1 Initial processing The CPU module performs preprocessing required for program operations The preprocessing is executed only once when any of the operations described in the following table is performed to the CPU module When initial processing is completed the CPU module is placed in the operation status set by the switch 5 Page 46 Section 2 4 O Performed x Not performed BulsseooJd jeu ez sjJnljonJlS eull ueoS EZ CPU module status Initial processing item Changed from STOP to Powered on Reset re RUN The I O module initialization O O x Boot from an SD memory card O O x PLC parameter check O O O Initialization of devices outside the latch range bit device off word device 0 O O 2 Automatic I O number assignment to connected modules O O O CC Link IE field network information setting O O x Intelligent function modules switch setting O O x CC Link information setting O O x Ethernet information setting O O x Initial device value setting O O O 4 The operation indicates that the status is changed back to RUN without resetting the module after any program or parameter was change
309. or Simple project with a label SRCINF1M C32 and SRCINF2M C32 6 For Structured project SRCINF11 C32 and SRCINF21 C32 32 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 2 1 2 Parameter valid drive CPU modules operate according to parameter settings Systems automatically select parameters from those stored in the drives for CPU module operation according to the following priority order Priority order 1 Drive 0 program memory 2 Drive 2 SD memory card 3 Drive 4 standard ROM Point O f parameters are set to be booted to an SD memory card the above priority order is applied after the parameters are booted to the specified destination 2 gt Page 73 Section 2 9 O The parameters used by the CPU module can be checked at Parameter Valid Drive Information under PLC Status Information on the PLC Diagnostics dialog box _7 Page 314 Appendix 2 XW Diagnostics lt gt PLC Diagnostics 1 Timing that the parameters take effect The CPU module automatically searches for parameters in the following timing and operates according to the parameters stored in the drive When the CPU module is powered off and then on When the CPU module is reset 2 Precautions Note that if the parameters are written while the CPU module is in operation the timing that the parameters take NN effect varies S a To write a parameter to the drive other than the one in operation 3 3 The CPU module keeps operatin
310. ote password proceeds the lock processing so that the access is limited Only when the entered remote password matches with the registered password access is allowed unlock processing cancel 107 108 3 Changing deleting a remote password Open the Remote Password Setting dialog box O Project window gt Parameter gt Remote Password Remote Password Setting Enter a remote password Password Setting Characters that can be used in password 4 characters Numbers 4 2 a z Special characters For a Built in Ethernet port QCPU Password Active Module Setting configure the Detail setting Necessary Selting No Setting Already Set Clear End Cancel To change a remote password write a set remote password to the CPU module To delete a remote password click the Clear button and write the remote password to the CPU module CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 13 Remote Operation Remote operation allows externally by programming tool external devices using the MC protocol or using remote contacts changing the operating status of the CPU module There are four types of remote operations e Remote RUN STOP gt Page 109 Section 3 13 1 e Remote PAUSE 25 Page 111 Section 3 13 2 Remote RESET 275 Page 113 Section 3 13 3 e Remote latch clear gt Page 114 Section 3 13 4 1 The relationship between a CPU module and a remote operation Availability of remote
311. ough device numbers are consecutively assigned there is no physical area contiguity between the data register D internal user device and the extended data register D and between the link register W internal user device and the extended link register W To use them as one contiguous area set the points for the data register D and link register W internal user device to 0 in the Device tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box and use only the extended data register D and extended link register W Point When using the file register ZR extended data register D and extended link register W with the auto refresh setting for the intelligent function module the points set in the File register extended setting in the Device tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box must not be exceeded 272 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 1 Setting method Since the extended data register D and extended link register W use the file register area data must be set for both the file register setting and the device setting a File register setting The setting method is the same as when using a file register gt Page 270 Section 5 7 6 b b Device setting Set points for the extended data register D and the extended link register W in the File Register Extended Setting Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter 2 gt Device The number of file register points set in the PLC File tab is displayed Fil
312. owing expression to calculate the increase in scan time when the scan time is set to be measured Increase in the scan time KM1 number of branch instructions x KM2 us CPU module KM1 KM2 LO2CPU LO2CPU P 40 0 1 7 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 40 0 3 0 4 The number of branch instructions is a total of the following pointer branch instructions and structure creation instructions which are executed between a start point and an end point of the scan time measurement e Pointer branch instructions CJ SCJ JMP GOEND e Structure creation instruction CALL P FCALL P ECALL P EFCALL P XCALL P BREAK NEXT RET 6 A series CPU module compatibility setting The following shows the increase in scan time when an A series CPU module compatibility setting is enabled CPU module Increase in scan time LO2CPU LO2CPU P 40 us L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 34 us 323 SWI UBIS Sy sseeJoul Jey SioloeJ ZE xIpuaddy gt aul 6ulsseoojd slnpoIN Add 8 XIPuaddy 324 7 Time taken to collect module errors Use the following formula to calculate the increase in scan time when the module error collection function is used Increase in the scan time KM1 N1 x KM2 N2 x KM3 us N1 Number of errors collected per scan by the built in CC Link or external modules N2 Number of errors collected by the built in I O When a CPU module is connected to When a CPU module is connected to
313. p kK E amp E Bw BKB E E EF E FB 3 E7BO B A 2 2 E th BR aa NS E FP SS sa E7CO aS 8 El E BE H MH E E E HE M Mm E E 3 E7DO BE E E E E fF Mm E E DP DD MN WM Fh 3 E7EO S F R Mm t amp dE ft sm if ff o E7FO ff o B w Mo o k E mo E 5 E840 i E 8 amp DH o tt E Ff hh tt E 8 a tf de 2 E850 Bm E E E E MN Mm E B B E E BR F s E860 E BE E md fF E870 E m 2 8 E E 8 KE A E A AA E880 Ba E K E A aa A EBE A ARAN AAAI E890 Fa E E A F Jo hk kk hk E MT Be HM BK E8AO E E Mm E E E ERE R EERE BR EE HR R E8BO E E E E E Z Mas zz gt BB E8C0 T RE g B EE COTE amp HR F amp F amp Ss AS E8DO hk E RX YU E FR He HR E e E8EO E MAS amp E E F E E FF FF FH BH E8FO ME mM HB EH 2 A FF M E B amp B M To the next page 335 Sait TS Jk HR CM KE Ni A a de Sp Gide oh ah Ain 3S SS tt i 3 E BK EEBS LS de e n A E D E SE TS AO Ht Sai Dt CF Sh SS SS SY E Sieh ER Se UE S DE Sh Ech Ho HS E BE HM E SR Sa e R H Cs BE Hi SHR gt Sh SH RE RS Mt Ge A A SEE ES SE A E SE Ut EE a Sait Se SO 96 BE WY tl El RASMLAR 100 Hh EB im art fle Your El fe S Sir Ht SS SF th o de a gt GN fee rae Sl SE Ben H ME E dl I E de Co HS St S SEP SSE Ga SE BE f 35 5 z oll Be ae Ee A ca A oH OH Jag Pit DE Sa
314. pi device CC Link 4 i MEM x0 memory npu HE General purpose refresh input input 7 module access 1 Input module 1 fo ais rh General purpose E gt 1 4 CR input i v Output Y gt uilt in CC Link 4 mH Y 20 memory 3 2 ee I ry General purpose output 5 e Output refresh YN gt Output module My gt Network module 1 The remote input refresh area indicates the area to be used when refresh is set to the input X in CC Link IE Field Network or CC Link Data in the remote input refresh area are refreshed during END processing 2 Data in the programming tool input area can be turned on or off by the following Writing data from a network module e Writing data from an external device using the MC protocol e Writing data using the simple PLC communication function 3 Data in the output Y device memory can be turned on or off by the following operation e Test operation of a programming tool Writing data from a network module e Writing data from an external device using the MC protocol e Writing data using the simple PLC communication function 4 This applies only to the L26CPU BT and L26CPU PBT Item Description Before program operation input data 1 are collectively read out from the general purpose input and input Input refresh modules the OR processing with the programming tool input area and remote input refresh area is executed and then the data are stored in the input X device memory Output refre
315. ple programs control data and EEEE lt register them Programn Y Control data n The following settings are required after creating multiple programs O Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt Program Program Name Execute Type Fixed Scan Interval La MAIN2 ms MAIN rita wf Programs are executed am in this order MN J gt EH EN Setting item Description Reference Enter the name file name of the program to be executed in the CPU Program Name module This program is executed only once when the CPU module is powered on or its status is switched from STOP to RUN Paga pa See Initial initial execution type program This program is executed once in every scan starting in the next scan of P 64 Section 2 8 2 which the initial execution type program is executed and later age econ Scan scan execution type Wait standby type program This program is executed only when requested Page 65 Section 2 8 3 This program is executed at time intervals specified in Fixed scan Execute Type interval and In Unit Fixed scan interval Enter the execution interval of fixed scan execution type program The setting range varies depending on the setting unit Page 68 Section 2 8 4 When the unit is ms 0 5 to 999 5ms in increments of 0 5ms When the unit is s 1 to 60s in increments of 1s Unit Select the unit ms
316. point assignment sheet 342 De viceSetting is si wee Sa ee be a eaten es 304 DEVICES varita e 230 Differences between LCPU and QnUCPU 339 Direct processing yin 2 004 epee i a pene eS 52 Display Unit 202 6 iv Gea ee Rb a NE 18 Display unit functions 005 188 E Edge relay V so eve dtl pas dena cats gaurd ed 240 END GOVE see ia ee ee Nt 18 END processing 000000e eee 45 Error clear jcc ea ir Se ees 153 Error display clear ooooooooooooo 212 Emor history es 148 Error time output mode setting 98 Executing a program n a naaa eee 27 Executing multiple programs 60 Execution of multiple programs 323 Executional conditioned device test 124 Extended data register D 272 Extended link register W 272 External input output forced on off 121 F Factors that increase the scan time 322 File password 32 i 100 File register R ZR i 268 A eGR r citadel opel seen 34 Fixed scan execution type program 68 Floating point data 200005 325 Forced on off 00000 cece eee eee 204 Formatting a memory 0000 c eee 25 Function devices FX FY FD 256 Function execution time in END processing 319 Function input FX 22 200000 eee 256 Punctionilist s ce ase papa ata Raden eae 80 Function output FY
317. point is assumed to be a virtual relay Xn in the CPU module Programs use the normally open or closed contact of Xn Programmable controller Virtual relay 2 PB1 xO Go O 4 PB2 i O PB16 vee DA OF ae Input circuit external device Program The input X can also be used for refresh target device CPU module side of remote input RX in CC Link IE Field Network or CC Link 5 2 2 Output Y The output Y is used to output control results in programs to external devices CPU module Output Y ES Signal lamp Digital display Contactor 235 x mdul pzs SeolAed Jesn eujelul Z S 5 2 3 Internal relay M The internal relay M is a device for auxiliary relays used in the CPU module All of the internal relay are set to off when e the CPU module is powered off and then on e the CPU module is reset or e the latch clear is executed Page 85 Section 3 4 Point The internal relay cannot be latched data retention during power failure Use the latch relay L when latch is required Page 236 Section 5 2 4 5 2 4 Latch relay L The latch relay L is a device for auxiliary relays that can be latched inside the CPU module During power failure on off information are retained by the battery in the CPU module The previous on off information are
318. points Up to 29K words can be set for total internal user devices The maximum number of points for a bit device is 32K For an internal relay and link relay the maximum number of points can be set up to 60K One point of the timer retentive timer and counter is regarded as one word device point and two bit device points gt Page 233 Section 5 2 2 232 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES Point FP O When changing device points the following refresh ranges must not exceed the corresponding device ranges Link refresh with CC Link IE Field Network master local module Auto refresh by CC Link e Auto refresh with intelligent function module If device points are set exceeding the corresponding device range data may be written to any other device or an error may occur O f the device points of the internal user devices are changed and the parameters are written from the Write to PLC screen the device address may be shifted and does not correspond to the original stored value Because the shifted value might be used for the operation the following files which are created by using the parameters before the device point change cannot be used under existing condition Sequence program files SFC program files ST program files When change the device points of the internal user devices perform the following operations from a programming tool Before changing the device points of the internal user devices Read devices to be
319. port this function Parameter settings are enabled to the CPU module when e the CPU module is powered off and then on or e the CPU module is reset uONoOUNY uonoaselloD JOU SINPON 9Z E 159 5 Monitoring module errors To check the collected errors open the Error History dialog box Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt System Error History Error History Monitor Status r Connection Channel Stop Monitor Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image Refine Search Match all of the criteria below None Clear Refine Criteria Enter Refine Criteria Error History List Error Details Displayed Errors Errors 31 31 Error Code Notation DEC HEX Model Name L26CPU BT No 7 Error Code SE abe oe miae 2009 12 8 08 L26CPU BT Mount Position Main block PLC slot 00018 O7EF 2009 12 11 11 57 57 L26CPU BT 00017 0688 2009 12 11 11 57 11 L26CPU BT Error and Solution Intelligent Module Information 00016 0888 2009 12 11 11 56 58 L26CPU BT 00015 05DC 2009 12 11 11 56 09 L26CPU BT IO 00014 0640 2009 12 11 11 55 22 L26CPU BT 00013 08FC 2009 12 11 11 54 50 L26CPU BT a A memory etre remover who Eesha w 00012 08FC 2009 12 11 11 54 34 L26CPU BT MENZE HOE AECT T he Memory care 00011 05DC 2009 12 11 11 54 17 L26CPU BT IO A rt Senat ett 00010 05DC 2009 12 11 11 53 36 L26CPU BT IO 00009 08FC 2009 12 11 11 53 15 L26CPU BT 00008 05DC 2009 12 11 11 52 59 L26CPL BT IO 000
320. processing no execution when the DUTY instruction is not used 5 Page 316 Appendix 3 1 2 Y gt J y y Program execution Instruction execution time gt lt Page 316 Appendix 3 1 3 End the program y YES i Refresh via CC Link IE field network v Refresh via CC Link gt Module refresh time 5 Page 318 Appendix 3 1 4 Refresh by the intelligent function module parameters Calendar update error clear Function execution time in END processing 5 Page 319 Appendix 3 1 5 Device data latch processing aul 6ulsseoojd slnpoN Add 8 xIpueddy Service processing time Service processing P Page 321 Appendix 3 1 6 wee OY CM Processing during the constant scan waiting time no processing when the constant scan time is not set Common processing time lt L gt Page 321 Appendix 3 1 7 WDT reset scan time calculation STOP PAUSE status aw ueoS ul papnjou 6ulsseoojd y9e3 104 paJinbey au p xipusddy Operating status check STOP PAUSE status RUN status 1 End of a program indicates the timing when the END GOEND FEND or STOP instruction is executed 315 The CPU module measures current minimum and maximum values of the scan time The scan time can be checked by monitoring SD520 SD521 and SD524 to SD527 as the scan time is stored in the special register Accuracy
321. program 1 Specification method Specify by the following network number and device No L Specification method J _ JA Device No Link input RX X0 to 3FFF Link output RY ee YO to 3FFF Link register RWw WO to 1FFF Link register RWr W2000 to 3FFF Link special relay SB SB0 to 1FF Link special register SW SWO to 1FF Network number 1 to 239 2 Application example J2 W10 is for the network No 2 and the link register 10 W10 CC Link IE field network master local MOVP K100 J2 W10 sm module of network number 2 seolAed JSG AUN Y G For the bit device X Y B SB specify by the digit Ex J1 K1X0 J10 K4B0 259 3 Specification range The link devices which are out of the range specified by the refresh parameter can be specified a Writing Write data in the following range Within the link device range which is set as the send range in the Common Parameter of the network parameter Out of the refresh range of the refresh parameter CC Link IE field network CPU module master local module wo SB 0 i Link range Refresh range Send range Write range Although the writing within the link device range which is set as the refresh range in the Refresh Parameter can be done the data of link device in the link module will be rewritte
322. programs CPU module Without high speed start With high speed start LO2CPU LO2CPU P 77 0 us 25 0 us A L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 72 0 us 23 0 us b Overhead time when local devices in the interrupt program are enabled Add the overhead time given in the following table when enabling the use of the local device in the program by turning on SM777 Enable disable local device in interrupt program add the time given in the following table Pre start overhead time for interrupt programs N1 x KM1 N2 N3 16 x KM2 N4 x KM3 KM4 us Overhead time after interrupt program activation N1 x KM5 N2 N3 16 x KM6 N4 x KM KM8 us N1 F Number of device types that specified a local device N2 FNumber of word device points au 6ulsseoojd slnpoIN Add 8 xipueddV N3 FNumber of bit device points N4 F Number of index register points that were specified as a local device CPU module KM1 KM2 KM3 KM4 KM5 KM6 KM7 KM8 LO2CPU LO2CPU P 8 0 0 22 0 65 90 0 8 0 0 22 0 65 30 0 L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT 8 0 0 10 0 68 80 0 8 0 0 10 0 68 20 0 au ueoS ul pspnloul 6ulsseoojd y9e3 JO palmbay au xipueddy 317 318 4 Module refresh time Module refresh time is the total time required for refresh via each network and auto refresh via the intelligent function module a Refresh time via CC Link IE Field Network This is the time required for refresh via CC Link IE Fi
323. r When the same interrupt factor occurs more than one time before the interrupt program execution status is enabled the interrupt factors of l0 to 115 128 to 131 145 150 to 1255 and fixed scan execution type programs are stored only once Note that all interrupt factors occurred are discarded if they are masked by the IMASK instruction Interrupt factor occurred Interrupt enabled El Main routine ZII program Interrupt Execution program Executed when execution status of the interrupt program becomes enabled Not executed since execution status of the interrupt program is disabled DI b When an interrupt factor occurs in the STOP or PAUSE status The CPU module executes the interrupt program as soon as the interrupt program execution status is enabled after the CPU module status is changed to RUN STOP PAUSE RUN gt RUN Interrupt factor occurred Interrupt enabled El Main routine bz program Interrupt 0 Execution program Executed after the CPU module exits the STOP or PAUSE status and enters the RUN status and execution status of the interrupt program becomes enabled Not executed since the CPU module is in the STOP or PAUSE status CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING c When multiple interrupt factors simultaneously occur in the interrupt program execution enabled status The interrupt programs are executed in the order of priority of the interrupt pointers
324. r CH2 Setting Input Signal gt r Output Signal arene E a E Input Signal Function Selection Output Signal Function Selection CU Mode ea rim Sw Rng kni General Input fms y General Output y y General Output ising General Output ising General Output ising General Output ising General Output ising General Output ising ising ising ising ising Rising Rising 4 4 4 DD sja Zz 4 Dio 44 D 4 DDD apa jaja 4 a Print Window Print Window Preview Acknowledge XY Assignment eee Parameter se A Item No Description Setting range Default Reference Positioning or Set whether to use the positioning function H High speed Counter and high speed counter function MELSEC L CPU Module J9lawWeJed Old Z xipueddy Buas JelewueJed xipueddy Assign the functions to the input signals XO User s Manual Input Signal B0014 i to XF signals Built In I O Assign the functions to the output signals Function Output Signal B0024 YO to YF 311 Appendix 1 3 Network Parameter Setting 1 CC Link IE Field Network For the network parameters of CC Link IE Field Network refer to the following MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual 2 CC Link For the network parameters of CC Link refer to the following MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User
325. r performing the RAS functions are set L Parameter Setting PLC Name PLc System PLc File PLC RAS Boot File Program sFc Device jxo Assignment Built in Ethernet Port Setting Built in I O Function Setting WDT Watchdog Timer Setting WDT Setting 200 Initial Execution Monitoring Time ms 10ms 2000ms ms 10ms 2000ms Error Check IV Carry Out Battery Check 7 Jv Check Device Range at Indexing E t Po Constant Scanning ms 0 5ms 2000ms Operating Mode When There is an Error gt Computation Error Expanded Command Error Fuse Blown Module Verify Error Intelligent Module Program Execution Error File Access Error Memory Card Operation Error External Power Supply OFF Print Window Print Window Preview Module Error History Collection Intelligent Function Module IV Collection of intelligent Function module error histories is valid Selecting this enables intelligent Function modules errors to be browsed in the Error History window of the system monitor Corresponding Memory System Memory Collection No 1 Ttems Scan 1 100 Acknowledge XY Assignment Default APPENDICES Parameter ae Item No Description Setting range Default Reference 10ms to 2000ms n A N Page 84 WDT Setting Set a watchdog timer value In increments of 200ms Section 3 3 WDT Watchdog a000 10ms f H Timer Setting de Set a watchdog timer value for 10m
326. ram A Program C CALL P204 O y r204 H CALL PO J FEND RET P205 A Program B Y pd RET J Y HL CALL P205 END FEND Label To set the common pointer range enter the start number of the common pointer The common pointer range is from the specified pointer number to P4095 However the pointer number that can be entered here is a number greater than the total points used for the local pointer Project window 2 gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System Set the start number for gt Common Pointer No P After 0 4095 the common pointer Ex If a total of 400 points are used in three programs 100 points in each of Program A and Program B and 200 points in Program C for example P400 and higher numbers can be set for the common pointer Point O The same pointer number cannot be used as a label If used CAN T SET P error code 4021 occurs O If the total number of the local pointer points used in several programs exceeds the start number of the common pointer a CAN T SET P error code 4020 occurs Program A Program B Program C Using PO to P99 Using PO to P99 Using PO to P199 100 points of PO to 100 points of PO to 200 points of PO to P99 occupied P99 occupied P199 occupied Y Total of 400 points P400 and higher numbers can be are used used for the common pointer O The jump instructions are not capable of executing a jump to the common pointer in other p
327. re all disabled Y100 xo x2 al 1 H Registration 1 Uo MOVP G1000 DO 1 x10 x11 x12 M10 sH Y rito Registration 2 M100 M20 Ua MovP G50 D10 1 Registration 3 The shaded areas are ladder blocks to be changed online Ex When a ladder block is to be added online the executional conditioned device test setting included in the ladder block followed after the added ladder block is disabled MO E a 0 ING DO Registration 1 M3 T 3 TING D3 6 ING DI A 2 9 qH LING D2 Registration 3 The shaded area is a ladder block to be changed online For the online change files all executional conditioned device test settings registered to the target program are disabled 130 d e f CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS Specifying a device by index modification If an index modified device name is specified to register the executional conditioned device test setting the CPU module does not check whether the specified device is within the setting range To change a device by specifying a step No the index modified device must be within the device range or not be on the boundary of devices otherwise the device value is not changed Specifying a device by indirect specification If an indirectly specified device name is specified to register the executional conditioned device test setting the CPU module does not check whether the specified device is within
328. re several scans instructions with completion device Ex SEND RECV and similar instructions 63 2 8 2 64 Scan execution type program Scan execution type program is executed once in every scan starting in the next scan of which the initial execution type program is executed and later STOP gt RUN Power on RUN 1st scan 2nd scan aie 3rd scan 4th scan END processing i H H z O P Initial execution type program m o END 40 END YO END Scan execution type program A A HH HH 40 END 0 END 0 Scan execution type program B HA HA k d d 40 EN 40 EN Scan execution type program C m Scan time gt When multiple scan execution type programs are executed the scan time will be the time required for completing all the scan execution type program execution If an interrupt program or fixed scan execution type program is executed execution time of the executed program will be added to the scan time CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 2 8 3 Standby type program Standby type program is executed only when its execution is requested This type of program can be changed to any desired execution type by a program instruction This program is mainly used for the following purposes e Program library Standby type program is used as a program library a collection of subroutine programs and or interrupt programs and managed separately from a main routine program M
329. red by a programming tool W Online lt gt Program Memory Batch Download The status of the transfer to the program memory can be confirmed by SM165 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 22 Debug from Multiple Programming Tools This function allows debugging from multiple programming tools connected to a module such as a CPU module or serial communication module The following table shows combinations of the debug function executable from multiple programming tools O Can be simultaneously performed A Can be simultaneously performed but partially restricted x Can not be simultaneously performed 3 Function executed later R Program monitor list Executional Function in execution 9 y Online Scan time Sampling ae Monitor Interrupt program conditioned gt 5 change measurement trace E monitor list device test Monitor O O O O O O Program monitor list AS Interrupt program monitor list O o O O O Online change O O x 2 4 x 2 x 2 x2 Scan time measurement O O x 03 x 2 O O Sampling trace O O A O x2 O Executional conditioned 7 2 device test O O A O O 4 The Monitor in the above table indicates the following Ladder monitor Entry ladder monitor Device block monitor Entry data monitor e Local device monitor 2 Only the function in execution is operated Another function intended later cannot be executed 3 The function in execution stops and another function intended l
330. red in one scan Eight executional conditioned device test settings can be simultaneously registered into the CPU module in 159 solAed pauompuoo euonnoex3 61 one scan When nine or more executional conditioned device test settings are to be simultaneously registered they are registered over multiple scans 127 5 Checking the executional conditioned device test Open the Check Disable Executional Conditioned Device Test Registration dialog box Page 128 Section 3 19 6 Contents can be viewed by clicking the Update Status button 6 Disabling the executional conditioned device test a Operating procedure 1 Open the Check Disable Executional Conditioned Device Test Registration dialog box Debug lt gt Executional Conditioned Device Test gt Check Disable Executional Conditioned Device Test Check Disable Executional Conditioned Device Test Registration Status of Displayed Data Read from PLC No Select Program Name stepNo Device ONJOFF Setting Value Execution Timing Device Comment E iv lo MAIN 0 0 1 xo ON Before Executing Instruction 2 iv MAIN 0 After Executing Instruction 0 After Executing Instruction 4 Y main 0 After Executing Instruction E Device Test Condition PLC Operation Device Test Condition File Operation Update Status Disable Registration Read File Write File
331. retained even after performing the following to the CPU module e Power OFF ON Reset The latch relay is turned off by the latch clear operation Point Scan time is prolonged when the latch relay is used gt Page 295 Appendix 1 2 5 2 5 Link relay B The link relay is an internal relay whose point is input in hexadecimal In the range where the network parameters are not set this relay can be used as an internal relay or a latch relay The range where a link relay is not latched Same as the range for an internal relay The range where a link relay is latched Same as the range for a latch relay Point When using a link device in the network module by using the points of the link register in the CPU module default 8192 points or greater change the points setting of the link register in the Device of the PLC Parameter 236 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 5 2 6 Annunciator F The annunciator F is an internal relay which can be effectively used in fault detection programs for user created system Whenever an annunciator is turned on SM62 turns on and the anuunciator number is stored in SD62 to SD79 By monitoring SD62 to SD79 the system can be checked for error and failure Ex When F5 is turned on the corresponding annunciator number is output to the outside Fault detection program x0 X10 i rer B SM62 __OFF ON ane BCDP SD62 GS ESOS 0
332. rograms Use the common pointer with subroutine call instructions only 280 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES 5 11 Interrupt Pointer I The interrupt pointer I is used as a label at the start of an interrupt program and can be used in any programs Interrupt pointer interrupt program label Interrupt program IRET The number of points available for the interrupt pointer is 256 10 to 1255 The following shows interrupt factors for the applicable interrupt pointers Interrupt factor Interrupt pointer No Description Interrupt by built in 1 O 10 to 1151 Interrupt from a built in 1 0 Int t at fixed int Is b int I ti f the CPU Interrupt by an internal timer 128 to 131 a eer ey oe Spence eran ay module Intelligent function module interrupt 150 to 12552 Interrupt from the intelligent function module 4 Interrupt pointer numbers can be changed in the PLC Parameter dialog box 2 They can be used for interruptions by built in I O by configuring parameter in the PLC Parameter dialog box Point To use the intelligent function module interrupt set values in the Interrupt Pointer Setting dialog box opened from the PLC System tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box 2 7 Page 296 Appendix 1 2 2 The list of interrupt pointer numbers and interrupt factors are shown below I No Interrupt factor Priority No Interrupt factor Priority a 10 1st poin
333. rsonal Handy phone System more than 25cm away in all directions from the programmable controller Failure to do so may cause malfunction O Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction O Tighten the terminal block screw within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction O After the first use of the product module display unit and terminal block the number of connections disconnections is limited to 50 times in accordance with IEC 61131 2 Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction O After the first use of the SD memory card the number of insertions removals is limited to 500 times Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction O Do not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the module Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or any shock is applied to it dispose of it without using O Before handling the module touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction O Before testing the operation by the positioning function set a low speed value for the spee
334. s a Reserving points for future module changes The number of points can be reserved to prevent the I O number modification when the current module is changed in the future to the one with the different number of occupied I O points b Preventing I O numbers from being changed The change in the I O numbers can be prevented when an I O module or intelligent function module whose occupied I O points are other than 16 is removed due to failure c Changing the I O numbers to those used in the program When the I O numbers used in the actual system differ from those in the program the I O numbers of each module can be changed to the ones in the program If any of the I O modules whose number of I O points are other than 16 fails without I O assignment setting the I O numbers assigned following to the failed module may change leading to a malfunction For this reason making the I O assignment setting is recommended 39 juawuBisse Jequinu O JO de0u0D p ZZ JOQUNN O I 2 2 I O number assignment The I O numbers are represented in hexadecimal The following is an example of an I O number assignment to the L26CPU BT Power supply module built in 1 0 Main block function Power supply module Extension module Extension block 1 CPU module function and built in CC Link Branch module Input module Output module Input module Intelligent function module 32 points Intelligent f
335. s depending on the system configuration parameter settings and or program size Design circuits so that the entire system will always operate safely regardless of the time Installation Precautions N WARNING O Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction Installation Precautions CAUTION O Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product O To interconnect modules engage the respective connectors and securely lock the module joint levers Incorrect interconnection may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module O Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module O Securely connect an extension cable to the connectors of a branch module and an extension module After connections check that the cable is inserted completely Poor contact may cause malfunction Wiring Precautions WARNING O Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fai
336. s Manual 312 APPENDICES Appendix 1 4 Remote Password setting This section provides the remote password setting screens and details of the setting items Remote Password Detail Setting User Connection No I Connection 2 TT Connection 3 TT Connection 4 Remote Password Setting TT Connection 5 TT Connection 6 I Connection 7 I Connection 8 Password Setting Characters that can be used as A oe ls a mee n z ee K Seal in password onnection onnection onnection onnection 4 characters Numbers 4 2 a z Special characters E Password Active Module Setting System Connection MELSOFT Transmission Pot TCPAP StartXY nae cee y TT MELSOFT Transmission Port UDP IP I FTP Transmission Port TCP IP TT Direct Connection of MELSOFT TT Regard as Error when Remote Password Mismatch Count Reaches Upper Limit Upper Limit of Mismatch Count a i 1 Be hen Re Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set End Cancel When the remote password is enabled write the parameter to the PLC and reset the PLC or turn off the power and turn on the power again End Cancel Item Description Setting range Up to fi h t Iph i Password Setting Enter a remote password aes oe ers alphanumeric characters special symbols LCPU Model N Select del f the CPU module odel Name elect a model name of the module LJ71C24 Start X Y Set the start address of the module 0000H to OFEO Conti the detaile
337. s NNY ul sueJ6oud BUN LZE ON OFF ON ON Mo ON OFF X0 ON XO gt OFF I o as lt a ice P 2 A OFF gt ON The rise instruction is not executed ON even if its execution condition is off on Nx OFF MO The corresponding rise instructions are PLS and OP 141 b SCJ instruction When the SCJ instruction is in the data written to the CPU module in the RUN status and the execution condition of the instruction has been on at completion of the online change the instruction jumps to the specified pointer without waiting for one scan Online change pa ise po 14 END 0 AEND 0 A END 0 1 X0 status ON cl X0 OFF OFF gt OFF SCJ instruction ON xo Jumps to the specified pointer OFF ON gt ON SCJ instruction ON 7 x xo 1 Jumps to the specified pointer OFF 1 I OFF ON SCJ instruction gt gt gt WM Jumps to the specified pointer without waiting for one scan 142 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS Point FP With Execute fall instruction selected for in the Options dialog box of the programming tool the fall instruction is executed when the instruction is in the data written to the CPU module in the RUN status even if the execution condition on off is not met The same operation as High Performance model QCPU Tool gt Options Options Unset Project
338. s in the CPU module By storing the errors in a memory that can hold data in the event of power failure the errors can be held even after power off or reset Error history CPU module including built in I O and built in CC Link and error log intelligent function module are displayed on one screen Errors that occurred in the entire system can be monitored Module A in reverse chronological order ogule Module B CPU Y 19 29 Error A1 occurred 19 34 Error B1 occurred 19 33 Error C1 occurred 719 36 Error A2 occurred u i 19 29 ModuleA Error A1 19 33 CPU i Error C1 19 34 ModuleB Error B1 19 36 ModuleA ErrorA2 1 1 1 a B 1 y 1 o D Programming tool H O E f WAHE Error history display s s T s sy Time _ Module in error Error code Al i A Error history CPU m die sos 4 8 Module error log Time Module in error Error code 19 29 ModuleA Error A1 19 34 ModuleB Error B1 19 36 ModuleA ErrorA2 pg 19 33 Error C1 Example of screen display Error History List Displayed Errors Errors 31 31 Error Code Notation DEC HEX y Error Code Date and Time Model Name Start IO a 2009 12 11 11 58 08 00018 D
339. s to 2000ms Initial Fxecution using an initial execution type In increments of Page 62 Monitoring Time 7 ve Section 2 8 1 program 10ms Whether to check the following errors can be selected Error Check 30014 Carry Out Battery Check Selecled Selected Page 199 deselected Section 3 24 Check Device Range at Indexing Set the operation mode of the CPU module when the following errors are detected Computation Error Page 153 3002 Operating Mode When There is an Error H Intelligent Module Program Stop Continue Stop Section 3 24 Execution Error e File Access Error Memory Card Operation Error To the next page 299 J9lawWeJed Old Z xipueddy Buas JelewueJed xipueddy Parameter Item No Description Setting range Default Reference 0 5ms to 2000ms y 7 i Page 82 Constant Scanning 30034 Set a constant scan time value In increments of Section 3 2 0 5ms Collection of intelligent function Set whether to collect module Selected Selected module error errors deselected histories is valid Corresponding System Memory Select a st location System M Momory elect a storage location Standard RAM ystem Memory Module Error History Page 158 Collection Intelligent 30044 Enter the number of errors to 9 Function Module History No collect only when they are stored 32 to 1000 100 Section 3 26 in the standard RAM e Stored in system memory 1 to 100 Collection N
340. s x Switching block No 1K points 5M400 He 5D647 K33 O mo Final file register range check MO yo Alarm processing mo Block switching command HH RsET K1 Switching to block 1 271 5 8 Extended Data Register D and Extended Link Register W The extended data register D and extended link register W are devices for utilizing the large capacity file register ZR area as an extended area of the data register D and link register W These devices can be programmed as the data register D and link register W together with the file register ZR area Internal user device Device numbers can be assigned to the data register and extended data register consecutively DO Device Points for r DO A LMOV K1234 D100 data register D12287 r LMOY K5672 13000 Data register D12287 File register file D12288 ZR DI A Points Extended data for file register register ZR210943 4 The file size is the total D12288 number of points for the file Points for register extended data D63487 gt extended register and extended link data register registers D63487 M2000 Points for extended p link registers 4 y Device numbers for the extended data register D and extended link register W can be consecutively assigned after those for the internal user devices data register D and link register W Note that even th
341. sage are too short a user message will pop up continually and therefore operation of the display unit will be frequently interrupted In this case holding down the ESC button on the display unit for a while will disable the pop up display For how to enable pop up display refer to Page 223 Section 4 7 4 224 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 4 7 Option Settings The display format and basic settings of the display unit can be configured under the OPTIONS menu selected from the function selection screen The option settings can be backed up to the CPU module without a battery qe A The pop up setting is not backed up 2 When the display unit is removed and attached to another CPU module the display unit operates according to settings stored in the CPU module to which the display unit is currently attached The option settings include the following settings e Language setting Contrast adjustment e Lighting period setting e Pop up display 4 7 1 Language setting A displayed language can be changed 1 Operating procedure Perform the following operation Options screen 1 Select LANGUAGE using the A and W buttons AS 4 1 gt 0PT 1ONS MENU gt OPT ONS and press the ox button ao z U gt es S 0 oe l ES 53 Language setting screen 2 Switch the language using the A and y buttons E and press the button Point Information of language displayed on the display uni
342. ser s Manual Set the start ber of P 280 Common Pointer No 1005 ening start number ot common 59 to P4095 See er pointers Section 5 10 2 e 128 100 0ms System Interrupt Setting Fixed 1008 Set each execution interval for 0 5ms to 1000ms 129 40 0ms Page 281 Scan Interval A the interrupt pointers 128 to 131 In increments of 0 5ms e 130 20 0ms Section 5 11 e 131 10 0ms Select whether to enable or Int tP Fixed S disable high d ti f P 266 nterrup rogram ixed Scan 1008 isable high spee exert ion o Sada desel ced elated age Program Setting interrupt programs or fixed scan Section 5 6 3 execution type programs Select f the following OS e 1 to 99 in increments of Execute the process as the 1 scan time proceeds i ma Execute the B 2 e 1 to 10 in increments of 1 x a e Specify service process time y process as the Page 90 Service Processing Setting 10134 time 5 e Specify service process bee scan time Section 3 6 f 0 2 to 1000ms in increments execution counts of 0 1ms proceeds 10 e Execute it while waiting for RAN constant scan setting Set items required when e Backup Start Setup Contact performing the CPU module e Backup Start Contact Page 169 CPU Module Ch Sett 1017 Be eee i change with SD memory card e Backup Target Data Section 3 30 function Title Setting 4 Setting of only a PAUSE contact is not allowed 2 For the LO2CPU and LO2CPU P this item cannot be set beca
343. sh Before program operation data in the output Y device memory 2 are collectively output to the output module Execution of an input contact instruction Input data 3 are read out from the input X device memory and the program is executed Execution of an output contact instruction Output data 4 are read from the output Y device memory and the program is executed Execution of the OUT instruction The operation result of the program 5 are stored to the output Y device memory CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING 2 Response delay An output response which corresponds to the status change in the input module delays for two scans maximum depending on the on timing of an external contact The following shows response delay examples Example ER XS vse Aprogram that turns on the output YSE when the input X5 is turned on Y5E turns on at the earliest timing O END 0 56 END 0 Input refresh m a m Output refresh ON OFF ne External contact i rt ON A 1 x5 OFF oe ON vi Y5E OFF ION External load Siaz Delay time minimum 1 scan e Y5E turns on at the slowest timing 0 END 0 56 END 0 E Input refresh 7 u Output refresh ON OFF External contact i i ON xs OFF i AOS ON vi Y5E OFF ON OFF Delay time e External load maximum 1 scan 51 PulsseooJd ys
344. st 2 1st scan 2nd scan Point O When several devices are connected to one CPU module each device requests service processing When the CPU module simultaneously receives requests from several devices a single END processing can simultaneously accept several requests if the service processing count is set to the number of connected devices This improves response performance Note that the scan time increases by the amount of service processing time O If no request data for service processing exists END processing speeds up by the amount of request processing time The CPU module does not wait for requests 94 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS d Execute it service processing while waiting for constant scan setting Constant Scanning 10 ms 0 Sms 2000ms Request 2 Request 4 Request 1 Request 3 Request 5 Program execution Request 1 Request 2 zaji Peripheral Constant scan Constant scan Waiting time eS Request 4 a 7 Point O When setting the constant scan selecting Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting can perform the service processing efficiently When Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting is selected Pp END processing Program execution Waiting time Service processing 1 _______ Service processing time
345. starts time measurement when its coil is turned on and when it times out the contact is turned on If the timer s coil is turned off the current value is changed to 0 and the contact is turned off Program example M High speed timer indication XO H K50 i T200 When X0 is turned on coil of T200 turns on and the contact turns on after 0 5s when unit of the timer is set to 10ms Timing chart XO T200 coil T200 contact 243 1S 1 Jewl 0FZ9 SeolAed SN eulaju Z S 5 Retentive timer This timer measures the period of time during which the coil is on The time increment is set in the same manner as the corresponding low or high speed timer e Low speed retentive timer Low speed timer e High speed retentive timer High speed timer The timer starts time measurement when its coil is turned on and when it times out the contact is turned on Even if the timer s coil is turned off the current value and the on off status of the contact are retained When the coil is turned on again the measurement restarts from the retained current value The current value and the contact off status can be cleared with the RST STO instruction Program example xO K200 Se XO on time is measured for 20s when unit of xi the timer is 100ms ks 4 RST STi Retentive timer indication When X1 is turned on STO contact is reset and the current value is cleared Timing chart ON X0 OFF ON
346. subroutine call instruction with argument passing are fetched into a subroutine program and they are used for operations All bit devices for the CPU module can be used b Function output FY The function output is used for passing an operation result on off data in a subroutine program to a calling program An operation result is stored in the device specified in the subroutine program with argument passing All bit devices except for direct devices of the CPU module DX and annunciator F can be used 256 CHAPTER 5 DEVICES c Function register FD The function register is used for data writing or reading between a subroutine program and a calling program The CPU module auto detects the input or output conditions of the function register Source data are input data of the subroutine program Destination data are output data of the subroutine program The function register of one point can occupy up to four words Note that however the number of words used differs depending on the instruction in the subroutine program A one word instruction uses one word only o CALP PO DO _ moy RO FDO Data are stored in DO 1 point A two word instruction uses two words CALP PO DO i H Mov RO FDO Data are stored in DO and D1 2 points Ata destination using 32 bit multiplication or division four words are used PO M1 E caLLP PO DO o RO R10 mo 1 5 Data are
347. t Intelligent function module lt gt Right click lt gt New Module New Module Module Selection Module Type Serial Communication Module Module Name La71c24 Mount Position y Mounted Slot No 0 Acknowledge I O Assignment Specify start XY address 0030 H 1 Slot Occupy 32 points Title Setting Title Item Description Module Type Select a type of the CPU module Module Selection Module Name Select a model name of the CPU module Mounted Slot No Select a slot No where he CPU module is connected Mount Position Acknowledge I O Assignment The I O assignment settings in the PLC Parameter dialog box can be checked Specify start X Y address Enter the start MO number Title Setting Title Enter a title 76 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING Upon completion of the setting above parameters for the intelligent function module appear in the Project window a Intelligent Function Module fh 0030 L371C24 d Switch Setting 2 Yarious_Control_Specification 2 PLC_Monitoring_Function Modem _Function User_Register_Frame_Content 2 User_Register_Frame_Specification Auto_Refresh Ls La gt St E at E To set the intelligent module parameters refer to the following Manual for the intelligent function module used 2 Communications with the FROM and TO instructions The FROM instruction stores data read from the buffer memory of the intelligent
348. t execution completed i 1 T SM692 1 Restoration ON complete flag OFF 179 2 Execution method The following two methods are available for restoring backup data e Remote operation Automatic restoration a Execution by remote operation Open the Restoration execution from backup data dialog box XZ Online gt PLC Module Change lt gt Restore Restoration execution from backup data Connection Channel List Connecting Interface fuse lt gt PLC Module Target PLC Station No Host PLC Type 26 81 Status Online cuassE Restore not executed 0 2 completed To validate restored data click Yes in the screen that appears after clicking the button in the above dialog box and then power on or reset the CPU module b Execution by automatic restoration On the CPU Module Change Setting dialog box select Auto restore at turn OFF gt ON or reset I Page 173 Section 3 30 1 2 a After backup turn off and then on or reset the CPU module so that restoration starts Restoration timing can be set from either once at the first time or every time Turn on from off or reset of the CPU module Option setting item First time Second time or later Restore for the first time only Restoration executed Restoration not executed Operate as a standard SD memory card Restore every time Restoration executed Restoration executed
349. t Classification Type Device name Reference Points Range range e Jn X0 to g Link input 16384 Jn X3FFF Hexadecimal Jn Y0 to i Bit device Link output 16384 7 Hexadecimal Jn Y3FFF i Link special Jn SBO to A Page 259 i i ice e 512 Hexad C tb t i Link direct device relay Jn SB1FF O Section 5 4 Jn wo t Link register 16384 eee Hexadecimal Word device END Link ial n 0 e specia 512 7 Hexadecimal register Jn SW1FF Module access intelligent Un GO to Page 262 Word device function module 65536 A Decimal Cannot be set E device Un G65535 2 Section 5 5 device Index register or Index register or Page 264 standard device Word device standard device 20 ZO to Z19 Decimal Cannot be set pee 5 6 register register f Page 268 Fil ist Word devi Fil ist 0 Decimal ile register ord device ile register ecimal Section 5 7 0 to 384K points in Extended data Extended data a D12288 to 2 p Word device 128K Decimal total register register D143359 es Page 272 in increments of 1K ina 3 ection 5 Extended link register Word device Extended link 0 Hexadecimal register Page 277 Nesting Nesting 15 NO to N14 Decimal Cannot be set Section 5 9 P 278 Pointer 4096 PO to P4095 Decimal ie Section 5 10 Pointer Cannot be set Page 281 Int t ti 256 10 to 1255 D nterrupt pointer o ecima Section 5 11 A 5 P 282 Bit device SPG block 320 BLO to BL319 4 Decimal age device Section 5 12 1 VO No Si lis
350. t POPUP using the A and W buttons and MENU gt OPT IONS press the button X 1 gt 0PT1ONS Pop up screen 2 Press the button A1 gt 0P Di 97 MENU gt OPT gt POPUP 4 Pop up setting confirmation screen 3 Select YES using the A and y buttons and dl ee o 1 Pop up setting completion screen 4 After the setting is completed either of the screens shown left appear To return the display to the pop up screen press the button 228 DEVICES PA RT CONSTANTS In this part the devices and constants used in the CPU module are described CHAPTER 5 DEVICES cecic niece a ceive eed de Pee eee baer catia 230 CHAPTER 6 CONSTANTS i 283 CHAPTER 7 CONVENIENT USAGE OF DEVICES 00 0000 285 229 CHAPTER 5 Devices This chapter describes the devices that can be used in the CPU module 5 1 Device List The following table shows the devices used in the CPU module and applicable ranges Default Parameter set Classification Type Device name Reference Points Range range Page 235 Input 8192 X0 to X1FFF Hexadecimal Section 5 2 1 Cannot be set Page 235 Output 8192 YO to Y1FFF Hexadecimal Section 5 2 2 Page 236 Internal relay 8192 MO to M8191 Decimal Section 5 2 3 R Page 236 Latch relay 8192 LO to L8191 Decimal Section 5 2 4 P 236 Bit device Link relay 8192 BO to B1FFF Hexadecimal Can be set eet Internal user device Sectio
351. t gt UE ie SH HA SS a SS HUSA Fe w FEE He CH SE 0 m Sak N fh S Se FD 0158 S olin RS 210158 SP Sor S SE St Sf E ES A A T ES Sy Ea 0 CN KE Hak IY a EK S EERE E EE E F E Em R El Ez E i Ra A mO E Be i Mk fR fie fR fit f 2 HED ta Be E RR fal E E q YA a R E 3 fa R E S OR a E KE 336 To the next page N APPENDICES Sta HE A lait SA Fl st SE S SAS Ro nn He H we Se EY it Sut me BS a SS fib SO SSF o E PEA Tot at SE SE SG AUS SE S lt BARR Co EA So id SE z x 9 A B C D E F 3 EH FTF H JB hk amp kE U E HR B E E E E E fe i fl e F ae i RB a A Gil Ro R Gi E B B m R A A E P B 8 g i To the next page a yun Aejdsig ay ul eldqelleAV sepoD Jajoeleyo G xipueddV 337 FA40 FA50 FA60 FA70 FA80 FA90 FAAO FABO FACO FADO FAEO FAFO FB40 FB50 FB60 FB70 FB80 FB90 FBAO FBBO FBCO FBDO FBEO FBFO FC40 FC50 FC60 FC70 FC80 FC90 FCAO FCBO FCCO FCDO FCEO FCFO ts o TOE W Ket at SE ES 0 En E oo BS it Bat Sus ES NN BARE Sin Bit Sng SF SB ES REESE aE MO Fe EY SA PPE Saat SS Hae SE Beas SY E EE Re Sati Gat S ER at E HE SSF SEE SOM Sih StS ane See Y E Su T an S8 Sot BO Aa aS Shh Je Ral SE an BS St to PI oh SE Ex Pa M
352. t 5 5 11 2nd point 6 T 12 3rd point 7 5 116 to 127 Empty gt 13 4th point 8 o 5 14 5th point 9 o 15 6th point 10 16 7th point 11 128 100ms 4 17 Interrupt by 8th point 12 129 Interrupt by internal 40ms 3 18 built in MO 9th point 13 130 timer 2 20ms 2 19 10th point 14 131 10ms 1 110 11th point 15 132 to 149 Empty 111 12th point 16 112 13th point 17 Se Intelligent functi z 13 14th point 18 150 to 1255 De Empty 21 to 2263 module interrupt 114 15th point 19 115 16th point 20 4 The time limit value of the internal timer is set by default In the PLC System tab of the PLC Parameter dialog box the value can be changed within the range of 2ms to 1000ms in increments of 1ms 2 When an interrupt occurs even if no interrupt pointer exists on the program CAN T EXECUTE l error code 4220 does not occur 3 Among 150 to 1255 150 has the highest priority priority 21 and 1255 has the lowest priority priority 226 281 5 1 2 Other Devices 5 12 1 SFC block device BL The SFC block is used to check that the specified block in the SFC program is activated MELSEC Q L QnA Programming Manual SFC 5 12 2 1 0No specification device U The I O No specification device is used to specify I O numbers in the intelligent function module dedicated instructions The following shows how to specify the device H GP READ Un S1 S2 3 gt I O No specific
353. t STOP to RUN Page 96 Section 3 7 10044 Floating point operation Page 325 Appendix 4 1005H Common Pointer No Page 280 Section 5 10 2 10074 Points Occupied by Empty Slot PLC System Page 39 Section 2 2 10084 System Interrupt Setting Page 281 Section 5 11 100A Intelligent Function Module Setting Interrupt Pointer Setting 100Cy Module Synchronization Page 87 Section 3 5 100Dy A PLC Compatibility Setting 10134 Service Processing Setting Page 90 Section 3 6 10144 Latch Data Backup Operation Valid Contact Page 162 Section 3 27 10164 Built in Ethernet Port Setting Built in Ethernet Port Setting 10174 PLC Module Change Setting Page 169 Section 3 30 PLC System 10184 Built in CC Link Setting 10194 Simple PLC Communication Setting Built in Ethernet Port Setting 11004 File Register Page 268 Section 5 7 11014 Comment File Used in a Command Page 285 CHAPTER 7 1102 Initial Device Value Page 87 Section 3 5 PLC File 1103 File for Local Device Page 286 Section 7 2 11044 Transfer to Standard ROM at Latch data backup operation Page 162 Section 3 27 1105H Device data storage file Page 167 Section 3 28 20004 Device Points 20014 Latch range latch clear is enabled 2002y Latch range latch clear is disabled Device Page 85 Section 3 4 20034 Local variable 20044 Latch range extended devices latch clear is enabled 20054 Latch range extended devices latch clear is disabled 292 To the next page APPENDICES
354. t can be checked in SD581 Displayed language information 1 MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 225 4 7 2 Contrast adjustment Tone of displayed characters can be set 1 Setting range Tone can be selected from 0 light to 9 dark default 3 lt 2 Operating procedure Perform the following operation Options screen 1 Select CONTRAST using the A and y buttons X 1 gt 0PTIONS MENU gt OPT IONS and press the button Contrast adjustment screen 2 Seta contrast value using the A and y buttons and press the button 226 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 4 7 3 Lighting period setting The lighting period of the backlight on the display unit can be set 1 Setting range The following shows periods that can be set default 5MIN 1MIN 3MIN 5MIN 10MIN 15MIN 30MIN 60MIN LIGHT ALWAYS ON 2 Operating procedure Perform the following operation Options screen 1 Select BACKLIGHT using the A and y buttons and press the button Lighting period setting screen 2 Seta lighting period using the A and y buttons and press the button sBumes uodo y Bumjes poned buyyb py 227 4 7 4 Pop up display A pop up screen showing a user message gt Page 224 Section 4 6 can be enabled 1 Operating procedure Enable pop up display by the following operation Options screen 1 Selec
355. t measurement start as 0 The number of execution times is displayed up to 65535 and returns to 0 when the 65536 is measured The execution times is held even when the program is stopped Point O The scan time of a fixed scan execution type program is not displayed during its execution is displayed in the Scan time column O When the POFF instruction is executed a non execution processing is performed for one scan The number of execution times displayed is the addition of the execution times of the non execution processing 117 3 16 Interrupt Program List Monitor 118 This function displays the number of executions of an interrupt program 1 Execution Open the Interrupt Program List Monitor dialog box W Online gt Monitor gt Interrupt Program List Interrupt Program List Monitor Interrupt Pointer 1 y Interrupt Pointer Execution Count Comment Stop Monitor Item Description Interrupt Pointer An interrupt pointer is displayed Execute Count The number of executions of an interrupt program is displayed This function starts counting after the CPU module is in the RUN status When the counting reaches 65536 times it is reset to 0 Comment Device comments created to an interrupt pointer is displayed 3 1 7 Local Device Monitor Test CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS This function enables debugging of local devices of
356. ta setting result Storage Select a file name of the trace data Executing and Saving Set whether to start the sampling trace automatically when the T Auto Startup Setti ae ETO AP ene CPU module is powered off and then on Trace Setting Trace Count Setting Set the number of traces to perform b odian Additional Information Set nether to add clock data and program name to the sampling _ trace file Setting Data Acquisition Timing Setting Set the timing of data acquisition c Trigger Condition Setting Select the condition to activate a trigger d a Trace Execution Method Execute after current trace setting overwrite to PLC The CPU module executes the sampling trace after the trace settings are overwritten to the existing sampling trace file Execute by setting trace that writing in PLC The CPU module executes the sampling trace with the trace settings in the sampling trace file selected for storage 134 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS b Trace Count Setting Total Count The number of times that data are stored in the memory Count Before Trigger The number of data storages to retain before the trigger Count After Trigger A value obtained by the Count Before Trigger value subtracted from the Total Count value Lo point Trace Count before trigger uD Count after trigger m Total count e c Data Acquisition Timing Setting Set the timing for collecting trace data Item
357. tation is not required Monitoring target Programming tool Programming tool However since the system area is stored in the program memory the storage area is reduced by the system area size 1 Creating a user setting system file 1 Open the Format PLC Memory dialog box OO Online gt PLC Memory Operation gt Format PLC Memory Format PLC Memory m Connection Channel List Connection Interface PSB lt gt PLC Module Target PLC Network No F Station No Host PLC Type 26 87 Target Memory Program Memory Device Memory r Format Type Do not create a user setting system area the required system area only Create a user setting system area High speed monitor area from other station K Steps 0 15K Steps y K Steps 2 Select Program memory Device memory in Target Memory 3 Select Create a user setting system area in the Format Type area The number of programming tools that can simultaneously monitor a CPU module is the number of user setting system areas 1 4 Set the number of steps for the system area in increments of 1K step Up to 15K steps can be set for the system area 1K step is available for a monitoring file from another station 146 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 22 2 Online change from multiple programming tools To perform online change from multiple programming tools select Execute online change b
358. ted bythe UMSG Page 224 Section 4 6 Language setting LANGUAGE Selects a displayed language Page 225 Section 4 7 1 Contrast adjustment CONTRAST Sets tone of displayed characters Page 226 Section 4 7 2 ee Lighting period setting BACKLIGHT Sets a period while the backlight is on Page 227 Section 4 7 3 Pop up setting POP BLK DISABLE Enables pop up display Page 228 Section 4 7 4 192 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 4 2 CPU Monitor Test System status can be checked and device values can be changed with the display unit The CPU monitor test includes the following functions e Device monitor device test e Device clear e Forced on off Scan time monitor e Built in 1 O function monitor e Error display clear 4 2 1 Device monitor test Device memory values can be monitored Also on off status of bit devices and word device values can be checked and changed 1 Screen transition The following shows screen transition of device monitor test MENU SELECT 189 1 JOYUON NO lt p JSOVJOWUOW solAed L Z y Device test 193 2 Devices that can be monitored tested The following shows devices that can be monitored and tested by device monitor test Note that local devices cannot be monitored and tested Type Device Bit device X Y M L B F SB V SM T contact coil 2 ST contact coil C contact coil D D extended data register W W extended lin
359. th the S P DEVLD instruction lt gt Page 167 Section 3 28 4 For file registers including an extended data register D and an extended link register W the scan time is not increased due to latch 4 Latch data clear Perform a remote latch clear operation 5 Page 114 Section 3 13 4 ONLINE gt Remote Operation lt gt Latch Clear Note that any of the following operation is required to clear the latch data and file registers that are set as the latch clear disabled data Latch 2 Start Ena e Clear from the display unit 2 gt Page 201 Section 4 2 2 e Reset with the RST instruction Transfer KO with the MOV or FMOV instruction MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction e Select Clear Device s whole Memory and or Clear all File Registers W ONLINE gt PLC Memory Operation gt Clear PLC Memory lt gt Clear Device s whole Memory Clear all File Registers Clear PLC Memory Connection Channel List Connection Interface use lt gt PLC Module Target PLC Metwo J F Station No Host PLC Type 26 8T r Device Memory IV Clear Device s whole Memory File Register I Clear all File Registers e a NA 5 Precautions The latch setting does not take effect if the device is specified as a local device or the initial device value is specified for the device A battery is required to retain the device data that are set in the latch range If the batt
360. that parameter setting is not available for the grayed out items Appendix 1 2 1 PLC Name Setting A label name and a comment for the CPU module are set The settings are displayed in the list for the find CPU function MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In Ethernet Function L Parameter Setting PLC Name Fc System Puc File puc RAS Boot File Program sFc Device juo Assignment Built in Ethernet Port Setting Built in IO Function Setting Label Comment JelewueJed Old Z xipueddy Buas JelewueJed xipueddy Print Window Print Window Preview Acknowledge XY Assignment Default Parameter a q Item na Description Setting range Default Reference Label 00004 Set a label name application for the CPU Up to 10 characters module Comment 00014 Set a comment for the CPU module label Up to 64 characters 295 Appendix 1 2 2 L Parameter Setting Timer Limit Setting Low Speed High Speed 10 00 RUN PAUSE Contacts RUN xX X0 X1FFF PAUSE X X0 X1FFF Latch Data Backup Operation valid Contact Device Name ha Remote Reset I Allow Output Mode at STOP to RUN Previous State C Recalculate Output is 1 scan later r Intelligent Function Module Setting Interrupt Pointer Setting Module Synchronization IV Synchronize intelligent module s pulse up Built in CC Link Setting Use built in CC Link 100 ms 1ms 1000ms ms 0 01ms 10
361. the CPU module detects WDT ERROR In this case the program execution is stopped 3 Waiting time from when END processing is executed until next scan starts When an interrupt factor occurs during waiting time either of an interrupt program or fixed scan execution type program is executed When a service processing parameter is set a communication service processing with peripherals and intelligent function modules is performed od N O o 5 7 2 5 gt CD O o 5 83 3 3 Watchdog Timer WDT WDT is an internal timer of the CPU module that detects CPU module hardware failures and program errors 1 2 84 Setting Open the tab for watchdog timer setting The setting range is 10 to 2000ms in increments of 10ms 200ms is set by default Project window lt gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC RAS WDT Watchdog Timer Setting Enter a value gt wot Setting 200 ms 10ms 2000ms ial EXecutio Monitoring Time ms 10ms 2000ms A precision error is observed within the range of 0 to 10ms Reset WDT is reset in END processing The watchdog timer times up when the scan time is extended due to a factor such as an interrupt and the END FEND instruction were not executed within the setting value of watchdog timer When the watchdog timer times up WDT ERROR is detected and the following status occurs The CPU module turns off all outputs The RUN LE
362. the RUN status automatic data transfer to the program memory can be disabled by setting Page 141 Section 3 21 3 30 CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING c Transfer confirmation to the program memory Program transfer to the program memory can be checked by the following e On the dialog box below Program Memory Transfer Progress Transferring 82 e SM681 and SD681 Whether the transfer is in execution or complete can be checked by SM165 2 Standard RAM This memory stores file register files local device files sampling trace files and module error collection files 3 Standard ROM This memory stores data such as device comments and PLC user data 4 SD memory card This memory stores programs and parameters To execute a program stored in the SD memory card perform a boot operation gt Page 73 Section 2 9 An SD card memory is required when using the data logging function 5 Memory capacity The following table shows the memory capacity of each memory NN CPU module Program memory Standard RAM Standard ROM SD memory card aa Tz LO2CPU 80K bytes 128K bytes 512K bytes LO2CPU P L1MEM 2GBSD 2G bytes 3 3 L26CPU BT L1MEM 4GBSD 4G bytes Q D o L26CPU PBT 1040K bytes 768K bytes 2048K bytes 8 9 oa a Do n 31 6 Memory and data to be stored O Storable x Not storable Program St
363. the display unit Point FP Remove the error cause before clearing an error For how to remove error causes refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection a Operating procedure Perform the following operation Error clear screen 1 Select an error to be cleared using the A and y Ea E D y Error clear confirmation screen 2 Select YES using the A and y buttons and dl En r AA NN Do Error clear completion screen 3 After the setting is completed either of the screens me e shown left appear a e gt To return the display to the error clear screen 52 lt q press the button e 2 o 215 4 3 CPU Settings The internal time of the CPU module can be checked and changed with the display unit 4 3 1 Clock setting The internal time of the CPU module can be set 1 Screen transition The following shows screen transition of clock setting Seda 2 Setting item The following table shows items that can be set by clock setting Item Setting range Item Setting range Year 1980 to 2079 Hour 00 to 23 Month 1 to 12 Minute 00 to 59 Day 1 to 31 Second 00 to 59 216 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 3 Operating procedure Perform the following operation from the clock setting screen Clock setting screen 1 Move the cursor using the 4 and gt buttons increase or de
364. time of 1ms or less unit us gt Stores the initial scan time in increments of 1ms Ex If the stored values in SD522 and SD523 are 3 and 400 respectively the initial scan time is 3 4ms Even if the WDT instruction instruction that resets the watchdog timer is executed in the program the measurement of the initial scan time continues Point When an interrupt program or fixed scan execution type program is executed before completion of the initial execution type program execution the execution time of the executed program will be added to the initial scan time When an interrupt program of fixed scan execution type program is executed before completion of the initial execution type program execution the execution time of the executed program will be added to the initial scan time 3 Initial execution monitoring time Initial execution monitoring time is a timer for monitoring initial scan time Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC RAS WDT Watchdog Timer Setting 200 WDT Setting ms 10ms 2000ms Initial Execution Monitoring Time 30 ms 10ms 2000ms Set initial execution YW monitoring time weJBold ad uonno x jeu 18 z suweJBo1g adn in Bunnoex3 gZ The setting range is 10 to 2000ms in increments of 10ms No default value is set 4 Precautions on programming Initial execution type programs do not support the instructions that requi
365. ting a module figure in the Main block area and clicking the Error History Detail button in the System Monitor dialog box In this case only the errors of the selected module are displayed GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common O Errors are not displayed for modules that do not support the module error collection function O Errors may not be displayed when they occur frequently and successively 160 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 6 Clearing module error history On the Error History dialog box click the Clear History button O Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt System Error History Note that the errors displayed in the Intelligent Module Information tab are not cleared Point The module error history data are cleared when the standard RAM is formatted Note that a module error collection file cannot be deleted since it is automatically created after the CPU module is powered off and then on or is reset To delete the file clear the setting and then format the standard RAM 7 Precautions The CPU module stops collecting errors if backing up or restoring data are performed using the CPU module change function with memory card 161 uOnouny uonoaelloD JOU SINPON 9Z E 3 2 Latch Data Backup to Standard ROM This function holds backs up latch data such as device data and error history to the standard ROM without using a battery when the system is stopped for a long peri
366. ting cannot be registered or disabled When multiple device settings are to be registered no setting can be registered if any of them is invalid a Settings cannot be registered if e Specified program name step or device does not exist or e The number of registered settings exceeds 32 b Settings cannot be disabled if e Specified program name step or device does not exist or e No executional conditioned device test setting has been registered 9 Precautions a Priority If any of the following functions is set in the same step number that is specified by the executional conditioned device test setting the executional conditioned device test takes priority over the other functions e Monitor condition setting Sampling trace function trace point or trigger point Scan time measurement start step or end step b Executional conditioned device test and writing data to the running CPU module If the executional conditioned device test is executed during execution of an online change function only the online change function is completed while the executional conditioned device test is not executed The following message box appears Execute the executional conditioned device test again after the online change has been completed MELSOFT Application Please execute it again after completed online change function i It is not possible to execute it because the online change function is executing now lt ES 010a41
367. tiple locations Doing so may delete program files 140 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 21 3 Precautions for online change 1 Effect on the scan time Performing change increases scan time 3 Page 322 Appendix 3 2 2 Online change during boot operation Even if the online change is executed the status of boot source program is not changed 3 Operations prohibited during online change Do nat perform power off or reset to the CPU module when changing the TC setting value or transferring data to the program memory during online change If performed write the data to the CPU module again An error is displayed if any of the following operation is performed Execute again after completing the operation e Online change ladder mode online change files TC setting value change Data transfer to the program memory 4 Instructions do not operate normally during online change When data are written to the CPU module in the RUN status the following instructions do not operate normally e Rise instruction e SCJ instruction a Rise instruction The rise instruction is executed when the instruction is in the data written to the CPU module in the RUN status even if the execution condition on gt off has been met at completion of the online change Online change completed x0 frre mo JH END O AEND O A END 0 1 scan XO status ON OFF OFF OFF mo ON OFF X0 abueyo eulluo Jol Suoyneoejd E LZE snJe1
368. ton to update the registered data c Operation by different execution timing Operation of the CPU module varies depending on the timing either before or after an instruction of the specified step of changing a device value Program example M fe ee ie 100 l K100 DO j Register executional conditioned device test that sets 20 to DO in this step Operation Execution timing CPU module operation gt Before executing an Processing LD MO Changes the DO value to Xt K100 DO gt instruction in step 101 DO value 10 20 120 gt After executing an Processing LD MO XA K100 DO Changes the DO value to w gt instruction in step 101 a DO value 10 x 110 X 20 Note that when registering the executional conditioned device test with particular instruction specified a device value may not be changed depending on the execution timing even after the specified step is executed The following instructions need to be noted 126 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS e Instructions that do not change device values A device value is not changed by executing the excutional conditioned device test when the execution timing has been set to After executing instruction specifying the step for instructions that do not execute the next step such as branch instructions Classification Instruction Operation Stop STOP CJ Jump SCJ GOEND
369. ts and 404 to 7Ey and 80H to FCy for lower bits yun Aejdsig ay ul eldqelleAV sepoD Jajoeleyo G xipueddy 327 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 B C D E F 0 lt 9 C Il KmxPoO mb HH No IUTI ON ft DOS O0KU TN xma k M gt Y wm U lt HH 8 Qlr z ANA X L VI g DP a opmb poh Sie O c YU POR Z E vires hHEHR JS x UN Siw ONRPSKSL DN gt K PLU Here O gt lt xR OIX wz uA NOS gt IDANW H OL gt 05 gt 3mMI3Pi2s OWID myupP ia tOrFoCHuNMUNAS nono Sip Du st DILA SQ DQIWMD E RKR KKui mM x amp HtNL m HARD Ad bOO 3 D IRD ARTS eS DPADEDNX UX YTHAUFAWO we VYOHAUHINI gt D gt NOY GTSIINSSRASHUNNLEE amp b agt SPA LDL SHO Aa o Yn x Y lt xo LU gt lt Lu q q y p p qy p p p y pm py To the next page bl 328 APPENDICES 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 A B C D E F 85FO 8640 8650 8660 8670 8680 8690 86A0 86B0 86C0 86D0 86E0 86FO 8740 OO O O 0 0 8750 D I I IE MW V VW W uU x i 8760 E FE Po tc TT Mm a P BR RL PE se a m 8770 cm km mg kg co m Fh 8780 ae N KK Te DO Bea W He E A 8790 E uw 1 Z L A ANA U 87A0 87B0 87C0 87D0 87E0 87F0 8840 8850 8860 8870 8880 8890 dE 88A0 E E WE FZ Ff fF F amp F E E E BE Js 88B0 FB HE E Y kk 3 BD eH ft a fF HH 88C0
370. ttery to clock data only The use of this function initializes all data other than the clock data when the CPU module is powered off or is reset Data retained by a battery Description Error history The number of error history data are initialized to zero Latch relay L Cleared to zero Device in the latch range Cleared to zero Files in the standard RAM Bw os created again at power on or reset 1 Setting procedure Enter 0001 y under Switch3 in the Switch Setting for I O and Intelligent Function Module dialog box DO Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt I O Assignment gt Switch Setting Switch Setting for 1 0 and Intelligent Function Module Input Format HEX A Model Name Switch e Switch3_ Switch4 SwitchS 0001 For the life of battery installed in the CPU module when the battery life prolonging function is used refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection uoyouny 6ul6uolold ej Aueyeg ze e 185 3 33 Memory Check Function This function checks whether data in the memories of the CPU module are not changed due to such as excessive electric noise Since the CPU module automatically checks a memory setting for enabling this function is unnecessary This function does not require processing time 1 Data to be checked a Program The program during execution is compared with the
371. ug from Multiple Programming Tools i 145 3 22 1 Simultaneous monitoring from multiple programming tools 0000000 e eee 146 3 22 2 Online change from multiple programming tools 000 ccc cece eee eee 147 3 23 Self Diagnostic Function ot 148 3 24 Eros 153 13 14 3 25 LED Gontrol Funcion A El a 156 3 25 1 Methods for turning off the LEDS i 156 3 25 2 LED indication priority citar a te 157 3 26 Module Error Collection Function 2 0 00 sasas cc ttt eens 158 3 27 Latch Data Backup to Standard ROM 2 2 0 0 0 00 cece cette eee 162 3 27 41 Latch data backupis a bh ob hci a edit ce anced a vacate ald eels ale sde cl nyo 163 3 27 2 Restoring backup dataz od eR a ccc een a aA 166 3 28 Writing Reading Device Data to from Standard ROM i 167 3 29 Module Model Name Read 1 2 2 000 c ccc ete tee et etna 168 3 30 CPU Module Change Function with SD Memory Card 00sec eee eee eee 169 3 30 1Backupito SD Memory Cd escocia acpi eddy ranas dad 171 3 30 2 Backup data restoration 2 0 6 2 cee eeee 179 3 31 Clock FUNCION soe e de cere EER ie ton Ca a oe ees Ee de aS 183 3 32 Battery Life Prolonging Function 0 ccc cee ett ene es 185 3 33 Memory Check FUNGON n reme eee kl en dene ee ee ee da geen dees 186 3 34 Program Cache Memory Auto Recovery Function 2 00000 c cece eee eee 187 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 188 41 Function List 0 ec senise tice gai a tad Send coe aes 192 4 26 CPU
372. ultiple subroutine programs and or interrupt programs can be created and managed in a single standby type program Scan execution type program Scan execution type program Main routine Main routine program program P100 Subroutine program Standby type program 10 Interrupt Oa P100 Subroutine program program j 7 7 10 Interrupt program e Program type change Standby type program is used to create and store programs available in all systems Only required programs will be executed For example a program preset as a standby Wait type program in the PLC Parameter dialog box can be changed to a scan execution type program and executed in the program 1 Execution method Execute standby type programs in either of the following methods e Create subroutine and interrupt programs in a standby type program and execute the standby program upon interrupt or a call such as by a pointer Change a standby type program to any other execution type using instructions weJBold ad Aqpue s 8 Z suweJBo1g adn ny Bunnoex3 gZ 65 a Executing upon an interrupt or a call such as by a pointer When creating subroutine and or interrupt programs in a single standby type program start the program from the step 0 The FEND instruction used in creation of a subroutine or interrupt program is not required after a main routine program Program A Main routine program
373. umber of registerable devices Up to 32 devices in total can be registered f Checking the execution status Reading the forced on off registration status of a programming tool Flashing of the MODE LED green The MODE LED flashes in green when a device is registered e The on status of the 1st bit in SD840 Debug function usage Point When checking by the MODE LED or SD840 remind that they are also used to check the execution status of executional conditioned device tests 7 Page 124 Section 3 19 g Forcibly turning on off from multiple programming tools Forced on off can be registered to a single CPU module from multiple programming tools In this case the last registration is effective For this reason the forced on off status which is different from the status actually registered in the CPU module may be displayed on the screen that registered forced on off earlier When the forced on off registration is performed from multiple programming tools click the Update Status button to update the data and execute the function h Status of devices after forced on off registration data are canceled Program operations on off Program operations on off not Forced on off registered device performed performed Input used in the built in I O function Uses the on off status input from modules Input from connected modules on the base unit Input of the CPU module to be refreshed fr
374. unction module Input module Input module Output module Output module 16 32 points points 0090 00A0 00B0 00DO to to to to 009F 00AF 00CF 00DF The start I O numbers are as below z LO2CPU L02CPU P L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT arget Default I O assignment Default I O assignment Built in 1 0 00004 Change allowed 00004 Change allowed Built in CC Link 00104 Change allowed Following modules Main block The module to the right of a CPU module when a branch module is not connected or connected to the left of the END cover 0010H Change allowed 00304 Change allowed The module to the right of a branch module when a branch module is connected to the right of a CPU module Following modules Extension block The module to the right of an extension module when a branch module is connected to the left Consecutive Consecutive of the END cover number from the Change allowed number from the Change allowed The module to the right of a branch module previous block previous block when a branch module is connected to the right of an extension module The assignment of the start I O number is not necessary for the built in Ethernet port branch module extension module RS 232 adapter and END cover 40 22 2 1 Ea CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION OF PROGRAMMING I O number assignment Setting method To assign I O numbers open the I O Assignment tab 2 gt Page 295 Appendix 1
375. urchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal volt
376. use it does not support the built in CC Link function 297 JelewueJed Old Z xipueddy Sumes JelewueJed xipueddy gt Appendix 1 2 3 PLC File Setting Parameters required for the files used in the CPU module are set L Parameter Setting PLC Name PLc System PLC File Fc RAS Boot File Program sFc Device jro Assignment Built in Ethernet Port Setting Built in I O Function Setting File Register Not used lo 16 5 Corresponding Memory Use the following file Corresponding Memory standar J RAM Drive 3 MAIN Capacity 128 K Points 1K 384K Points File Name Transfer to Standard ROM at Latch data backup operation Following settings are available in device setting when select Use the Following file and specify capacity Change of latch 2 of file register Assignment to expanded data register expanded link register of part of file register area Comment File Used in a Command Not used Use the same file name as the program Corresponding Memory v Use the following file Corresponding Memory y File Name Print Window Print Window Preview Initial Device Value Not used Use the same file name as the program Corresponding Memory y C Use the following File Corresponding Memory File Name File for Local Device Not used C Use the following File Corresponding Memory File used for SP DEYST S DEYLD Instruct
377. used and each program from the CPU module After the device points of the internal user devices are changed Write the devices and each program which were read before the device point change to the CPU module For the read write of devices and programs refer to the following Operating manual for the programming tool used 2 Memory size Set the internal user devices so that the following condition is satisfied Bit device size Timer retentive timer and counter sizes Word device size lt 29K words e For bit devices 16 points are calculated as one word CC Y M L B F SB V S Words 16 Bit device size For the timer retentive timer and counter 16 points are calculated as 18 words T ST C 16 x 18 Words Timer retentive timer or counter size For word devices 16 points are calculated as 16 words D W SW 16 x 16 Words Word device size 233 SeolAed Jesn euJajul Z S 3 Device point assignment example The following table shows device point assignment examples based on the device point assignment sheet in Appendix 6 Numeric Number of device point 2 Restriction check Device name Symbol p Doralion Points Range Size words Points bits Input relay X 16 8K 8192 X0000 to X1FFF 16 512 x1 8192 Output relay 1 Y 16 8K 8192 Y0000 to Y1FFF 16 512 x1 8192 Internal relay M 10 1
378. used independently for each program Using local devices allows programming of multiple independently executed programs without considering other programs Note that local device data can be stored in the standard RAM only Exjr M7000 and higher portion is set as a local device it can be separately used for each program that is executing M7000 and higher portion Program A Standard RAM NE PAR gt Hy Internal relay M7000 ON OFF I 1 1 1 1 Program B ON OFF data of M7000 M7090 l Internal relay ON OFF data of M7000 I AAA The following devices can be used as local devices e Internal relay M e Counter C e Edge relay V e Data register D e Timer T ST Index register Z After program execution data in the local device file of the standard RAM are exchanged with the data in the device memory of the CPU module For this reason the scan time increases by the time for data exchange Program A Program B Program C Program Restored Saved Restored Saved Restored Local device __ Local device _ Local device _ For For For 1 program A program A program A For For For program B program B For For program C program C program B For program C Point O There are some instructions for which a local device cannot be specified For details refer to the pages describing devices available for ea
379. user program written to the program memory If they do not match a stop error RAM ERROR error code 1160 is detected b Parameter The parameters are compared with the ones written to the parameter valid drive c Device memory If the change of data in the device memory is detected a stop error RAM ERROR error code 1161 is detected For the LCPU whose serial number first five digits is 14012 or later the device information which contains data change information can be checked in SD927 and SD928 For details on the special register refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 2 Execution timing e Program At program execution e Parameter e When the CPU module is powered off and then on When the CPU module is reset When the CPU module is set from STOP to RUN after data are written to it e Device memory When device data are read 186 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE FUNCTIONS 3 34 Program Cache Memory Auto Recovery Function Noe3 This function is to restore the error location automatically by using data in the program memory which are stored in the flash ROM when the memory check function 2 gt Page 186 Section 3 33 detects an error in the program cache memory This function enables the CPU module to continue its operation even if an error such as change of data in the program cache memory occurs due to noise 1 Execution conditio
380. using the A and y buttons and press the button Latched device memory clear selection screen 2 Select whether to clear the values of devices within latch range using the A and y buttons and press the button can be set for device memory clear only Device memory clear screen 3 Select YES using the A and y buttons and dl F n File register clear screen Device memory clear confirmation screen 4 inthe confirmation screen select YES again File register clear confirmation screen To the next page using the A and W buttons and press the button 202 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS y Device memory clear completion screen 5 After the setting is completed any of the screens shown left appear To return the display to the device clear screen press the button File register clear completion screen Jeajo so5IAed ZZY S9 JIOYUON NAO ZY 203 4 2 3 Forced on off X and Y devices can be forcibly turned on or off with the display unit The forced on off includes the following functions e Forced on off registration e Forced on off clear e Forced on off batch clear e Forced on off list 1 Screen transition The following shows screen transition of forced on off 204 CHAPTER 4 DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONS 2 Forced on off registration Specify a device X or Y and whether to turn on or off the specified device The specified device and device status are registere
381. valid in the Module Error History Collection Intelligent Function Module area O Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC RAS Select any one option button Module Error History Collection Intelligent Function Module Deselected parameters remain gt M Collection of intelligent Function module error histories is valid unavailable Selecting this enables intelligent Function modules errors to be browsed in the Error History window of the system monitor Corresponding Memory system Memory y Collection No 1 Items Scan 1 100 Item Setting item Setting range Default Corresponding System memory System memory Select a storage location roe Memory 3 Standard RAM 2 History No Enter the number of errors to collect only when they are stored in 32 to 1000 100 ds the standard RAM id Collection No 3 Stored in system memory 1 to 100 1 Enter the number of errors to collect in one scan Stored in standard RAM 1 to 128 4 When a sampling trace file is stored to the standard RAM powering off and then on or resetting the CPU module will delete the file 2 The battery consumption may be increased 1 MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 3 If collected module errors are frequently lost set a greater value to Collection No The recommended value is the number of intelligent function modules that sup
382. witching from STOP to RUN op asung O O p e Power on reset CANT SETA Switching from STOP to RUN Sop Ot Plashing O O Pointer setting error Power on reset CANT SETQ Switching from STOP to RUN Stop Om Flashing O O To the next page 151 uoqound ogsou6elq JleS EZ E O Self diagnostics is performed x Self diagnostics is not performed CPU LED status L26CPU Diagnostics arron Diagnostic timin module Ese Su g message e g RUN ERR L02CPU P L26CPU status PBT ia OPERATION p Stop Flashing 1 2 Operation error ERROR Instruction execution Continue Off On On O O ie ER Instruction execution Sto Off Flashin ERROR E 9 O O error a ee CANT Instruction execution Sto off Flashin O EXECUTE P p g error Interrupt program error CANT Instruction execution Sto off Flashin O O peered EXECUTE k 9 rea Rn FORMAT Instruction execution Stop Off Flashing O O Program isane 4 SFC block SARE eee CAN T SET BL Switching from STOP to RUN Stop off Flashing O O configuration error SFC st fi ti led ep conliguration CAN T SET S Switching from STOP to RUN Stop off Flashing O O SFC execution error Fe Switching from STOP to RUN Sto off Flashin EXE ERROR q p d O O SFCP FORMAT SFC syntax error ERR Switching from STOP to RUN Stop Off Flashing O O SFC block ti BLOCK mor A EXE ERROR Instruction execution Stop Off Flashing O O SFC st ti ST
383. wueJed xipueddy 307 Appendix 1 2 10 The parameters set in the I O Assignment tab and CC Link setting can be confirmed Acknowledge XY Assignment A I O Assignment PLC Built in 1 0 Function 16Points Acknowledge XY Assignment IO Assignment PLC Built in CC Link 32Points I O Assignment Built in CC Link 32Points The part displayed in light blue is start XY and module assigned by I O assignment because of the blank automatically The part displayed in yellow shows the part that the start XY assigned automatically by I O assignment is out of the range In the I O assignment setting it is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Parameter ee A Item No Description Setting range Default Reference Acknowledge XY The parameters set in the I O Assignment Assignment 308 tab and CC Link setting can be confirmed APPENDICES Appendix 1 2 11 Built in Ethernet Port Setting Parameters required for using the built in Ethernet port are set L Parameter Setting PLC Name PLc System Puc File PLc RAS Boot File Program sFc Device jxo Assignment uilt in I O Function Setting IP Address Setting Open Setting Input Format DEC FTP setting IP Address 192 168 3 39 Time Setting Subnet Mask Pattern Default Router IP Address Communication Data Code Binary Cod
384. xecutional conditioned device test for the start step of the instruction r LF However if more than one executional conditioned device test settings are registered with the same device name and the same execution timing for one step number the set data are overwritten More than one setting with the same device name can be registered for one step if the execution timing differs 125 Point FP O When setting a word device with a different data type a device is regarded as the same device When a word device is set in the order of D100 16 bit integer and then D100 Real number single precision D100 Real number single precision is registered O When setting a device with a different modification method such as a bit specified word device digit specified bit device or index modified device a device is regarded as a different device Ex When a word device is set in the order of D100 F and then D100Z0 Real number single precision both devices are registered b Registration from multiple programming tools The executional conditioned test setting can be registered to a CPU module from multiple programming tools Note however that if an executional conditioned device test setting is registered with the same device name in the same step the existing data are overwritten Before registering executional conditioned test settings from multiple programming tools click the Update Status but

MELSEC-L CPU Module User`s Manual (Function Explanation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents